Qj61bt11n Manual

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
MELSEC System Q
Programmable Logic Controllers
User's Manual
QJ61BT11N
CC-Link Master/Lokal Module
Art. no.: 158161

01 07 2005
SH (NA)-080394E MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
Version D
• SAFETY PRECAUTIONS •
(Always read these precautions before using this equipment.)
Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product. For the safety precautions of the
programmable controller system, please read the user's manual of the CPU module to use.
In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION".
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

! DANGER resulting in death or severe injury.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

! CAUTION resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.
Note that the ! CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances.
Always follow the precautions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.
Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.
[DESIGN PRECAUTION]
! DANGER
• See Chapter 5 of this manual for each station's operating status when there is a communication
error in the data link.
• When performing the control of the PLC in operation (changing data) by connecting a personal
computer, etc. to the intelligent function module or connecting peripheral devices to the CPU
module, configure an interlock circuit in a sequence program so the safety of the overall system
is always maintained.
Before performing other controls of the PLC in operation (changing program and operation
status (status control)), read this manual carefully and confirm if the overall safety is maintained.
Especially, when this control is performed to a remote PC from an external device, troubles that
have occurred on the PLC side may not be able to immediately be handled if there is a data
communication error.
Define a troubleshooting agreement between external devices and the PLC CPU for data
communication error occurrences, as well as construct an interlock circuit in the sequence
program.
A-1 A-1
[DESIGN PRECAUTION]
! DANGER
• Do not write data into the "system area" of the buffer memory of intelligent function modules.
Also, do not output the "prohibited to use" signal as the output signal to an intelligent function
module from the PLC CPU.
Writing data into the "system area" or outputting a signal for "prohibited to use" may cause
system malfunction in the PLC.
• To specify the automatic refresh parameter, specify "Y" for the remote output RY refresh device.
If a value other than "Y" (for example, M or L) is specified, the status of the device will remain as
it was prior to the STOP operation when the CPU is stopped.
See Section 4.4.10 for how to stop the data link.
• If wire breakage occurs in the CC-Link dedicated cable, the line may become instable, resulting
in a data link communication error at multiple stations. Configure an interlock circuit in a
sequence program to operate the system toward the safety side if a data link communication
error occurs at multiple stations. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to false output or
malfunction.
[DESIGN PRECAUTION]
! CAUTION
• Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires, or
install them close to each other.
They should be installed 100mm(3.9inch) or more from each other.
Not doing so could result in noise that may cause malfunction.
[INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS]
! CAUTION
• Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in the CPU
user's manual to use.
Using this PLC in an environment outside the range of the general specifications may cause
electric shock, fire, malfunction, and damage to or deterioration of the product.
• While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of module, insert the module fixing tab
into the fixing hole in the base unit until it stops. Then, securely mount the module with the fixing
hole as a supporting point.
Improper installation may result in malfunction, breakdown or dropping out of the module.
Securely fix the module with screws if it is subject to vibration during use.
• Tighten the screws within the range of specified torque.
If the screws are loose, it may cause fallout, short circuits, or malfunction.
If the screws are tightened too much, it may cause damage to the screw and/or the module,
resulting in fallout, short circuits or malfunction.
• Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting
or removing the module.
Not doing so may cause damage to the module.
• Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the module.
Doing so may cause malfunction or failure in the module.
A-2 A-2
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
! CAUTION
• When turning on the power and operating the module after installing is completed, always attach
the terminal cover that comes with the product.
There is a risk of malfunction if the terminal cover is not attached.
• Tighten the terminal screws within the range of specified torque.
If the terminal screws are loose, it may cause short circuits, or malfunction.
If the terminal screws are tightened too much, it may cause damage to the screw and/or the
module, resulting in fallout, short circuits or malfunction.
• Be careful not to let foreign matters such as sawdust or wire chips get inside the module.
These may cause fires, failure or malfunction.
• The top surface of the module is covered with protective film to prevent foreign objects such as
cable offcuts from entering the module when wiring.
Do not remove this film until the wiring is complete.
Before operating the system, be sure to remove the film to provide adequate heat ventilation.
• Use a dedicated cable as specified by the manufacturer for the CC-Link system. If a cable other
than the one specified by the manufacturer is used, the performance of the CC-Link system
cannot be guaranteed. Also, follow the specifications listed in Chapter 3 for the overall cable
distance and the station-to-station cable length. If wiring is done other than as specified,
accurate transmission of data cannot be guaranteed.
• Be sure to fix communication cables or power supply cables leading from the module by placing
them in the duct or clamping them.
Cables not placed in the duct or without clamping may hang or shift, allowing them to be
accidentally pulled, which may cause a module malfunction and cable damage.
• Do not install the control lines together with the communication cables, or bring them close to
each other. Failure to do so may cause malfunctions due to noise.
• Be sure to fix the wires or cables by ducts or clamps when connecting them to the module.
When removing the cable with a connector, hold the connector on the side that is connected to
the module.
When removing the cable connected to the terminal block, first loosen the screws on the part
that is connected to the terminal block.
Pulling the cable that is still connected to the module may cause malfunction or damage to the
module or cable.
A-3 A-3
[STARTING AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]
! CAUTION
• Do not disassemble or modify each module.
Doing so could cause failure, malfunction, injury or fire.
• Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting
or removing the module.
Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the module.
• Do not touch the connector while the power is on.
Doing so may cause malfunction.
• Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply before cleaning or retightening the
terminal screws or module fixing screws.
Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the module.
If the screws are loose, it may cause fallout, short circuits, or malfunction.
If the screws are tightened too much, it may cause damages to the screws and/or the module,
resulting in fallout, short circuits or malfunction.
Do not mount/remove the module onto/from the base unit more than 50 times (IEC 61131-2-
compliant), after the first use of the product. Failure to do so may cause malfunction.
• Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body,
etc., before touching the module.
Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module.
[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]
! CAUTION
• When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.
A-4 A-4
REVISIONS
The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date Manual Number Revision
May, 2003 SH (NA)-080394E-A First edition
May, 2004 SH (NA)-080394E-B Addition
Appendix 6
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 2.2.1, Section 2.2.3, Section 2.2.4,
Chapter 4, Section 4.1, Section 4.3.3, Section 4.4.14, Section 7.2.1,
Section 8.2.2, Section 8.3.1, Section 8.3.2, Section 8.4.1, Section 8.4.2,
Section 13.1, Section 13.3, Appendix 3
Dec., 2004 SH (NA)-080394E-C Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Chapter 1, Section 2.2.1, Section 3.1,
Section 4.4.1, Section 4.4.2, Section 4.4.3, Section 4.4.14,
Section 5.4.1, Section 7.3, Section 8.4.2, Section 13.3, Appendix 2,
Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 2.6, Appendix 2.7
Jul., 2005 SH (NA)-080394E-D Addition
Section 11.1
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 2.2.1, Section 2.2.2, Section 4.4.3,
Section 4.4.6, Section 6.2, Section 6.3.1, Section 6.3.2, Section 6.4.1,
Section 6.4.2, Section 6.5.1, Section 6.5.2, Section 8.4.1, Section 8.4.2,
Section 13.3, Appendix 2.7, Appendix 7.1
Japanese Manual Version SH-080395-D
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
 2003 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
A-5 A-5
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing the MELSEC-Q series PLC.

Before using the equipment, please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions
and performance of the Q series PLC you have purchased, so as to ensure correct use.
Please forward a copy of this manual to the end user.
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS..............................................................................................................................A- 1
REVISIONS ....................................................................................................................................................A- 5
INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................................A- 6
Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction ................................................................A-13
About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations ................................................................................................A-14
Product Components .....................................................................................................................................A-16
1 OVERVIEW 1- 1 to 1-12
1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 1- 1
1.2 Compatibility with CC-Link...................................................................................................................... 1- 2
1.3 Features .................................................................................................................................................. 1- 2
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2- 1 to 2- 9
2.1 System Configuration.............................................................................................................................. 2- 1

2.2 Applicable System................................................................................................................................... 2- 4
2.2.1 Applicable modules and number of CPUs that can be mounted.................................................... 2- 4
2.2.2 Notes on the system configuration .................................................................................................. 2- 6
2.2.3 How to check the function version................................................................................................... 2- 8
2.2.4 CC-Link version................................................................................................................................ 2- 9
3 SPECIFICATIONS 3- 1 to 3- 7
3.1 Performance Specifications .................................................................................................................... 3- 1

3.1.1 Maximum overall cable distance (for Ver. 1.00).............................................................................. 3- 3
3.1.2 Maximum overall cable distance (for Ver. 1.10).............................................................................. 3- 5
3.2 CC-Link Dedicated Cable ....................................................................................................................... 3- 6
4 FUNCTIONS 4- 1 to 4-75
4.1 Function List ............................................................................................................................................ 4- 1

4.2 Basic Functions ....................................................................................................................................... 4- 3
4.2.1 Communication with the remote I/O stations .................................................................................. 4- 3
4.2.2 Communication with the remote device stations............................................................................. 4- 5
4.2.3 Communication with the local stations ............................................................................................ 4-10
4.2.4 Communication with the intelligent device stations......................................................................... 4-16
4.2.5 Parameter setting with GX Developer ............................................................................................. 4-22
4.2.6 Parameter setting with dedicated instruction .................................................................................. 4-23
A-6 A-6
4.3 Functions for Improving System Reliability ............................................................................................ 4-25
4.3.1 Disconnecting data link faulty stations and continuing the data link with only normal stations
(Slave station cut-off function)......................................................................................................... 4-25
4.3.2 Automatically reconnecting a disconnected data link faulty station when it returns to normal
(Automatic return function) .............................................................................................................. 4-26
4.3.3 Continuing the data link when an error occurs in the master station PLC CPU
(Data link status setting when the master station PLC CPU has an error).................................... 4-27
4.3.4 Retaining the device status of a data link faulty station
(Setting the status of input data from a data link faulty station) ..................................................... 4-28
4.3.5 Clearing data in case of PLC CPU STOP
(Slave station refresh/compulsory clear setting in case of PLC CPU STOP) ............................... 4-29
4.3.6 Continuing the data link even when the master station is faulty
(Standby master function) ............................................................................................................... 4-31
4.4 Handy Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 4-45
4.4.1 Simplifying the initialization procedure registration of remote device stations
(Remote device station initialization procedure registration function) ........................................... 4-45
4.4.2 Performing high-speed processing (Event issuance for the interrupt program) ............................ 4-49
4.4.3 Enabling the data link simply by powering on (Automatic CC-Link startup) .................................. 4-52
4.4.4 Communicating with intelligent device stations (Remote net mode).............................................. 4-54
4.4.5 Speeding up the response from remote I/O stations (Remote I/O net mode) ............................... 4-54
4.4.6 Creating a program that contains modules to be added in the future
(Reserved station function) ............................................................................................................. 4-55
4.4.7 Powering off a station in operation without error detection
(Error invalid station setting function).............................................................................................. 4-56
4.4.8 Synchronizing the link scan with the sequence scan (Scan synchronous function)...................... 4-57
4.4.9 Replacing modules without error detection (Temporary error invalid station setting function) ..... 4-61
4.4.10 Checking operations for each local station (Data link stop/restart) .............................................. 4-62
4.4.11 Station number overlap checking function .................................................................................... 4-63
4.4.12 Multiple PLC system support ......................................................................................................... 4-64
4.4.13 Reducing the reserved points of the remote I/O stations (Remote I/O station points setting) .... 4-65
4.4.14 Increasing the number of cyclic points (Remote net ver.2 mode) ................................................ 4-67
4.5 Transient Transmission Functions ......................................................................................................... 4-75
4.5.1 Performing transient transmission (Dedicated instructions) ........................................................... 4-75
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME 5- 1 to 5-45
5.1 Link Scan Time ....................................................................................................................................... 5- 1

5.2 Transmission Delay Time ....................................................................................................................... 5- 4
5.2.1 Master station remote I/O station ............................................................................................... 5- 4
5.2.2 Master station remote device station (Ver. 1 compatible slave station).................................... 5- 7
5.2.3 Master station remote device station (Ver. 2 compatible slave station).................................... 5-12
5.2.4 Master station local station (Ver. 1 compatible slave station) ................................................... 5-20
5.2.5 Master station local station (Ver. 2 compatible slave station) ................................................... 5-26
5.2.6 Master station intelligent device station ..................................................................................... 5-34
5.3 Processing Time for Dedicated Instructions .......................................................................................... 5-35
5.3.1 Master station local station ......................................................................................................... 5-35
5.3.2 Local station local station............................................................................................................ 5-38
5.3.3 Master station intelligent device station ..................................................................................... 5-39
A-7 A-7
5.4 Link Refresh Time ................................................................................................................................... 5-40
5.4.1 Master station/local station .............................................................................................................. 5-40
5.5 Station Status at Error Occurrence ........................................................................................................ 5-44
5.5.1 Status of the master station, standby master station (when the master station is operating)
and remote I/O station at error occurrence..................................................................................... 5-44
5.5.2 Status of the remote device station, local station, standby master station
(when the local station is operating) and intelligent device station at error occurrence................ 5-45
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS 6- 1 to 6-52
6.1 Procedure from Parameter Settings to Data Link Startup ..................................................................... 6- 1

6.1.1 CPU parameter area and master module parameter memory....................................................... 6- 1
6.1.2 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with GX Developer.................................. 6- 2
6.1.3 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with dedicated instruction ....................... 6- 2
6.2 Parameter Setting Items ......................................................................................................................... 6- 3
6.3 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer (Remote net ver.1 mode).................................... 6- 5
6.3.1 Master station network parameter settings ..................................................................................... 6- 5
6.3.2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings...................................................................... 6-10
6.3.3 Local station network parameter settings........................................................................................ 6-12
6.3.4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings ........................................................................ 6-15
6.4 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer (Remote net ver.2 mode).................................... 6-17
6.4.1 Master station network parameter settings ..................................................................................... 6-17
6.5 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer (Remote net additional mode) ............................ 6-29
6.6 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer (Remote I/O net mode)....................................... 6-43
6.7 Example of Parameter Setting with Dedicated Instruction .................................................................... 6-48
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK 7- 1 to 7-18
7.1 Procedure Before Starting the Data Link ............................................................................................... 7- 1

7.2 Installation ............................................................................................................................................... 7- 3
7.2.1 Handling precautions ....................................................................................................................... 7- 3
7.2.2 Installation environment ................................................................................................................... 7- 4
7.3 Part Identification Nomenclature and Settings....................................................................................... 7- 4
7.4 Checking the Module Status (Hardware Test)....................................................................................... 7- 7
7.5 Connecting the Modules Using the CC-Link Dedicated Cables............................................................ 7- 9
7.5.1 Wiring check ..................................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.6 T-Branch Connection with the CC-Link Dedicated Cable ..................................................................... 7-11
7.6.1 T-Branch system configuration ........................................................................................................ 7-11
7.6.2 T-Branch communication specifications list .................................................................................... 7-12
A-8 A-8
7.7 Switch Settings........................................................................................................................................ 7-13
7.7.1 Station number setting ..................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.7.2 Transmission rate and mode settings ............................................................................................. 7-14
7.8 Checking the Connection Status (Line Test) ......................................................................................... 7-15
8 PROGRAMMING 8- 1 to 8-40
8.1 Precautions on Programming .................................................................................................................. 8- 1

8.2 I/O Signals for the PLC CPU ................................................................................................................... 8- 2
8.2.1 I/O signal list ...................................................................................................................................... 8- 2
8.2.2 Details of the I/O signals ................................................................................................................... 8- 4
8.3 Buffer Memory.......................................................................................................................................... 8- 5
8.3.1 Buffer memory list ............................................................................................................................. 8- 5
8.3.2 Buffer memory details ....................................................................................................................... 8- 8
8.4 Link Special Relays and Registers (SB/SW) .......................................................................................... 8-26
8.4.1 Link special relays (SB)..................................................................................................................... 8-26
8.4.2 Link special registers (SW) ............................................................................................................... 8-31
8.5 Mode Selection Method ........................................................................................................................... 8-40
9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE I/O STATIONS 9- 1 to 9-10
9.1 When Remote I/O Net Mode is Used..................................................................................................... 9- 1

9.1.1 Configuring a system ....................................................................................................................... 9- 1
(1) Setting the master station ................................................................................................................... 9- 2
(2) Setting the remote I/O stations ........................................................................................................... 9- 3
9.1.2 Setting the master station parameters ............................................................................................ 9- 4
(1) Setting the network parameters of the master station....................................................................... 9- 4
(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station ....................................................... 9- 6
9.1.3 Creating a program .......................................................................................................................... 9- 7
9.1.4 Performing the data link ................................................................................................................... 9- 9
(1) Confirming the operation with the LED display.................................................................................. 9- 9
(2) Confirming the operation with the sequence program....................................................................... 9-10
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND

REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS 10- 1 to 10-57
10.1 When Remote Net Ver. 1 Mode is Used............................................................................................ 10- 1

10.1.1 Configuring a system ................................................................................................................... 10- 1
(1) Setting the master station ................................................................................................................. 10- 2
(2) Setting the remote device station ..................................................................................................... 10- 3
10.1.2 Setting the master station parameters ........................................................................................ 10- 4
(1) Setting the network parameters of the master station..................................................................... 10- 4
(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station ..................................................... 10- 6
10.1.3 Initial setting of the remote device station ................................................................................... 10- 7
(1) Setting the target station number ..................................................................................................... 10- 7
(2) Setting the regist procedure registration .......................................................................................... 10- 7
(3) Validating the remote device station initial settings ......................................................................... 10-11
10.1.4 Creating a program ...................................................................................................................... 10-13
A-9 A-9
10.1.5 Performing the data link ............................................................................................................... 10-16
(1) Confirming the operation with the LED display................................................................................ 10-16
(2) Confirming the operation with the sequence program..................................................................... 10-17
10.2 When Remote Net Ver. 2 Mode is Used............................................................................................ 10-18
10.2.1 Configuring a system ................................................................................................................... 10-18
(1) Setting the master station ................................................................................................................. 10-19
(2) Setting the remote device station ..................................................................................................... 10-20
10.2.2 Setting the master station parameters ........................................................................................ 10-22
(1) Setting the network parameters of the master station..................................................................... 10-22
(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station ..................................................... 10-24
10.2.3 Initial setting of the remote device station ................................................................................... 10-25
(1) Setting the target station number ..................................................................................................... 10-25
(2) Setting the regist procedure registration .......................................................................................... 10-25
10.3 When Remote Net Additional Mode is Used ..................................................................................... 10-38
(1) Setting the master station ................................................................................................................. 10-39
(2) Setting the remote device station ..................................................................................................... 10-40
10.3.3 Initial setting of the remote device station ................................................................................... 10-45
(1) Setting the target station number ..................................................................................................... 10-45
(2) Setting the regist procedure registration .......................................................................................... 10-45
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS 11- 1 to 11-47
11.1 Secured 32-bit Data ............................................................................................................................ 11- 1

11.2 When Remote Net Ver.1 Mode is Used............................................................................................. 11- 2
11.2.1 Configuring a system ................................................................................................................... 11- 2
(1) Setting the master and local stations ............................................................................................... 11- 3
11.2.2 Setting the master station parameters ........................................................................................ 11- 4
(1) Setting the network parameters of the master station..................................................................... 11- 4
(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station ..................................................... 11- 6
11.2.3 Setting the local station parameters ............................................................................................ 11- 7
(1) Setting the network parameters of the local station......................................................................... 11- 7
(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the local station ......................................................... 11- 9
A - 10 A - 10
(1) Master station program..................................................................................................................... 11-12
(2) Local station program ....................................................................................................................... 11-12
11.3 When Remote Net Ver. 2 Mode is Used............................................................................................ 11-16
(1) Setting the master and local stations ............................................................................................... 11-17
11.3.3 Setting the local station parameters ............................................................................................ 11-21
(1) Setting the network parameters of the ver.1 compatible local station (station number 1) ............. 11-21
(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver.1 compatible local station
(station number 1)............................................................................................................................. 11-23
(station number 5)............................................................................................................................. 11-26
11.4 When Remote Net Additional Mode is Used ..................................................................................... 11-32
(1) Setting the master and local stations ............................................................................................... 11-33
11.4.3 Setting the local station parameters ............................................................................................ 11-37
(station number 1)............................................................................................................................. 11-39
(station number 5)............................................................................................................................. 11-42
12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE

STATIONS 12- 1 to 12- 2
A - 11 A - 11
13 TROUBLESHOOTING 13- 1 to 13-21
13.1 Verification upon Problem Occurrence .............................................................................................. 13- 1

13.2 Troubleshooting Procedures When the "ERR." LED of the Master Station is Flashing or
When Normal Data cannot be Sent/Received During Data Link ...................................................... 13- 8
13.3 Error Codes ......................................................................................................................................... 13-10
13.4 CC-Link Diagnostics Using the GX Developer .................................................................................. 13-16
APPENDIX App- 1 to App-46
Appendix 1 External Dimensions Diagram...............................................................................................App- 1

Appendix 2 Dedicated Instruction List ......................................................................................................App- 2
Appendix 2.1 RIRD instruction..............................................................................................................App- 3
Appendix 2.2 RIWT instruction .............................................................................................................App- 8
Appendix 2.3 RIRCV instruction ...........................................................................................................App-13
Appendix 2.4 RISEND instruction.........................................................................................................App-18
Appendix 2.5 RIFR instruction ..............................................................................................................App-23
Appendix 2.6 RITO instruction ..............................................................................................................App-26
Appendix 2.7 RLPASET instruction ......................................................................................................App-29
Appendix 3 Differences Between the New and Previous Models ...........................................................App-40
Appendix 4 Precautions when Changing from AJ61QBT11 to QJ61BT11N..........................................App-41
Appendix 5 Precautions when Changing from QJ61BT11 to QJ61BT11N ............................................App-41
Appendix 6 CPU-dependent Function Availability ...................................................................................App-42
Appendix 7 Parameter Setting Checklist..................................................................................................App-43
Appendix 7.1 Parameter setting checklist ............................................................................................App-43
Appendix 7.2 Station information setting checklist...............................................................................App-44
INDEX Index- 1 to Index- 4
A - 12 A - 12
Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction
For details on making Mitsubishi PLC conform to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction when
installing it in your product, please see Chapter 3, "EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction" of the User's
Manual (Hardware) of the CPU module to use.
The CE logo is printed on the rating plate on the main body of the PLC that conforms to the EMC directive
and low voltage instruction.
To conform this product to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directive, refer to the Section of "CC-Link
Modules" in Chapter 3 "EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directive" of the User’s Manual (Hardware) of the
CPU module used.
A - 13 A - 13
About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations
This manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to describe the QJ61BT11N CC-Link
System Master/Local Module, unless otherwise specified.
Generic Term/Abbreviation Description

QJ61BT11N Abbreviation for QJ61BT11N CC-Link System Master/Local Module
Transmission method by which to periodically communicate the contents of remote
Cyclic transmission
I/O and remote registers.
Transmission method with which the counterpart is specified and 1:1 communication
Transient transmission
is used at an arbitrary timing.
Station that controls the data link system.
Master station
One master station is required for each system.
Station having a PLC CPU and the ability to communicate with the master and other
Local station
local stations.
Remote station that handles bit unit data only. (Performs input and output with
Remote I/O station
external devices.) (AJ65BTB1-16D, AJ65SBTB1-16D)
Remote station that handles bit unit and word unit data only. (Performs input and
Remote device station output with external devices, and analog data conversion.)
(AJ65BT-64AD, AJ65BT-64DAV, AJ65BT-64DAI)
Generic term for remote I/O station and remote device station.
Remote station
(Controlled by the master station)
Station that can perform transient transmission, such as the AJ65BT-R2 (including
Intelligent device station
local stations).
Backup station for data link control when the link to the master station is disconnected
Standby master station
due to a PLC CPU or power supply problem.
Generic term for remote I/O station, remote device station, local station, intelligent
Slave station
device station and standby master station.
Generic term for QJ61BT11N, QJ61BT11, AJ61BT11, A1SJ61BT11, AJ61QBT11,
Master/local module
and A1SJ61QBT11
Master module
and A1SJ61QBT11 when they are used as master stations.
Local module
and A1SJ61QBT11 when they are used as local stations.
Generic term for AJ65BTB1-16D, AJ65SBTB1-16D, AJ65BT-64AD, AJ65BT-64DAV,
Remote module
AJ65BT-64DAI, and A852GOT
Module that can perform transient transmission, such as the AJ65BT-R2 (including
Intelligent device module
local module).
Dedicated mode for sending and receiving data to and from the remote I/O station at
Remote I/O net mode
high speed.
Mode that can communicate with all stations used for CC-Link (remote I/O station,
remote device station, local station, intelligent device station, and standby master
Remote net mode station)
The remote net mode has three different modes: remote net ver. 1 mode, remote net
ver. 2 mode, and remote net additional mode.
Mode in which complete compatibility with the conventional module (QJ61BT11) is
achieved.
Remote net ver. 1 mode
Select this mode when the number of cyclic points need not be increased or when the
QJ61BT11N is used to replace the conventional module as a maintenance product.
Select this mode when increasing the number of cyclic points and configuring a new
system.
Select this mode when adding a ver. 2 compatible station to the existing system to
Remote net additional mode
increase the number of cyclic points.
Ver. 1 compatible slave station Slave station compatible with the remote net ver. 1 mode.
Ver. 2 compatible slave station Slave station compatible with the remote net ver. 2 mode.
A - 14 A - 14
Generic Term/Abbreviation Description
Link special relay (for CC-Link)
SB Bit unit information that indicates the module operating status and data link status of
the master station/local station. (Expressed as SB for convenience)
Link special register (for CC-Link)
SW 16-bit unit information that indicates the module operating status and data link status
of the master station/local station. (Expressed as SW for convenience)
Remote input (for CC-Link)
RX Information entered in bit units from the remote station to the master station.
(Expressed as RX for convenience)
Remote output (for CC-Link)
RY Information output in bit units from the master station to the remote station.
(Expressed as RY for convenience)
Remote register (Write area for CC-Link)
RWw Information output in 16-bit units from the master station to the remote device station.
(Expressed as RWw for convenience)
Remote register (Read area for CC-Link)
RWr Information entered in 16-bit units from the remote device station to the master
station. (Expressed as RWr for convenience)
Generic term for AOJ2HCPU, A1SCPU, A1SHCPU, A1SJCPU-S3, A1SJHCPU,
A2SCPU, A2SHCPU, A2USCPU, A2USCPU-S1, A2USHCPU-S1, A1NCPU,
ACPU
A2NCPU, A2NCPU-S1, A3NCPU, A2ACPU, A2ACPU-S1, A3ACPU, A2UCPU,
A2UCPU-S1, A3UCPU and A4UCPU
Generic term for A2USCPU, A2USCPU-S1, A2USHCPU-S1, A2UCPU, A2UCPU-S1,
AnUCPU
A3UCPU and A4UCPU
Generic term for Q2ASCPU, Q2ASCPU-S1, Q2ASHCPU, Q2ASHCPU-S1, Q2ACPU,
QnACPU
Q2ACPU-S1, Q3ACPU, Q4ACPU and Q4ARCPU
Generic term for Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU,
QCPU (Q mode)
Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU, Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU
QCPU (A mode) Generic term for Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, Q06HCPU-A
QnCPU Generic term for Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU and Q02CPU.
Generic term for Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q12PHCPU and
QnHCPU
Q25PHCPU.
Generic product name of the product types SWnD5C-GPPW-E, SWnD5C-GPPW-EA,
GX Developer SWnD5C-GPPW-EV and SWnD5C-GPPW-EVA. ("n" in the model name is 4 or
greater)
Q series modules other than the CPU module, power supply module and I/O module
Intelligent function module
that are mounted on the base unit.
A series and QnA series modules that are mounted on the base unit, excluding the
Special function module
CPU module, power supply module and I/O module.
A - 15 A - 15
Product Components
The components of the QJ61BT11N are listed below.
Item name Quantity
QJ61BT11N main unit 1
Terminal resistor 110 Ω, 1/2 W (brown-brown-brown)

(used when wiring with the CC-Link dedicated cable or Version 1.10 compatible CC-Link 2
dedicated cable)
Terminal resistor 130 Ω, 1/2 W (brown-orange-brown)

2
(used when wiring with the CC-Link dedicated high-performance cable)
A - 16 A - 16
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q
1 OVERVIEW
This manual describes the specifications, parts names and settings of the QJ61BT11N
1
CC-Link System Master/Local Module (hereinafter referred to as the QJ61BT11N)
which is used with the MELSEC-Q series PLC CPUs.
When applying the following program examples to the actual system, make sure to
examine the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems.
1.1 Overview
The CC-Link system connects distributed modules such as an I/O module, an intelligent
function module, and a special function module using dedicated cables so that these
modules can be controlled by the PLC CPU.
(1) By distributing each module to an equipment device such as a conveyor line and a
machine device, the wiring efficiency of the entire system can be accomplished.
(2) On/off information of input/output and numeric data that are handled by modules
can easily be sent and received at high-speed.
(3) By connecting multiple PLC CPUs, a simple distributed system can be configured.
(4) By connecting various devices made by Mitsubishi's partner manufacturers, the

system can provide flexible solutions to meet a wide range of user needs.
Master station
PLC CPU
Remote I/O station
Device manufactured by one of our Remote device station

partner manufacturers
Remote I/O station

Local station
PLC CPU
Master station ................The station that controls the data link system.
Remote I/O station ........The remote station that handles bit unit data only.
Remote device station ....The remote station that handles bit unit and word unit data
only.
Local station ..................The station having a PLC CPU and the ability to communicate
with the master and other local stations.
..
Intelligent device station The station that can perform transient transmission.
1-1 1-1
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q
1.2 Compatibility with CC-Link
1 This product supports following CC-Link functions and performance.

Cyclic transmission
Increase of cyclic transmission data size
Less restrictions on the station-to-station cable length
1.3 Features
The features of the CC-Link are described below.
(1) Remote I/O station communication

The ON/OFF status of a switch or indicator lamp is communicated using the
remote input RX and remote output RY (see Section 4.2.1).
PLC CPU Master station Remote I/O station
Automatic refresh Remote input Link scan

X Input
RX
Automatic refresh Remote output Link scan

Y Output
RY
1-2 1-2
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q
(2) Remote device station communication

Signals for handshaking with the remote device station (initial request, error
occurred flag, etc.) are communicated using the remote input RX and remote
output RY. The setting data to the remote device station are communicated using
remote registers RWw and RWr (see Section 4.2.2).
PLC CPU Master station Remote device station
Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote

X input input
(RX) (RX)

Y output output
(RY) (RY)
Remote Remote
Automatic refresh Link scan
W register register
(RWw) (RWw)

W register register
(RWr) (RWr)
Voltmeter
1-3 1-3
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q
(3) Local station communication

Communication between the master station and the local station uses two types
of transmission methods: cyclic transmission and transient transmission (see
Section 4.2.3).
(a) Cyclic transmission

Data communication between the PLC CPUs can be performed in N:N
mode using bit data (remote input RX and remote output RY) and word data
(remote registers RWw and RWr).
PLC CPU Master station Local station PLC CPU
Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote Automatic refresh

X input output Y
(RX) (RY)

Y output input X
(RY) (RX)
Remote Remote
Automatic refresh Link scan Automatic refresh
W register register W
(RWw) (RWr)

W register register W
(RWr) (RWw)
(b) Transient transmission

Read (RIRD) or write (RIWT) operation of the local station buffer memory
and CPU device can be performed at any timing.
PLC CPU Master station Local station PLC CPU

Transient
RIWT Transient transmission transmission
Transient area
transmission W
area
RIRD Buffer
memory
1-4 1-4
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q
(4) Intelligent device station communication

Communication between the master station and the intelligent device station
uses two types of transmission methods: cyclic transmission and transient
transmission (see Section 4.2.4).
(a) Cyclic transmission

Signals for handshaking with the intelligent device station (positioning start,
positioning complete, etc.) are communicated using the remote input RX and
remote output RY. Numeric data (positioning start number, present feed
value, etc.) is communicated using remote registers RWw and RWr.
PLC CPU Master station Intelligent device station Servo amplifier

X input input
RX RX

Y output output
RY RY
Remote Remote
Automatic refresh Link scan
W register register
RWw RWw

W register register
RWr RWr
(b) Transient transmission

Read (RIRD) or written (RIWT) operation of the intelligent device station
buffer memory can be performed at any timing.
PLC CPU Master station Intelligent device station
RIWT
Transient
transmission Buffer memory
area
RIRD
1-5 1-5
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q
(5) Parameter setting by GX Developer or the dedicated instruction

There are two parameter setting methods; the parameters can either be set by
GX Developer or by using a dedicated instruction (see Sections 2.2.1, 4.2.5 and
4.2.6).
The following table lists the differences between the two setting methods.
Changing the
Program
Number of parameter
requirement for Automatic
CPUs that can settings while
setting refresh
be mounted the PLC CPU is
parameters
running
Parameter setting with
Not required 4 modules
GX Developer
Required 64 modules
dedicated instruction
(6) System down prevention (Slave station cut-off function)

Because the system employs the bus connection method, even if a module
system fails due to power off, it will not affect the communication with other
normal modules.
Also, for a module using a 2-piece terminal block, the module can be replaced
during data link. (Replace the module after turning off the module power).
However, if the cable is disconnected, data link to all stations are disabled (see
Section 4.3.1).
Station number 4 Station number 7
Local Local
Master station station
station Station number 1 Station number 3 (occupies Station number 5 (occupies
1 station) 4 stations)
Remote station Remote station Remote station
(occupies 2 stations) (occupies 1 station) (occupies 2 stations)
Data link continues

Faulty
station
Local Local
station Station number 1 Station number 3 (occupies Station number 5 occupies
(7) Automatic return function

When a station that has been disconnected from the link due to power off
recovers the normal status, it will join the data link automatically (see Section
4.3.2).
1-6 1-6
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q
(8) Data link status setting when the master station PLC CPU has an
error
The data-link status can be set to either "stop" or "continue" when an error
causing the operation to stop such as "SP. UNIT ERROR" occurs in the PLC
CPU at the master station. With errors enabling the operation to continue such as
"BATTERY ERROR," the data link will continue regardless of the setting (see
Section 4.3.3).
(9) Setting the status of input data from a data link faulty station
The data entered (received) from a data-link faulty station can be cleared or the
previous status immediately before the error can be maintained (see Section
4.3.4).
(10) Standby master function

This function enables the data link to continue working by switching to a standby
master station (backup station for the master station) if a malfunction occurs in
the master station due to a malfunction of the PLC CPU or power supply.
The master station can return to online even during data link control by the
standby master station, and prepares itself for standby master station system
down (see Section 4.3.6).
Data link control by the master station Station number 1
Master station Number of occupied stations: 1
Remote device station Intelligent device station

Data link
Number of occupied stations: 2 Number of occupied stations: 1 Standby
control in
progress
Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication
Master station is down Data link control by the standby master station Standby master station
Master station Station number 1 0

Data link
Number of occupied stations: 2 Number of occupied stations: 1
control in
progress
To the next page
1-7 1-7
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q
Continued from the previous page
Master station returns to normal and comes back online

Master station prepares itself for standby master station system down
Master station Standby master station
Station number 0 1 Station number 0

Data link
Standby Number of occupied stations: 2 Number of occupied stations: 1
control in
progress
Problem occurrence in the standby master station Data link control by the master station
Master station
Station number 1 0 Standby master station

Data link
control in
progress
Standby master station returns to normal and comes back online Standby master station
Standby master station prepares itself for master station system down Station number 1

Data link
control in
progress
1-8 1-8
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q
(11) Remote device station initialization procedure registration function

This function performs the initial setting for the remote device station using the
GX Developer, without creating a sequence program (see Section 4.4.1).
(12) Event issuance for the interrupt program

This function issues an event when the conditions set by the GX Developer are
established in order to make the PLC CPU execute the interrupt program (see
Section 4.4.2).
(13) Automatic CC-Link startup

By installing the QJ61BT11N, the CC-Link is started up and all data are refreshed
by simply turning on the power, without creating a sequence program. However,
when the number of connected modules is less than 64, it is necessary to set the
network parameters in order to optimize the link scan time (see Section 4.4.3.).
(14) Selecting a mode according to the system

The CC-Link system has four types of modes according to various systems. (See
sections 4.4.4, 4.4.5 and 4.4.14.)
The overview of the modes is described in the following table.
Mode Connectable Overview
Mode in which complete compatibility with the
conventional module (QJ61BT11) is achieved.
Select this mode when the number of cyclic points need
Remote net ver. 1 mode Remote I/O station not be increased or when the QJ61BT11N is used to
Remote device station replace the conventional module as a maintenance
Intelligent device station product.
Local station Select this mode when increasing the number of cyclic
points and configuring a new system.
Select this mode when adding a ver.2 compatible slave
Remote net additional mode station to the existing system to increase the number of
cyclic points.
Select this mode when the system consists of only the
master station and remote I/O stations.
Remote I/O net mode Remote I/O station
Since cyclic transmission is made at high speed, the link
scan time can be reduced.
(15) Reserved station function

Stations that are not actually connected (stations to be connected in the future)
will not be treated as faulty stations if they are specified as reserved stations.
The reserved stations can also be set as 0 points. (see Section 4.4.6).
Stations that will be connected in the future
(Reserved station)
Station number 4
Local
Master station (Reserved station)
station Station number 1 Station number 3 (occupies Station number 8 Station number 10
4 stations)
Remote station Remote station Remote station Remote station
(occupies 2 stations) (occupies 1 station) (occupies 2 stations) (occupies 1 station)
1-9 1-9
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q
(16) Error invalid station setting function

By setting the network parameters, the module that is powered off in the system
configuration will not be treated as a "data link faulty station" by the master
station and local station. However, caution is required since errors are no longer
detected (see Section 4.4.7).
Stations to be specified as error invalid stations
Local Local
This station does not become a data link faulty station.
Local Local
(17) Scan synchronous function

This function synchronizes the link scan to the sequence scan (see Section
4.4.8).
(18) Temporary error invalid station setting function

With this function, the module specified by the GX Developer will not be treated
as a "data link faulty station" by the master or local station while in online. The
module can be replaced without detecting an error in online (see Section 4.4.9).
(19) Data link stop/restart

The data link can be stopped and restarted while it is being used (see Section
4.4.10).
(20) Station number overlap checking function

This function checks the status of the connected stations to see if the number of
occupied stations is overlapping or if there is more than one station with the
station number setting of 0 in the system (see Section 4.4.11).
1 - 10 1 - 10
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q
(21) Transient transmission

With this method of transmission, the counterpart is specified and 1:1
communication is performed at an arbitrary timing (see Section 4.5).
Master station Local station

PLC CPU Master module
RIWT Send buffer
Buffer memory
Device memory

RIRD
Buffer memory
Device memory
Send buffer
1 - 11 1 - 11
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q
(22) Compatibility with conventional module

The QJ61BT11N achieves complete compatibility with the conventional module
(QJ61BT11) in the remote net ver. 1 mode.
Select the remote net ver. 1 mode when the number of cyclic points need not be
increased or when the QJ61BT11N is used to replace the conventional module
as a maintenance product.
(23) Cyclic points increase

Selection of the remote net ver. 2 mode or remote net additional mode allows
RX/RY to be increased to up to 8192 points and RWr/RWw to up to 2048 words
per network by making expanded cyclic setting (single, double, quadruple,
octuple).
Also, RX/RY can be increased to up to 224 points and RWr/RWw to up to 32
words per station. (See Section 4.4.14.)
(24) Remote I/O station points setting

Set the number of I/O points of a remote I/O station.
This setting minimizes CPU device assignment and reduces the reserved points
of remote input RX and remote output RX for remote I/O stations. (See Section
4.4.13.)
(25) Slave station refresh/compulsory clear setting in case of PLC CPU

STOP
Set whether output data to the remote, local, intelligent device and standby
master stations will be refreshed or compulsorily cleared when the PLC CPU
comes to STOP. (See Section 4.3.5.)
1 - 12 1 - 12
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSEC-Q
The system configuration for the CC-Link is described below.
2.1 System Configuration
(1) Remote net ver. 1 mode 2

A total of 64 remote I/O stations, remote device stations, local stations, standby
master stations, or intelligent device stations can be connected to a single master
station.
However, the following conditions must all be satisfied.
a: Number of modules occupying 1 station
b: Number of modules occupying 2 stations
Condition 1 {(1 a) + (2 b) + (3 c) + (4 d)} ≤ 64
c: Number of modules occupying 3 stations
d: Number of modules occupying 4 stations
A: Number of remote I/O stations ≤ 64
B: Number of remote device stations ≤ 42
Condition 2 {(16 A) + (54 B) + (88 C)} ≤ 2304
C: Number of local stations, standby master stations
and intelligent device stations ≤ 26
1 module for each system Maximum 26
Master station Master station Master station Local station Local station Local station
QJ61BT11N A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11

QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11
Terminal resistor (required) CC-Link dedicated cable
Maximum 26 Maximum 42 Maximum 64
Intelligent device station Remote device station Remote I/O station
RS-232C Analog/digital Remote I/O module

Interface module converter module AJ65BTB1-16D
AJ65BT-R2 AJ65BT-64AD AJ65BTC-32D
CC-Link dedicated cable

Terminal resistor (required)
Total 64
2-1 2-1
MELSEC-Q
(2) Remote net ver. 2 mode, remote net additional mode

A total of 64 remote I/O stations, remote device stations, local stations, standby
master stations, or intelligent device stations can be connected to a single master
station.
However, the following conditions must all be satisfied.
{(a + a2 + a4 + a8) a: The total number of ver.1 compatible slave
+ (b + b2 + b4 + b8) 2 stations that occupy 1 station, and ver.2
2 Condition 1 compatible slave stations that occupy 1 station
+ (c + c2 + c4 + c8) 3
which are set to “Single”.
+ (d + d2 + d4 + d8) 4} ≤ 64 b: The total number of ver.1 compatible slave
[{(a 32) + (a2 32) + (a4 64) + (a8 128)} stations that occupy 2 stations, and ver.2
+ {(b 64) + (b2 96) + (b4 192) + (b8 384)} compatible slave stations that occupy 2 stations
Condition 2 which are set to “Single”.
+ {(c 96) + (c2 160) + (c4 320) + (c8 640)}
c: The total number of ver.1 compatible slave
+ {(d 128) + (d2 224) + (d4 448) + (d8 896)}] ≤ 8192
stations that occupy 3 stations, and ver.2
compatible slave stations that occupy 3 stations
d: The total number of ver.1 compatible slave
stations that occupy 4 stations, and ver.2
compatible slave stations that occupy 4 stations
a2: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that

occupy 1 station which are set to “Double”.
b2: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that
occupy 2 stations which are set to “Double”.
c2: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that
occupy 3 stations which are set to “Double”.
d2: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that
[{(a 4) + (a2 8) + (a4 16) + (a8 32)} occupy 4 stations which are set to “Double”.
+ {(b 8) + (b2 16) + (b4 + 32) + (b8 64)}
Condition 3 a4: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that
+ {(c 12) + (c2 24) + (c4 48) + (c8 96)} occupy 1 station which are set to “Quadruple”.
+ {(d 16) + (d2 32) + (d4 64) + (d8 128)}] ≤ 2048 b4: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that
occupy 2 stations which are set to “Quadruple”.
a8: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that

occupy 1 station which are set to “Octuple”.
b8: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that
occupy 2 stations which are set to “Octuple”.
A: Number of remote I/O stations ≤ 64
B: Number of remote device stations ≤ 42
Condition 4 {(16 A) + (54 B) + (88 C) } ≤ 2304
C: Number of local stations, standby master
stations and intelligent device stations ≤ 26
2-2 2-2
MELSEC-Q
1 module for each system Maximum 26
Master station Local station Local station Local station
QJ61BT11N A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11

QJ61BT11N
QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11
Terminal resistor (required) CC-Link dedicated cable
Maximum 26 Maximum 42 Maximum 64
Intelligent device station Remote device station Remote I/O station
Analog/digital Remote I/O module

RS-232C
converter module AJ65BTB1-16D
Interface module
AJ65VBTCU-68ADVN AJ65BTC-32D
AJ65BT-R2
AJ65VBTCU-68ADIN

Terminal resistor (required)
Total 64
2-3 2-3
MELSEC-Q
2.2 Applicable System
Applicable PLC CPUs and notes on the system configuration are described below.
2.2.1 Applicable modules and number of CPUs that can be mounted
(1) Applicable modules and number of CPUs that can be mounted

The CPU modules and network modules (for remote I/O station) to which the
QJ61BT11N can be installed and number of modules that can be installed are
listed in the table below.
(a) When performing the parameter setting with the GX Developer

Applicable module Number of CPUs that can be mounted Remark
Q00JCPU
1 2
Q00CPU Maximum 2 ( )( )
Q01CPU
Q02CPU
It can be mounted
Q02HCPU
only with the
CPU Q06HCPU Maximum 4
Q mode.
module Q12HCPU
( 1) ( 3)
Q25HCPU
Q12PHCPU 1 6
Maximum 4 ( )( )
Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU 1 4 5
Maximum 4 ( )( )( )
Q25PRHCPU
QJ72LP25-25
Network 4
QJ72LP25G Maximum 4 ( )
module
QJ72BR15
1 Refer to the QCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals).
2 For use in the remote net additional mode, select a PLC CPU with first 5 digits of
serial No. "06112" or later.
If any incompatible PLC CPU is used, the operation can not guaranteed.
3 For use in the remote net additional mode, use a PLC CPU with first 5 digits of serial
No. "05032" or later.
If any incompatible PLC CPU is used, the operation cannot be guaranteed.
4 Incompatible with the remote net additional mode. When the module is used, the
operation cannot be guaranteed.
5 For use in a redundant system, select the QJ61BT11N with first 5 digits of serial No.
"06052" or later.
When any incompatible QJ61BT11N is used, the operation cannot be guaranteed.
6 For use in the remote net additional mode, use a PLC CPU with first 5 digits of serial
No. "07032" or later.
If any incompatible PLC CPU is used, the operation cannot be guaranteed.
2-4 2-4
MELSEC-Q
(b) When performing the parameter setting with the dedicated instructions.
Applicable module Number of CPUs that can be mounted Remark
Q00JCPU
1
Q00CPU Maximum 2 ( )
Q01CPU
Q02CPU
CPU Q02HCPU It can be mounted only
module Q06HCPU Maximum 64 with the Q mode.
Q12HCPU ( 1)
Q25HCPU
Q12PHCPU 1
Maximum 64 ( )
Q25PHCPU
1 Refer to the QCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals).
(2) Mountable base unit

QJ61BT11N can be mounted on any of the base unit’s I/O slots ( 7). However,
depending on combinations with other mounted modules and the number of
mountings, there may be cases where the power capacity is insufficient. Be sure
to consider the power capacity when mounting the module.
7 Must be inside the point number range of 1 CPU unit and network module (for remote
I/O station).
(3) Applicable software package

The software package available for the QJ61BT11N is listed below:
Manual name Model name Remarks
Required MELSEC PLC programming
8
GX Developer SWnD5C-GPPW-E software.
"n" in the model name is 4 or greater.
8 The product of Version 8.03D or later is required for use in the remote net ver.2 mode
or remote net additional mode.
(4) Usable slave stations

Any of ver.1 compatible slave stations and ver.2 compatible slave stations is
usable.
2-5 2-5
MELSEC-Q
2.2.2 Notes on the system configuration
The system should be designed with the following considerations to prevent mis-input
from the remote I/O modules:
(1) When powering on and off

Start the data link after turning on the power to the remote I/O modules. Turn off
the power to the remote I/O modules after stopping the data link.
Data link start Data link stop
During operation
Master module
(data link status) During stop
ON
Remote I/O module
(power status)
OFF
(2) During momentary power failure of the remote I/O modules

When a momentary power failure occurs in the power (24 V DC) being supplied
to the remote I/O modules, mis-input may occur.
(a) Cause for mis-input due to a momentary power failure

The remote I/O module hardware uses the power by internally converting
the module power (24 V DC) to 5 V DC.
When a momentary power failure occurs in a remote I/O module, the
following condition occurs:
(Time for the 5 V DC power in the remote I/O module to turn off) >
(Response time for input module on off)
Therefore, mis-input occurs when a refresh is performed within the time
indicated by 1) in the figure below.
1)
Remote I/O module

(module power supply and input
external supply power)
Remote I/O module (internal 5 V DC)
Input (Xn)
When the input external power supply turns OFF, the

input (Xn) turns OFF after the response time for the
input module to change from ON to OFF.
2-6 2-6
MELSEC-Q
(b) Countermeasure for mis-input

For the power supply module, the stabilized power supply and the input
external supply power of AC input, wire the power cables from the same
power source.
Power supply module
Master module
~ PLC CPU
Remote I/O module

For DC input
Module power supply Input external-

supply power
Stabilized
24 V DC
power supply
Power supply module
Master module
~ PLC CPU
Remote I/O module
For AC input
Module power supply Input external-
supply power
Stabilized
24 V DC
power supply
REMARK
When supplying power from a single power source to multiple remote I/O modules,
select the proper type of cable and perform the wiring in consideration of the voltage
decline.
Connections can be established if the receiving port voltage at the remote I/O
module is within the specified range of the remote I/O module to be used.
Stabilized
~
power supply
Remote module Remote module
2-7 2-7
MELSEC-Q
(3) Access to station No.64

(a) To a local station of No. 64, other station access from GX Developer or
GOT is not allowed.
If the station No. is changed to other than 64, other station access is
executable.
(b) The CC-Link board is not allowed to access a local station or intelligent
device station whose station No. is 64.
If the station No. is changed to other than 64, other station access is
executable.
(4) Precautions for use on remote I/O stations

Pay attention to the following for use on remote I/O stations:
• Interrupt setting of network parameters is not available.
• Transient transmissions using dedicated instructions are not allowed to local
stations and intelligent device stations.
2.2.3 How to check the function version
The following describes how to check the function version.
(1) How to check the function version of the QJ61BT11N

(a) Checking the "SERIAL column of the rating plate" on the module side
Serial No. (first 5 digits)

MODEL
Function version
SERIAL 050320000000000-B
Conformed standard
MADE IN JAPAN
(b) See Section 13.4 for how to check the function version with GX Developer.
2-8 2-8
MELSEC-Q
2.2.4 CC-Link version
There are two types of CC-Link version, i.e., Ver.1 and Ver.2.
(1) Definition of Ver.1.00 and Ver.1.10

Version 1.10 modules have a uniform station-to-station cable length of 20 cm or
more by improving the restrictions on the conventional station-to-station cable
length.
In contrast, the conventional modules are defined as Version 1.00.
See Section 3.1.2 for the maximum overall cable distance of Version 1.10.
In order to make the station-to-station cable length uniformly 20 cm or more, the
following conditions are required:
1) All the modules that configure the CC-Link system must be compatible with
Ver.1.10.
2) All the data link cables must be CC-Link dedicated cables conforming to Version
1.10.
POINT
The specifications for Version 1.00 should be used for the maximum cable overall
distance and station-to-station cable length if a system contains modules and
cables of both Version 1.00 and Version 1.10.
See Section 3.1.1 for the maximum overall cable distance and station-to-station
cable length of Version 1.00.
(2) Definition of Ver.2

As Ver.2 is characterized as increase of cyclic transmission data size,
Ver.2-compatible module is defined to support this function.
(3) Checking version

The modules including CC-Link logo on the rated plate are compatible with
Ver.1.10.
The modules including V2 logo on the rated plate are compatible with Ver.2.
MODEL
SERIAL 050320000000000-B
Conformed standard
MADE IN JAPAN
2-9 2-9
3 SPECIFICATIONS
MELSEC-Q
3 SPECIFICATIONS
This section describes the specifications of the QJ61BT11N.

For the general specifications of the QJ61BT11N, refer to the user's manual for the
CPU module to be used.
3.1 Performance Specifications
Table 3.1 lists the performance specifications of the OJ61BT11N.
3 Table 3.1 Performance specifications

Item Specification
Transmission rate Can select from 156 kbps/ 625 kbps/ 2.5 Mbps/ 5 Mbps/ 10 Mbps
Maximum overall cable distance
Varies according to the transmission rate (See Section 3.1.1, 3.1.2)
(Maximum transmission distance)
Maximum number of connected stations
64 (See Section 2.1)
(master station)
Number of occupied stations 1 to 4 stations
1
(local station) The number of stations can be switched using the GX Developer parameter setting.
Remote I/O (RX, RY) : 2048 points
Remote register (RWw) : 256 points (master station remote device station/local station/ intelligent
Maximum number of link points per system
1 device station/standby master station)
Remote register (RWr) : 256 points (remote device station/local station/ intelligent device station/standby
master station master station)
Remote I/O (RX, RY) : 32 points (local station is 30 points)
Remote station/local station/intelligent device Remote register (RWw) : 4 points (master station remote device station/local station/ intelligent
station/standby master station device station/standby master station)
1
Number of link points per station Remote register (RWr) : 4 points (remote device station/local station/ intelligent device station/standby
Communication method Broadcast polling method
Synchronous method Flag synchronous method
Encoding method NRZI method
Transmission path Bus (RS-485)
Transmission format Conforms to HDLC
Error control system CRC (X16 + X12 + X5 + 1)
CC-Link dedicated cable/ CC-Link dedicated high-performance cable/
Connection cable 2
Ver.1.10 compatible CC-Link dedicated cable
Automatic return function
RAS function Slave station cut-off function
Error detection by the link special relay/register
Number of I/O occupied points 32 points (I/O assignment: Intelligent 32 points)
5 V DC internal current consumption 0.46 A
Weight 0.12 kg
1 Indicates the number of link points for remote net ver.1 mode. For number of link points for remote net
ver.2 mode/remote net additional mode. Refer to the table 3.2.
2 CC-Link dedicated high-performance cables cannot be used with other cables such as CC-Link dedicated
cables or Ver.1.10 compatible CC-Link dedicated cables. Also attach the terminating resister which
matches the kind of the cable. (Refer to section 7.5)
3-1 3-1
3 SPECIFICATIONS
MELSEC-Q
Table 3.2 Number of link points for remote net ver.2 mode/remote net additional mode
Item Specifications
Remote I/O (RX, RY) : 8192 points
Remote register (RWw) : 2048 points (master station remote device
station/local station/intelligent device
Maximum No. of link points per system station/standby master station)
Remote register (RWr) : 2048 points (remote device station/local
station/intelligent device station/standby
Expanded cyclic setting Single Double Quadruple Octuple
32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points 3
No. of link (30 points (30 points (62 points (126 points
Remote I/O (RX, RY)
points per for local for local for local for local
station station) station) station) station)
Remote register (RWw) 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points
Remote register (RWr) 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points
Remote I/O
32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points
(RX, RY)
Occupies Remote
1 station register (RWw)
Remote
register (RWr)
Remote I/O
(RX, RY)
Occupies Remote
Number 2 stations register (RWw)
of link Remote
points per register (RWr)
number of Remote I/O
occupied (RX, RY)
stations Occupies Remote
3 stations register (RWw)
Remote
register (RWr)
Remote I/O
(RX, RY)
Occupies Remote
4 stations register (RWw)
Remote
register (RWr)
3-2 3-2
3 SPECIFICATIONS
MELSEC-Q
3.1.1 Maximum overall cable distance (for Ver. 1.00)
The relationship between the transmission speed and the maximum overall cable
distance is described below:
(1) For a system consisting of only remote I/O stations and remote
device stations
Remote I/O station Master station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
or remote or remote or remote or remote
device station device station device station device station
2 2 1 1

1 Cable length between remote I/O stations or remote device stations.
2 Cable length between the master station and the adjacent stations.
CC-Link dedicated cable (uses terminal resistor 110 Ω)

Station-to-station cable length Maximum overall cable
Transmission rate 1 2 distance
156 kbps 1200 m (3937.2 ft.)

625 kbps 30 cm (11.81 in.) or more 600 m (1968.6 ft.)
2.5 Mbps 200 m (656.2 ft.)
30 cm (11.81 in.) to
110 m (360.9 ft.)
5 Mbps 59 cm (23.23 in.)
60 cm (23.62 in.) or more 1 m (3.28 ft.) or more 150 m (492.15 ft.)
30 cm (11.81 in.) to
50 m (164.1 ft.)
59 cm (23.23 in.)
10 Mbps 60 cm (23.62 in.) to
80 m (262.5 ft.)
99 cm (38.98 in.)
1 m (3.28 ft.) or more 100 m (328.1 ft.)
CC-Link dedicated high performance cable (uses terminal resistor 130 Ω)

156 kbps 1200 m (3937.2 ft.)

625 kbps 900 m (2952.9 ft.)
2.5 Mbps 400 m (1312.4 ft.)
30 cm (11.81 in.) or more
5 Mbps 160 m (524.96 ft.)
Number of connected
100 m (328.1 ft.)
stations: 1 to 32
30 cm (11.81 in.) to
Number of connected 1 m (3.28 ft.) or more 80 m (262.5 ft.)
39 cm (15.35 in.)
stations: 33 to 48
40 cm (15.75 in.) or more 100 m (328.1 ft.)
10 Mbps
30 cm (11.81 in.) to
20 m (65.52 ft.)
39 cm (15.35 in.)
Number of connected
40 cm (15.75 in.) to
stations: 49 to 64 30 m (98.43 ft.)
69 cm (27.17 in.)
70 cm (27.56 in.) or more 100 m (328.1 ft.)
The cable length between remote I/O stations or remote device stations is within
this range and if even one location is wired, the maximum overall cable distance will
be as indicated above.
3-3 3-3
3 SPECIFICATIONS
MELSEC-Q
(Example) When the transmission rate is 10 Mbps, and 43 remote I/O stations and
remote device stations are connected using the CC-Link dedicated high
performance cable, because the cable connecting the second and third
stations is "35 cm (13.78 in.)", the maximum overall cable distance will
be "80 cm (31.5 in.)".
First Second Third 4th 43th
Master station Remote device Remote device

Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
station station
1 m (3.28 ft.) 50 cm (19.69 in.) 35 cm (13.78 in.) 50 cm (19.69 in.)
(2) For a system consisting of remote I/O stations, remote device

stations, local stations and intelligent device stations
Local station Local station
Master station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station or intelligent or intelligent
or remote or remote device station device station
device station device station
2 1 2 2

1 Cable length between remote I/O stations or remote device stations
2 Cable length between the master station or the local or intelligent device station
and the adjacent stations
CC-Link dedicated cable (uses terminal resistor 110 Ω)

156 kbps 1200 m (3937.2 ft.)

2.5 Mbps 200 m (656.2 ft.)
30 cm (11.81 in.) to
5 Mbps 110 m (360.9 ft.)
59 cm (23.23 in.)
60 cm (23.62 in.) or more 2 m (6.56 ft.) or more 150 m (492.15 ft.)
30 cm (11.81 in.) to
50 m (164.1 ft.)
59 cm (23.23 in.)
10 Mbps
60 cm (23.62 in.) to
80 m (262.5 ft.)
99 cm (38.98 in.)
1 m (3.28 ft.) or more 100 m (328.1 ft.)
CC-Link dedicated high performance cable (uses terminal resistor 130 Ω)

156 kbps 1200 m (3937.2 ft.)

2.5 Mbps 200 m (656.2 ft.)
30 cm (11.81 in.) to
110 m (360.9 ft.)
5 Mbps 59 cm (23.23 in.) 2 m (6.56 ft.) or more
60 cm (23.62 in.) or more 150 m (492.15 ft.)
70 cm (27.56 in.) to
50 m (164.1 ft.)
10 Mbps 99 cm (38.98 in.)
1 m (3.28 ft.) or more 80 m (262.5 ft.)
The cable length between remote I/O stations or remote device stations is within
this range and if even one location is wired, the maximum overall cable distance will
be as indicated above.
3-4 3-4
3 SPECIFICATIONS
MELSEC-Q
3.1.2 Maximum overall cable distance (for Ver. 1.10)
The relation of the transmission speed and maximum overall cable distance when
configuring the entire system with Version 1.10 modules and cable is shown below.
Local station or Local station or

Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
Master station intelligent device intelligent device
or remote or remote
station station
device station device station
Station to station
cable length
Version 1.10 compatible CC-Link dedicated cable (terminal resistor of 110Ω used)
Transmission speed Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable distance
156kbps 1200m
625kbps 900m
2.5Mbps 20cm or longer 400m
5Mbps 160m
10Mbps 100m
3-5 3-5
3 SPECIFICATIONS
MELSEC-Q
3.2 CC-Link Dedicated Cable
Use the CC-Link dedicated cable for the CC-Link system. If a cable other than the CC-
Link dedicated cable is used, the performance of the CC-Link system cannot be
guaranteed.
If you have any questions regarding the CC-Link dedicated cable, or if you wish to see
its specifications, see the CC-Link Partner Association homepage http://www.cc-
link.org/.
REMARK
For details, refer to the CC-Link cable wiring manual issued by CC-Link Partner
Association.
3-6 3-6
3 SPECIFICATIONS
MELSEC-Q
MEMO
3-7 3-7
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4 FUNCTIONS
This chapter explains the functions of QJ61BT11N, dividing them into four sections:
"Basic Functions", "Functions for Improving System Reliability", "Handy Functions" and
"Transient Transmission Functions".
Some functions are unavailable depending on the mounted CPU.
Refer to Appendix 6 for details.
4.1 Function List
(1) Table 4.1 lists the "basic functions".
Table 4.1 List of the "basic functions"

Item Description Reference section
Communication with remote I/O
Performs on/off data communication with remote I/O station. Section 4.2.1
station
Communication with remote device Performs on/off data and numeric data communication with
4
Section 4.2.2
station remote device station.
Performs on/off data and numeric data communication with local
Communication with local station Section 4.2.3
station.
Communication with intelligent Performs communication with intelligent device station, cyclic
Section 4.2.4
device station transmission, and transient transmission.
Parameter setting with GX Sets the network parameter, automatic refresh parameter with
Section 4.2.5
Developer the GX Developer.
Parameter setting with dedicated
Sets the network parameter with the RLPASET instruction. Section 4.2.6
instruction
(2) Table 4.2 lists the "functions for improving system reliability".
Table 4.2 List of the "functions for improving system reliability"

Disconnects the module that cannot continue the data link
Slave station cut-off function because of power off, and continues the data link with only the Section 4.3.1
normal modules.
When a module, which has been disconnected from the data link
Automatic return function because of power off, returns to the normal status, it Section 4.3.2
automatically joins the data link.
Data link status setting when the
Sets the data link status when an error that stops the operation
master station PLC CPU has an Section 4.3.3
occurs at the master station PLC CPU.
error
Setting the status of input data from Sets the status (clear/hold) of the input (receive) data from a
Section 4.3.4
a data link faulty station station that became data link faulty because of power off.
Slave station refresh/compulsory
Sets whether output data to the slave stations will be refreshed
clear setting in case of PLC CPU Section 4.3.5
or compulsorily cleared when the PLC CPU comes to STOP.
STOP
Continues the data link by switching to the standby master
Standby master function Section 4.3.6
station when a problem occurs in the master station.
4-1 4-1
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(3) Table 4.3 lists the "handy functions".
Table 4.3 List of the "handy functions"

Remote device station initialization Performs initial setting of remote device station using GX
Section 4.4.1
procedure registration function Developer.
Issues events when the conditions set by GX Developer are
Event issuance for the interrupt
established and causes the PLC CPU to run an interrupt Section 4.4.2
program
program.
Automatic CC-Link startup Starts the CC-Link automatically by turning the power on. Section 4.4.3
Performs communication with all stations (remote station, local
Remote net mode Section 4.4.4
station, intelligent device station, and standby master station).
Shortens the link scan time for a system consisting only of the
Remote I/O net mode Section 4.4.5
master station and remote I/O stations.
4 By assigning modules that will be connected in the future as
reserved stations, they will not be treated as data link faulty
Reserved station function stations. If any of the connected modules is specified, it cannot Section 4.4.6
perform data link.
The reserved stations can also be set as 0 points.
Prevents modules that may be powered off in the system
Error invalid station setting function configuration from being treated as data link faulty stations by Section 4.4.7
setting the network parameters.
Performs link scan by synchronizing with
Synchronous mode
sequence scan.
Scan synchronous function Section 4.4.8
Perform link scan without synchronizing
Asynchronous mode
with sequence scan.
Temporary error invalid station Prevents modules specified by GX Developer from being treated
Section 4.4.9
setting function as data link faulty stations temporarily during online operation.
Data link stop/restart Stops or restarts the data link that is being executed. Section 4.4.10
Checks for the overlapping of number of occupied stations and
Station number overlap checking
whether or not more than one module having a station number Section 4.4.11
function
setting of 0 exists in the system.
Allows monitoring and reading/writing programs from/to any
Multiple PLC system support CPU in a multiple PLC system mounted with the QJ61BT11N via Section 4.4.12
AJ65BT-G4-S3 or other station CPUs.
Allows the I/O points of the remote I/O stations to be selected
Remote I/O station points setting from among 8 points, 16 points and 32 points, reducing the Section 4.4.13
number of reserved points.
Allows the number of cyclic points per module to be increased
from 128 points for RX/RY and 16 points for RWr/RWw in the
Cyclic points increase Section 4.4.14
ver. 1 mode to up to 896 points for RX/RY and 128 points for
RWr/RWw in the ver. 2 mode.
(4) Table 4.4 lists the "functions for transient transmission".
Table 4.4 List of the "functions for transient transmission"

Transient transmission Specifies a counterpart and communicates at an arbitrary timing. Section 4.5.1
4-2 4-2
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.2 Basic Functions
This section explains the basic functions of the QJ61BT11N.
4.2.1 Communication with the remote I/O stations
Two types of communication modes are available for the CC-Link system: remote net
mode and remote I/O net mode.
(1) Remote net mode

In this mode, it is possible to communicate with all stations (remote I/O station,
remote device station, local station, intelligent device station, and standby master
station). Thus, various systems can be configured according to their applications.
(2) Remote I/O net mode

In this mode, a high-speed cyclic transmission is performed for a system
consisting only of the master station and remote I/O stations. Because of this, the
link scan time can be shortened when compared to the remote net mode.
The following provides an overview of the communication between the master

station and a remote I/O station using the remote I/O net mode. In the
communication with the remote I/O station, the on/off data of the switches and
indicator lamps are communicated through remote input RX and remote output
RY.
PLC CPU Master station Remote I/O station
Network 1) Network
parameters parameters
Automatic
refresh
parameters
Buffer memory
3) 2)
Remote input
X Automatic refresh Link scan Input
RX
4) 5)
Remote output
Y Automatic refresh Link scan Output
RY
[Data link startup]

1) When the PLC system is powered on, the network parameters in the
PLC CPU are transferred to the master station, and the CC-Link system
automatically starts up.
4-3 4-3
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
[Remote input]
2) The input status of a remote I/O station is stored automatically (for each
link scan) in the master station's "remote input RX" buffer memory.
3) The input status stored in the "remote input RX" buffer memory is
stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters.
(Station number 1: (Station number 2:
PLC CPU Master station occupies 1 station) occupies 1 station)
Remote input RX
RX0F to RX00 2) X0F to X00
3) RX1F to RX10
X 2)
RX2F to RX20 X0F to X00
RX4F to RX40
to
RX7FF to RX7F0 16-point module 32-point module
[Remote output]
4) The on/off data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh
parameters is stored in the "remote output RY" buffer memory.
5) The output status stored in the "remote output RY" buffer memory is
output automatically (for each link scan) to remote I/O stations.
PLC CPU Master station occupies 1 station) occupies 1 station)
Remote output RY
RY0F to RY00
RY1F to RY10
RY2F to RY20
RY3F to RY30
RY4F to RY40 5) Y0F to Y00
4) RY5F to RY50
Y 5)
RY6F to RY60 Y0F to Y00
RY8F to RY80
to
RY7FF to RY7F0 16-point module 32-point module
• When setting the automatic refresh parameters, it is recommended to specify "Y" as

DANGER the remote output RY refresh device. If any device other than "Y" (e.g. M or L) is
specified, parameter setting must be made to compulsorily clear the device status at
a CPU STOP. If parameter setting is not made, the device status before a STOP is
retained as is. For slave station compulsory clear in case of CPU STOP, see
Section 4.3.5. For the method to stop a data link, see Section 4.4.10.
4-4 4-4
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.2.2 Communication with the remote device stations
This section explains an overview of the communication between the master and the
remote device stations.
In the communication with remote device stations, the signals for handshaking with
remote device stations (initial data request flag, error reset request flag, etc.) are
communicated using remote input RX and remote output RX. Numeric data (averaging
processing specification, digital output value, etc.) is communicated using remote
register RWw and remote register RWr.
PLC CPU Master station Remote device station
Network 1) Network
Automatic
refresh
parameters Buffer memory
Remote input
3) 2) RX
Remote input Handshaking signals
X Automatic refresh Link scan
RX such as remote READY
and initial data
processing request flag
Remote output
4) 5) RY
Remote output Handshaking signals such
Y Automatic refresh Link scan as error reset request flag
RY
and initial data processing
complete flag
Remote register
6) 7) RWw
Remote register Numeric data for
W Automatic refresh Link scan
RWw averaging processing
setting, A-D conversion
enable/disable setting,
etc.
Remote register
9) 8) RWr
Automatic refresh Remote register
W Link scan Numeric data such as
RWr digital output values,
detected temperature
value, etc.
4-5 4-5
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
[Data link startup]

[Remote input]
2) The remote input RX of a remote device station is stored automatically
(for each link scan) in the master station's "remote input RX" buffer
memory.
Remote device station Remote device station
PLC CPU Master station occupies 2 stations) occupies 2 stations)
Remote input RX
Handshaking signals
such as remote READY
and initial data
Remote input RX
Remote input RX
RX0F to RX00 RX0F to RX00
Handshaking signals
RX1F to RX10 2) RX1F to RX10 such as remote READY
RX2F to RX20 and initial data
3) RX3F to RX30
X
RX5F to RX50 2) RX1F to RX10
RX6F to RX60
RX7F to RX70
RX8F to RX80
to
RX7FF to RX7F0
[Remote input RX when the AJ65BT-64AD is set to station number 1]

Signal direction: AJ65BT-64AD Master module
Device No. Signal name
RX00 CH1 A-D conversion completed flag
RX04
to Not used
RX17
RX18 Initial data processing request flag
RX19 Initial data setting complete flag
RX1A Error status flag
RX1B Remote READY
RX1C
to Not used
RX1F
4-6 4-6
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
[Remote output]
5) Remote output RY is automatically set to on/off (for each link scan)
according to the output status stored in the "remote output RY" buffer
memory.

Remote output RY
Handshaking signals such
as error reset request flag
complete flag
Remote output RY Remote output RY
RY0F to RY00 RY0F to RY00 Handshaking signals such
RY1F to RY10 5) RY1F to RY10 as error reset request flag
RY2F to RY20 complete flag
4) RY3F to RY30
Y
RY4F to RY40 RY0F to RY00
RY5F to RY50 5) RY1F to RY10
RY6F to RY60
RY7F to RY70
RY8F to RY80
to
RY7FF to RY7F0
[Remote output RY when the AJ65BT-64AD is set to station number 1]

Signal direction: Master module AJ65BT-64AD
RY00 Selection of offset/gain values
RY01 Selection of voltage/current
RY02
to Not used
RY17
RY18 Initial data setting complete flag
RY19 Initial data processing request flag
RY1A Error reset request flag
RY1B
to Not used
RY1F
4-7 4-7
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
[Writing to the remote register RWw]

6) The transmission data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh
parameters is stored in the "remote register RWw" buffer memory.
7) The data stored in the "remote register RWw" buffer memory is
automatically sent to the remote register RWw of each remote device
station.

Remote register RWw
Numeric data for
averaging processing
setting, A-D conversion
enable/disable setting,
Remote register RWw etc.
RWw0 RWw0
RWw1 RWw1
RWw2 RWw2
RWw3 7) RWw3 Remote register RWw
RWw4 RWw4 Numeric data for
averaging processing
RWw5 RWw5 setting, A-D conversion
RWw6 RWw6 enable/disable setting,
etc.
6) RWw7 RWw7
W
RWw8 RWw0
RWw9 RWw1
RWwA RWw2
RWwB 7) RWw3
RWwC RWw4
RWwD RWw5
RWwE RWw6
RWwF RWw7
RWw10
to
RWwFF
[Remote register RWw when the AJ65BT-64AD is set to station number 1]

Signal direction: master module AJ65BT-64AD
Address Description
RWw0 Averaging process setting
RWw1 CH1 average time, number of times
RWw5 Data format
RWw6 A-D conversion enable/disable setting
RWw7 Not used
The data content to be written to the remote registers RWw0 to RWwn is predefined for each remote device
station.
4-8 4-8
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
[Reading from the remote register (RWr)]

8) The remote register RWr data of a remote device station is
automatically stored in the "remote register Rwr" buffer memory of the
master station.
9) The remote register RWr data of a remote device station stored in the
"remote register RWr" buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set
with the automatic refresh parameters.

Remote register RWr
Numeric data such as
digital output values,
Remote register RWr value, etc.
RWr0 RWr0
RWr1 RWr1
RWr2 RWr2
RWr3 8) RWr3
RWr4 RWr4 Remote register RWr
RWr5 RWr5 Numeric data such as
digital output values,
RWr6 RWr6
9) RWr7 RWr7 value, etc.
W RWr8 RWr0
RWr9 RWr1
RWrA RWr2
RWrB 8) RWr3
RWrC RWr4
RWrD RWr5
RWrE RWr6
RWrF RWr7
RWr10
to
RWrFF
[Remote register RWr when the AJ65BT-64AD is set to station number 1]

Signal direction: AJ65BT-64AD Master module
Address Description
RWw0 CH1 digital output value
RWw4 Error code
RWw5
RWw6 Not used
RWw7
4-9 4-9
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.2.3 Communication with the local stations
This section explains an overview of the communication between the master and local
stations.
(1) Communication between the master and local stations by cyclic

transmission
Data communication between PLC CPUs can be performed in N:N mode using
remote input RX and remote output RY (bit data used in local station systems) as
well as remote register RWw and remote register RWr (word data for writing and
reading used in local station systems).

PLC CPU Master station (station number 1) (station number 2) PLC CPU
Network 1) Network Network 1) Network

parameters parameters parameters parameters
Automatic Automatic
refresh refresh
Buffer memory Buffer memory Buffer memory
Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote output RY

4) 3) 3) 5)
Receive area Host station Receive area
X Automatic refresh from local Link scan (station number 1) Link scan from local Automatic refresh Y
station No. 1 send area station No. 1
4) Receive area 3) Receive area 3) 2)
Host station
X Automatic refresh from local Link scan from local Link scan (station number 2) Automatic refresh Y
station No. 2 station No. 2 send area
to to to
Remote output RY Remote input RX Remote input RX

6) 7) 7) 8)
Send area to Receive area Receive area
Y Automatic refresh local station Link scan from master Link scan from master Automatic refresh X
No. 1 station station
6) Send area to 7) Receive area 7) Receive area 8)
Y Automatic refresh local station from master from master Automatic refresh X
Link scan Link scan
to to to
Remote register Remote register Remote register

RWw RWr RWr
9) Send area to 10) 10) 11)
Receive area Receive area
W Automatic refresh local station Link scan from master Link scan from master Automatic refresh W
9) Send area to 10) Receive area 10) Receive area 11)
W Automatic refresh local station Link scan from master Link scan from master Automatic refresh W
to to to

RWr RWw RWw
14) 13) 13) 15)
Receive area Host station Receive area
W Automatic refresh from local Link scan (station number 1) Link scan from local Automatic refresh W
14) station No. 1 send area station No. 1
Receive area 13) Receive area 13) 12)
Host station
W Automatic refresh from local Link scan from local Link scan (station number 2) Automatic refresh W
station No. 2 station No. 2 send area
to to to
4 - 10 4 - 10
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
[Data link startup]

PLC CPU are transferred to the master station and the CC-Link system
starts up automatically.
[On/off data from a local station to the master station or other local
stations]
parameters is stored in the "remote output RY" buffer memory of the
local station. The remote output RY is used as output data in local
station systems.
3) The data in the "remote output RY" buffer memory of the local station is
automatically stored (for each link scan) in the "remote input RX" buffer
memory of the master station and the "remote output RY" buffer
memory of other local stations.
The remote input RX is used as input data in local station systems.
5) The input status stored in the "remote output RY" buffer memory is

PLC CPU Master station occupies 1 station) occupies 4 stations) PLC CPU
Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote output RY
RX0F to RX00 3) RY0F to RY00 3) RY0F to RY00 5)
Y
RX1D to RX10 RY1D to RY10 RY1D to RY10
RX2F to RX20 RY2F to RY20 RY2F to RY20
4) RX4F to RX40 RY4F to RY40 RY4F to RY40
X 3) 3) 2)
Y
RX9D to RX90 RY9D to RY90 RY9D to RY90
RXAF to RXA0 RYAF to RYA0 RYAF to RYA0
to to to
RX7FF to RX7F0 RY7FF to RY7F0 RY7FF to RY7F0
The last two bits cannot be used in the communication between the master
and local stations.
4 - 11 4 - 11
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
[On/off data from the master station to local stations]

parameters is stored in the "remote output RY" buffer memory of the
master station.
7) The data in the "remote output RY" buffer memory is stored
automatically (for each link scan) in the "remote input RX" buffer
memory of the local station.
8) The input status stored in the buffer memory "remote input RX" is

Remote output RY Remote input RX Remote input RX
RY0F to RY00 7) RX0F to RX00 7) RX0F to RX00
RY1D to RY10 RX1D to RX10 RX1D to RX10
RY2F to RY20 RX2F to RX20 RX2F to RX20
6) RY4F to RY40 RX4F to RX40 RX4F to RX40 8)
Y 7) 7) X
RY9D to RY90 RX9D to RX90 RX9D to RX90
RYAF to RYA0 RXAF to RXA0 RXAF to RXA0
to to to
RY7FF to RY7F0 RX7FF to RX7F0 RX7FF to RX7F0
The last two bits cannot be used in the communication between the master
and local stations.
4 - 12 4 - 12
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
[Word data from the master station to all local stations]

9) The word data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh
parameters is stored in the "remote register RWw" buffer memory of the
master station. The remote register RWw is used as word data for
writing in local station systems.
10) The data in the buffer memory "remote register RWw" is stored
automatically (for each link scan) in the buffer memory "remote register
RWr" of all local stations. The remote register RWr is used as word
data for reading in local station systems.
11) The word data stored in the buffer memory "remote register RWr" is

Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Remote register RWr

RWw0 RWr0 RWr0
RWw1 10) RWr1 10) RWr1
RWw2 RWr2 RWr2
RWw3 RWr3 RWr3
RWw4 RWr4 RWr4
RWw5 RWr5 RWr5
RWw6 RWr6 RWr6
RWw7 RWr7 RWr7
RWw8 RWr8 RWr8
9) RWw9 RWr9 RWr9 11)
W W
RWwA RWrA RWrA
RWwB 10) RWrB 10) RWrB
RWwC RWrC RWrC
RWwD RWrD RWrD
RWwE RWrE RWrE
RWwF RWrF RWrF
RWw10 RWr10 RWr10
RWw11 RWr11 RWr11
RWw12 RWr12 RWr12
RWw13 RWr13 RWr13
RWw14 RWr14 RWr14
to to to
RWwFF RWrFF RWrFF
4 - 13 4 - 13
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
[Word data from a local station to the master and other local
stations]
12) Word data set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the
"remote register RWw" buffer memory of the local station. However, the
data is stored only in the area corresponding to its own station number.
13) The data in the "remote register RWw" buffer memory is stored
automatically (for each link scan) in the "remote register RWr" of the
master station and the "remote register RWw" of other local stations.
14) The word data stored in the "remote register RWr" buffer memory is
15) The word data stored in the "remote register RWw" buffer memory is

Remote register RWr Remote register RWw Remote register RWw
RWr0 RWw0 RWw0
RWr1 13) RWw1 13) RWw1 15)
W
RWr2 RWw2 RWw2
RWr3 RWw3 RWw3
RWr4 RWw4 RWw4
RWr5 RWw5 RWw5
RWr6 RWw6 RWw6
RWr7 RWw7 RWw7
RWr8 RWw8 RWw8
14) RWr9 RWw9 RWw9
W
RWrA RWwA RWwA
RWrB 13) RWwB 13) RWwB 12)
W
RWrC RWwC RWwC
RWrD RWwD RWwD
RWrE RWwE RWwE
RWrF RWwF RWwF
RWr10 RWw10 RWw10
RWr11 RWw11 RWw11
RWr12 RWw12 RWw12
RWr13 RWw13 RWw13
RWr14 RWw14 RWw14
to to to
RWrFF RWwFF RWwFF
4 - 14 4 - 14
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(2) Communication between the master and local stations by transient

transmission
Transient transmission sends and receives data in 1 : 1 mode by specifying the
opposite party at an arbitrary timing.
[Writing data to the buffer memory in a local station using the RIWT
instruction]
1) Data to be written to the buffer memory in a local station is stored in the
send buffer in the master module.
2) The data is written to the buffer memory in the local station.
3) The local station returns a writing complete response to the master
station.
4) The devices specified with the RIWT instruction are turned on.

1) 2)
RIWT Send buffer
Device memory
Buffer memory
4) 3)
[Reading data from the buffer memory in a local station using the
RIRD instruction]
1) The data in the buffer memory of the local station is accessed.
2) The data read is stored in the receive buffer of the master station.
3) The data is stored in the device memory of the PLC CPU and the
devices specified with the RIRD instruction are turned on.
1)
RIRD
Device memory Buffer memory

3)
2)
Receive buffer
POINT
Before performing data communication using transient transmission, the sizes of
the send and receive buffers must be set up in the buffer memory of the master
station. For more details on setting the sizes of the send and receive buffers, see
Section 6.2.
4 - 15 4 - 15
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.2.4 Communication with the intelligent device stations
This section explains an overview of the communication between the master and
intelligent device stations.
(1) Communication between the master station and intelligent device

stations by cyclic transmission
Handshaking signals with intelligent device stations (positioning complete,
positioning start. etc.) are communicated using remote input RX and remote
output RX. Numeric data (positioning start number, present feed value, etc.) is
communicated using remote register RWw and remote register RWr.
Intelligent
PLC CPU Master station device station
Network 1) Network
Automatic
refresh
parameters
Buffer memory
Remote input
3) 2) RX
Remote input Handshaking signals
X Automatic refresh Link scan
RX such as initial data
processing request and
positioning complete
Remote output
4) 5) RY
Remote output
Y Automatic refresh Link scan Handshaking signals
RY such as initial data
processing complete
and positioning start
Remote register
6) 7) RWw
Remote register
W Automatic refresh Link scan Numeric data such
RWw as positioning start
number and speed
change value
Remote register
9) 8)
Remote register RWr
W Automatic refresh Link scan Numeric data such
RWr
as present feed
value and send speed
4 - 16 4 - 16
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
[Data link startup]

[Remote input]
2) The remote input RX of an intelligent device station is stored
automatically (for each link scan) in the master station's "remote input
RX" buffer memory.

(Station number 1:
PLC CPU Master station occupies 4 stations)
Remote input RX
Remote input RX as positioning complete

3) RX3F to RX30 2) RX3F to RX30
X
RX8F to RX80
to
RX7FF to RX7F0
[Remote input RX when the AJ65BT-D75P2-S3 is set to station number 1]

Signal direction: AJ65BT-D75P2-S3 Master module
RX00 D75P2 ready complete
RX01 Single-axis start complete
RX02 Dual-axis start complete
RX03 Use prohibited
RX04 Single-axis BUSY
RX05 Dual-axis BUSY
RX06 Use prohibited
RX07 Single-axis positioning complete
RX08 Dual-axis positioning complete
to to
4 - 17 4 - 17
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
[Remote output]
5) Remote output RY of the intelligent device station is automatically set to
on/off (for each link scan) according to the output status stored in the
"remote output RY" buffer memory.

(Station number 1:
Remote output RY
Remote output RY as positioning start

4) RY3F to RY30 5) RY3F to RY30
Y
RY8F to RY80
to
RY7FF to RY7F0
[Remote output RY when the AJ65BT- D75P2-S3 is set to station number 1]

Address Description
RY01
to Use prohibited
RY0F
RY10 Single-axis positioning start
RY11 Dual-axis positioning start
RY12 Use prohibited
RY13 Single-axis stop
RY14 Dual-axis stop
to to
4 - 18 4 - 18
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
[Writing to the remote register (RWw)]

6) The transmission data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh
parameters is stored in the "remote register RWw" buffer memory.
7) The data stored in the "remote register RWw" buffer memory is
automatically sent to the remote register RWw of the intelligent device
station.
(Station number 1:
Remote register RWw
positioning start number
Remote register RWw
RWw0 RWw0
RWw1 RWw1
RWw2 RWw2
RWw3 RWw3
RWw4 RWw4
RWw5 RWw5
RWw6 RWw6
6) RWw7 7) RWw7
W
RWw8 RWw8
RWw9 RWw9
RWwA RWwA
RWwB RWwB
RWwC RWwC
RWwD RWwD
RWwE RWwE
RWwF RWwF
RWw10
to
RWwFF
[Remote register RWw when the AJ65BT-D75P2-S3 is set to station number 1]

Signal direction: Master module AJ65BT-D75P2-S3
Address Description
RWw0 Single-axis positioning start number
RWw1 Single-axis override
RWw2
Single-axis new present value
RWw3
RWw4
Single-axis new speed value
RWw5
RWw6
Single-axis JOG speed
RWw7
to to
The data content to be written to the remote registers RWw0 to RWwn is predefined for each intelligent
device station.
4 - 19 4 - 19
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
[Reading from the remote register (RWr)]

8) The remote register RWr data of the intelligent device station is
automatically stored in the "remote register Rwr" buffer memory of the
master station.
9) The remote register RWr data of the intelligent device station stored in
the "remote register RWr" buffer memory is stored in the CPU device
set with the automatic refresh parameters.
(Station number 1:
Remote register RWr
present feed value
Remote register RWr
RWr0 RWr0
RWr1 RWr1
RWr2 RWr2
RWr3 RWr3
RWr4 RWr4
RWr5 RWr5
RWr6 RWr6
9) RWr7 8) RWr7
W
RWr8 RWr8
RWr9 RWr9
RWrA RWrA
RWrB RWrB
RWrC RWrC
RWrD RWrD
RWrE RWrE
RWrF RWrF
RWr10
to
RWrFF
[Remote register RWw when the AJ65BT-D75P2-S3 is set to station number 1]

Address Description
RWr0
Single-axis present feed value
RWr1
RWr2
Single-axis feed speed
RWr3
RWr4 Single-axis valid M code
RWr5 Single-axis error number
RWr6 Single-axis warning number
RWr7 Single-axis operating status
to to
4 - 20 4 - 20
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(2) Communication between the master and intelligent device stations

by transient transmission
Transient transmission sends and receives data in 1 : 1 mode by specifying the
opposite party at an arbitrary timing.
[Writing data to the buffer memory in the intelligent device station

using the RIWT instruction]
1) Data to be written to the buffer memory in an intelligent device station is
stored in the send buffer in the master module.
2) The data is written to the buffer memory in the intelligent device.
3) The intelligent device returns a writing complete response to the master
station.
4) The devices specified with the RIWT instruction are turned on.
Master station Intelligent device station
1) 2)
RIWT Send buffer
Device memory
Buffer memory
4) 3)
[Reading data from the buffer memory in the intelligent device

station using the RIRD instruction]
1) The data in the buffer memory of an intelligent device station is
accessed.
2) The data read is stored in the receive buffer of the master station.
3) The data is stored in the device memory of the PLC CPU and the
devices specified with the RIRD instruction are turned on.
Master station Intelligent device station
1)
RIRD
Device memory
Buffer memory
3)
2)
Receive buffer
POINT
Before performing data communication using transient transmission, the sizes of
the send and receive buffers must be set up in the buffer memory of the master
station. For more details on setting the sizes of the send and receive buffers, see
Section 6.2.
4 - 21 4 - 21
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.2.5 Parameter setting with GX Developer
Using GX Developer makes the setting of the network parameters and automatic
refresh parameters easier.
The data link is automatically started if GX Developer is used to set the parameters.
Using GX Developer to set the parameters has the following advantages:
• It is not necessary to write a program for setting the parameters.
• It is possible to perform automatic refresh in the system.
POINT
In case a system includes both a module for which the network parameters are set
by GX Developer and a module for which the network parameters are set by the
dedicated instruction (RLPASET), the module for which the network parameters are
set by the RLPASET instruction should not be included in the "No. of boards in
module" setting of GX Developer.
Network parameter
Automatic refresh parameter

Write to PLC
GX Developer Master station

Local station Remote I/O station Remote device station
Data link start
[Setting method]
For more details on the setting, see Sections 6.3 to 6.6.
4 - 22 4 - 22
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.2.6 Parameter setting with dedicated instruction
It is possible to use the RLPASET instruction to set the network parameters of the
master station and start the data link.
Using the RLPASET instruction to set the parameters has the following advantages:
• It is possible to mount five or more QJ61BT11N modules (see Section 2.2.1 for
details about the number of CPUs that can be mounted).
• It is possible to change the network parameter settings while the PLC CPU is
running.
POINT
It is recommended to use GX Developer to set the parameters when the number of
QJ61BT11N mounted is 4 or less.
Parameter setting
direction
Control
data set
RLPASET
instruction
RLPASET
instruction completion
Refresh Write to PLC
direction
Master station
GX Developer
Local station Remote I/O station Remote device station
Data link start
(1) Setting method

For more details on the setting, see Section 6.7.
For the RLPASET instruction, see Appendix 2.7.
(2) Precautions when using the RLPASET instruction to set the

network parameters
(a) The remote I/O net mode cannot be used.
The module operates in remote net mode.
(b) If it is necessary to change the network parameters while the PLC CPU is
running and the data link is being performed, the data link should be
stopped once using SB0002 (data link stop).
4 - 23 4 - 23
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(c) It is necessary to set I/O assignments for modules whose network

parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction.
In addition, do not use GX Developer to set the network parameters and
automatic refresh parameters for modules whose network parameters are
set by the RLPASET instruction.
If the RLPASET instruction is used to set network parameters for modules
whose network parameters and automatic refresh parameters have been
set by GX Developer, the RLPASET instruction will complete with an error
and the network parameter settings performed by the RLPASET instruction
become invalid.
(d) If the switch setting of an intelligent functional module for which an I/O
assignment is set, has not been performed or is wrong, the RLPASET
instruction completes with an error.
However, the QJ61BT11N with the smallest head I/O number seen from
the PLC CPU starts CC-Link automatically.
(e) Do not use GX Developer for setting the network parameters, if the network
parameters of all the modules are set by the RLPASET instruction.
Change the "No. of boards in module" setting to blank if the network
parameters have been already set by GX Developer.
Moreover, in case a system includes both a module for which the network
parameters are set by GX Developer and a module for which the network
parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction, the module for which the
network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction should not be
included in the "No. of boards in module" setting of GX Developer.
(f) Automatic refresh is not performed.

The devices should be refreshed via the FROM/TO instruction or the G device.
(g) It is not possible to set input status from a data link faulty station.
Inputs from a data link faulty station are cleared.
(h) The standby master function is not available.
(i) In order to change the parameter setting method, turn the power supply to
the PLC system off and back on, or reset the PLC CPU.
The following table shows how the PLC CPU operates when changing the
parameter setting method without turning the power supply to the PLC
system off and back on, or resetting the PLC CPU.
Parameter setting method Parameter setting method
Error notification method Continuity of data link
(before change) (after change)
Parameter setting with GX Parameter setting with the The RLPASET instruction
Data link continues.
Developer RLPASET instruction completes with an error.
Parameter setting with the Parameter setting with GX LINK.PARA.ERR occurs in
Data link stops.
RLPASET instruction Developer the PLC CPU.
Note that data link continues to be performed if the designation of
operation at CPU down ((S1) + 5) of the RLPASET instruction is set to
"Continue."
(j) When the PLC CPU is switched from RUN to STOP, RY of the master
station and outputs to the remote, local, intelligent device and standby
master stations are retained.
4 - 24 4 - 24
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.3 Functions for Improving System Reliability
This section explains the functions for improving the reliability of the CC-Link system.
4.3.1 Disconnecting data link faulty stations and continuing the data link with only normal
stations (Slave station cut-off function)
This function disconnects remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations,
and a standby master station that have become data link faulty due to power off, and
continues the data link among normal remote stations, local stations, intelligent device
stations, and standby master station (no setting is required).
Master Local Local

Down
station station station
Remote Remote
station station
Terminal Terminal
resistor resistor
Continues data link excluding faulty stations.
POINT
In the event of cable disconnection, the data link cannot be performed because
there is no terminal resistor ("ERR." LED lights up).
Master Local Local

Remote Remote
station station
Terminal Disconnection Terminal

resistor resistor
4 - 25 4 - 25
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.3.2 Automatically reconnecting a disconnected data link faulty station when it returns to
normal (Automatic return function)
This function allows remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations, and a
standby master station that have been disconnected from the data link due to power
off to automatically reconnect to the data link when they return to the normal status.
[Setting method]
Set the "Automatic reconnection station count" value in the network
parameters using the GX Developer. For more details on the setting, see
Sections 6.3 to 6.5.
4 - 26 4 - 26
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.3.3 Continuing the data link when an error occurs in the master station PLC CPU
(Data link status setting when the master station PLC CPU has an error)
This function sets the data link status when the master station PLC CPU falls into an
error that stop the operation. It is possible to continue the data link among the local
stations.
POINT
(1) The data link continues when the master station PLC CPU falls into an "error
that stops the operation".
(2) If a standby master station is being set, the data link will not continue when the
master station PLC CPU is down even when the data link status at CPU down
is set to "Continue". The standby master function overrides and the data link
control is transferred to the standby master station.
[Setting method]
Set the above data link status with the "PLC down select" value in the
network parameters using GX Developer. For more details on the setting,
see Sections 6.3 to 6.6.
4 - 27 4 - 27
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.3.4 Retaining the device status of a data link faulty station

(Setting the status of input data from a data link faulty station)
This function sets the input (receiving) data from a data link faulty station.
(1) Applicable input (receiving) data

The following shows the applicable buffer memory areas.
Remote I/O station Remote device station Local station Local station
Master station (station number 1) (station number 2) (station number 3) (station number 4)
Remote input (RX) Remote output (RY) Remote output (RY)

Station number 1 Input Station number 1 Station number 1
Station number 2 Remote input (RX) Station number 2 Station number 2
Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 3
Remote output (RY) Remote input (RX) Remote input (RX)

Station number 1 Output Station number 1 Station number 1
Station number 2 Remote output (RY) Station number 2 Station number 2

(RWw) (RWr) (RWr)
Station number 2 Remote register Station number 2 Station number 2
(RWw)

(RWr) (RWw) (RWw)
(RWr)
Target areas for clear/hold

Areas retained regardless of the setting
The remote input RX in the master station and the remote input RX and remote output
RY in local stations either clear or retain data from faulty stations according to the
setting. The remote register RWr in the master station and the remote register RWw
and remote register RWr in local stations retain data from faulty stations regardless of
the setting.
POINT
When the data link faulty station is set as an error invalid station, input data (remote
input RX) from that station is retained regardless of the setting.
(2) Setting method

Set the "Operational setting" value in the network parameters using the GX
Developer. For more details on the setting, see Sections 6.3 to 6.6.
4 - 28 4 - 28
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.3.5 Clearing data in case of PLC CPU STOP (Slave station refresh/compulsory clear
setting in case of PLC CPU STOP)
This function compulsorily clears output (send) data to slave stations when the PLC
CPU comes to STOP.
Remote output RY refresh device setting in the automatic refresh parameter dialog box
provides the following choices.
When "Y" is specified, the remote output RY is cleared regardless of the parameter
setting.
When specifying any device other than "Y" (e.g. M or L), make parameter setting
whether the remote output RY will be refreshed or compulsorily cleared.
When using GX Developer for setting, use Version 8.03D or later.
(1) Target output (send) data

The following shows the applicable buffer memory areas.
Remote I/O station Remote device station Local station Local station
Master station (station number 1) (station number 2) (station number 3) (station number 4)
Remote input (RX) Remote output (RY) Remote output (RY)

Station number 1 Input Station number 1 Station number 1
Station number 2 Remote input (RX) Station number 2 Station number 2
Remote output (RY) Remote input (RX) Remote input (RX)

Station number 1 Output Station number 1 Station number 1
Station number 2 Remote output (RY) Station number 2 Station number 2

(RWw) (RWr) (RWr)
(RWw)

(RWr) (RWw) (RWw)
(RWr)
Area of refresh/compulsory clear setting target

Area refreshed independently of setting
The remote output RY is refreshed or compulsorily cleared according to the

setting when the PLC CPUs for the master and local stations come to STOP.
The remote input RX, remote register RWw and remote register RWr are
refreshed regardless of the setting when the PLC CPUs for the master and local
stations come to STOP.
4 - 29 4 - 29
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
POINT
(1) Specifying compulsory clear disables compulsory output to slave stations at
CPU STOP using GX Developer.
(2) This setting is also valid when the TO instruction is used for RY refresh.
(2) Setting method

Set the "Operational setting" value in the network parameters using the GX
Developer. For more details on the setting, see Sections 6.3 to 6.6.
4 - 30 4 - 30
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.3.6 Continuing the data link even when the master station is faulty
(Standby master function)
This function enables the data link to continue working by switching to a standby
master station (meaning a backup station for the master station) if a system down
occurs in the master station due to a malfunction in the PLC CPU or power supply.
The master station can return to normal mode and to system operation as the standby
master station, even during data-link control by the standby master station, thus
preparing itself for a standby master station system down (master station duplex
function).
4 - 31 4 - 31
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
Controlling: Controlling the data link of the CC-Link system

Standby: Standing by in case the station controlling the data link of the CC-Link system becomes faulty.
Data link control by the master station Station number 1

Controlling
Master station is down Data link control by the standby master station Standby master station
Master station Station number 1 0 1

Controlling
Master station returns to normal mode and system operation Master station prepares itself for standby master station system down
Master station Standby master station
Station number 0 1 2 Number of occupied stations: 1
Station number 0

Standby Number of occupied stations: 2 Number of occupied stations: 1
Controlling
To the next page

1: When the master station becomes faulty and the data link control is transferred to the standby master station,
the station number of the standby master station becomes "0".
2: When the master station returns to system operation as a standby master station, the station number of the master
station becomes the one specified in the "Standby master station number" in the network parameters.
4 - 32 4 - 32
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
Continued from the previous page
Problem occurs in the standby master station Data link control by the master station
Master station

Controlling
Standby master station returns to normal mode and system operation Standby master station prepares itself for master
station system down Standby master station
Station number 1

Controlling Number of occupied stations: 2 Number of occupied stations: 1 Standby
4 - 33 4 - 33
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(1) Overview of link data transmission when the standby master

function is used
The following shows an overview of link data transmission when the standby
master function is used.
(a) When the master station controls the data link
1) Master station output
Standby master station (standby)

Station number 1
Master station(controlling) Number of occupied stations: 1
Remote Remote Remote Remote
input RX output RY input RX output RY Remote I/O station
Station number 2
RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F
Number of occupied stations: 1
RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F Remote I/O station
Station number 3
RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
Data sent from the master station to the remote input RX and remote
register RWr in the standby master station (shown by the shaded areas
in the figure above) is used as output data when the master station
becomes faulty; it should be saved in another device using the sequence
program.
When the master station becomes faulty, the saved data is transferred to
the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the standby master
station using the sequence program.
2) Master station input
Standby master station (standby)

Station number 1
Master station(controlling) Number of occupied stations: 1
Station number 2
Station number 3
Data sent to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the
standby master station is used as input data by the standby master
station when local stations are operating; thus, it does not need to be
saved in another device.
4 - 34 4 - 34
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(b) When the master station is faulty and the standby master station is
controlling the data link
1) Standby master station output

(controlling)
Station number 2
Number of occupied stations: 1 Remote I/O station
Station number 3
standby master station by the sequence program is sent to other
stations as output data.
2) Standby master station input

(controlling)
Station number 2
Number of occupied stations: 1 Remote I/O station
Station number 3
Data in the shaded areas in the standby master station is either input or
retained according to the "Data link faulty station setting" in the network
parameters.
4 - 35 4 - 35
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(c) When the master station has returned to system operation and the standby
master station is controlling the data link
1) Standby master station output
Master station (standby) Standby master station

Station number 0 1 (controlling)
Number of occupied stations: 1 Station number 0

Station number 2
Station number 3
Data sent from the standby master station to the remote input RX and
remote register RWr in the standby master station (shown by the shaded
areas in the figure above) is used as output data when the master
station becomes faulty; it should be saved in another device using the
sequence program.
When the standby master station becomes faulty, the saved data is
transferred to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the
master station using the sequence program.
2) Standby master station input
Master station (standby) Standby master station

Station number 0 1 (controlling)
Number of occupied stations: 1 Station number 0

RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F Station number 2
RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F Station number 3
master station is being used as input data by the master station when
local stations are operating; thus, it does not need to be saved in another
device.
4 - 36 4 - 36
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(d) When the standby master station becomes faulty and the master station
controls the data link
1) Master station output
Master station (controlling)


Station number 2
Station number 3
master station by the sequence program is sent to other stations as
output data.
2) Master station input
Master station (controlling)

RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F Station number 2
RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F Station number 3
Data in the shaded areas in the master station is either input or retained
according to the "Operational settings" in the network parameters.
4 - 37 4 - 37
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(2) Setting method

Perform the setting using the GX Developer.
(a) Setting the master station
First, set "Type" in the network parameters.
Master station that was down returns to system operation: Master station
(Duplex function)
Master station that was down does not return to system operation: Master
station
Next, set the "Standby master station No." of the network parameter.
Setting range: 1 to 64 (blank means no specification for standby master
station)
Default : blank (no specification for standby master station)
(b) Setting the standby master station

Set "Type" in the network parameters to "Standby master station".
Set the mode according to the mode setting of the master station.
4 - 38 4 - 38
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(3) Precautions on using the standby master function

(a) Only one standby master station exists in a single data link system.
(b) The total number of stations is 64, including the standby master station. The
number of stations that can be occupied by the standby master station is
one or four.
(c) If an error is detected at the master station in the initial status (before
parameter communication starts), switching to the standby master station
will not be executed.
(d) When the master station becomes faulty, the data link control will
automatically be transferred to the standby master station, but the refresh
instruction of the cyclic data will not be issued. Specify the cyclic data refresh
using the sequence program. Once specified, the information prior to the
error detection at the master station will be output to each station.
(e) When the data link is being controlled by the standby master station, the
master station's parameters cannot be updated.
(f) An error (error code: B39A) occurs at the standby master station if there is a
difference between the station number setting of the station number setting
switches of the standby master station and the station number setting of the
network parameter "standby master station number" of the master station.
If an error has occurred, change the parameter setting of the master station
or the station number setting switch setting of the standby master station,
and then reset the PLC CPU of the standby master station.
(g) If the terminal block of the master station is removed and then replaced in its
original position without turning the power off when the master station is
controlling the data link, both the master and standby master stations
operate as master stations. An error occurs since the data link control has
been transferred to the standby master station ("ERR." LED lights up).
(h) When the master station becomes faulty and the data link control is
transferred to the standby master station, the "ERR." LED of the standby
master station flashes. (This is because the station number of the standby
master station will change from the one set with a parameter to "0" and the
standby station becomes nonexistent. Data link itself is performed normally.)
To avoid this situation, set the standby master station to be an error invalid
station.
(i) The number and range of devices that will be saved by the sequence
program among the data sent from (the station operating as) the master
station to (the station operating as) the standby station may differ according
to the system used.
4 - 39 4 - 39
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(4) Link special relays/registers (SB and SW) relating to the standby
master function
The following explains the link special relays and registers relating to the standby
master function. These are stored in the buffer memory.
When the standby master station is controlling the data link, its applicability is
basically identical to that of the master station. When the standby master station
is operating as a local station, its applicability is identical to that of the local
station.
(a) Link special relays (SB)

The link special relays (SB) relating to the standby master function are as
follows : The figures in parentheses in the number column indicate buffer
memory addresses and bit locations.
Example: When the buffer memory address is 5E0H and the bit location is 0:
(5E0H, b0)
Table 4.5 List of link special relays relating to the standby master function (1/2)
Applicability
( : Applicable, : Not applicable)
Number Name Description
Master
Local station Offline
station
Gives refresh instruction for cyclic data after the data link control
SB0001 Refresh instruction at is transferred to the standby master station.
(5E0H, b1) standby master switching 0: No instruction
1: Instructed
Forcefully transfers the data link control from the standby master
station that controls the data link to the master station that stands
SB000C
Forced master switching by in case the standby master station becomes faulty.
(5E0H, b12)
0: No request
1: Requested
Refresh instruction Indicates whether the refresh instruction at standby master
SB0042 acknowledgement status switching has been acknowledged or not.
(5E4H, b2) at standby master 0: Not acknowledged
switching 1: Instruction acknowledged
Indicates whether the refresh instruction at standby master
Refresh instruction
SB0043 switching is complete or not.
complete status at standby
(5E4H, b3) 0: Not complete
master switching
1: Switching complete
Indicates whether the forced master switching (SB000C) signal
SB0046 Forced master switching can be executed or not.
(5E4H, b6) executable status OFF: Cannot be executed.
ON: Can be executed.
Indicates the acknowledgement status of the standby master
station when it has received a master switching request from the
SB005A Master switching request
line.
(5E5H, b10) acknowledgement
OFF: Not acknowledged
ON: Request acknowledged
Indicates whether or not the switch from the standby master
SB005B Master switching request station to the master station is complete.
(5E5H, b11) complete OFF: Not complete
ON: Complete
Indicates whether a forced master switching request has been
SB005C Forced master switching acknowledged or not.
(5E4H, b12) request acknowledgement 0: Not acknowledged
1: Instruction acknowledged
4 - 40 4 - 40
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
Table 4.5 List of link special relays relating to the standby master function (2/2)
Applicability
Master
station
Indicates whether a forced master switching request
SB005D Forced master switching acknowledgement is complete or not.
(5E5H, b13) request complete 0: Not complete
1: Switching complete
Indicates whether or not the standby master station setting exists
SB0062 Host standby master for the host.
(5E6H, b2) station setting information 0: No setting
1: Setting exists
Shows the data link status.
SB0070
Master station information 0: Data link control by the master station
(5E7H, b0)
1: Data link control by the standby master station
Indicates whether or not there is a standby master station.
SB0071 Standby master station
0: No standby master station
(5E7H, b1) information
1: Standby master station exists
Indicates whether the "Type" setting in the network parameters is
SB0079 Master station return set to "Master station" or "Master station (Duplex function)."
(5E7H, b9) specification information OFF: Master station
ON: Master station (Duplex function)
Indicates whether the host operates as the master or standby
SB007B Host master/standby master station.
(5E7H, b11) master operation status OFF: Operates as a master station (controlling data link)
ON: Operates as a standby master station (standby)
(b) Link special registers (SW)

The following describes the link special registers (SW) relating to the
standby master function. The figures in parentheses in the number column
indicate buffer memory addresses.
Table 4.6 List of link special registers relating to the standby master function
Applicability
Master
station
Indicates the execution result of refresh instruction at standby
Refresh instruction at
SW0043 master switching.
standby master switching
(643H) 0 : Normal
result
Other than 0: Stores the error code (see Section 13.3).
Stores the execution result of the forced master switching
SW005D Forced master switching instruction with SB000C.
(65DH) instruction result 0 : Normal
SW0073 Standby master station Stores the station number of the standby master station.
(673H) number 1 to 64 (station)
4 - 41 4 - 41
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(5) On/off timings of link special relays (SB) relating to the standby
master function
The following shows the on/off timings of the link special relays (SB) relating to
the standby master function.
ON
SB70 OFF
(Master station information)
SB7B ON
(Host master/standby master operation status) OFF
ON
SB5A
(Master switching request acknowledgment) OFF
ON
SB5B
(Master switching request complete) OFF
ON
SB01(User operation)
(Refresh instruction at standby master switching) OFF
SB42 ON
(Refresh instruction acknowledgment status OFF
at standby master switching)
ON
SB43
(Refresh instruction complete status at standby OFF
master switching)
When SB5B is turned on, the program switches RX to RY and RWr to RWw.
In addition, the program turns SB01 on.
4 - 42 4 - 42
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(6) Program example when the standby master function (master

station duplex function) is used
A program example is created under the following conditions when the standby
master function (master station duplex function) is used.
(a) System configuration
Station number 1

(b) Parameter settings of the master station
(c) Parameter settings of the standby master station
4 - 43 4 - 43
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(d) Program example when standby master function (master station duplex
function) is used
Control start relay used when master station is operating...................M10
Control start relay used when standby master station is operating .....M11
Control start relay when the master
station is operating
Initial device set
Control start relay when the station
master station is (local station) is
operating
Save remote input RX and emote

register RWr data to W device
Set the saved data to remote

Control ladder when output RY and remote register RWr
the master station is
operating
Refresh change instruction request ON
Refresh change instruction

request OFF
Control program when the master station is operating
Control ladder when

the standby master Control program when the standby master operation is operating
station is operating (local station operation)
(Local station operating)
(e) When forcibly switching the data link control right from the standby master
station to the master station
The areas enclosed by the broken and dotted lines in the program example
shown in (d) must be modified as shown below.
Forced master switching request .........................................................M200
Control program when the master station is operating
Control program when the standby master operation is operating

(local station operation)
4 - 44 4 - 44
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.4 Handy Functions
This section explains some handy functions of the QJ61BT11N.
4.4.1 Simplifying the initialization procedure registration of remote device stations (Remote
device station initialization procedure registration function)
The initial settings of remote device stations, which in previous models were done
using the sequence program, can now be performed using the GX Developer for
registration to the PLC CPU.
Settings such as "A-D conversion enable/disable" and "Averaging processing
specification" can be performed easily with the AJ65BT-64AD.
For an example of an initialization procedure using the GX Developer, see Sections
10.1.3, 10.2.3 and 10.3.3.
(1) Initialization procedure setting method

The initial settings are performed using the "Remote device station initial setting"
in the network parameters. A maximum of 16 stations can be set. When 17 or
more remote device stations are connected, perform the initial settings for the
17th and subsequent stations using the sequence program.
(a) In "Target", set the station number of a module for which the initial settings
are to be performed.
Setting range: 1 to 64
(b) Set the initialization procedure in "Regist procedure".
1) Input format
Set the data input format for "Write data" in details of execution.
Setting range: DEC.
HEX.
Default: DEC.
4 - 45 4 - 45
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
2) Execute Flag
Set whether or not to execute the specified initialization procedure.
Setting range: Execute
Only set (use as a memo when the execution conditions
are the same as when the execution flag is set as
"Execute", but the content of execution is different.)
Default: Execute
3) Operational condition
Specify whether new settings or the previous settings are used for the
initialization conditions.
Setting range: Set new
Same as prev. set
Default: Set new
When "Same as prev. set" is selected, the processing is performed as
follows:
Example)
RX1
0 SET RY3
M0V K15 RWw2
4) Executional condition settings "Condition Device"

Set the device to be used for the initialization condition.
Setting range: RX
SB
5) Executional condition settings "Device Number"

Set the device number to be used for the initialization condition.
Setting range: When RX is selected 0 to 37F (H)
When SB is selected 0 to FF (H)
6) Executional condition settings "Execute Condition"

Set the conditions under which initialization is performed.
Setting range: ON
OFF
7) Details of execution "Write Device"

Set the device to which the contents of the initial setting are written.
Setting range: RY
RWw
8) Details of execution "Device Number"

Set the device number to which the contents of the initial settings are
written.
Setting range: When RY is selected 0 to 37F (H)
When RWw is selected 0 to 0F (H)
4 - 46 4 - 46
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
9) Details of execution "Write Data"

Set the contents of the initial settings.
Setting range: When RY is selected ON/OFF
When RWw is selected 0 to 65535 (Decimal),
0 to FFFF (Hexadecimal)
(2) Validate initial settings

Before creating a program for communication with remote device stations, create
a program to validate the initial settings that use SB0D (remote device station
initialization procedure registration instruction) and SB5F (completion status of
remote device station initialization procedure).
For more details, see Sections 10.1.4, 10.2.4 and 10.3.4.
(3) Preparation for communication with remote device stations

1) Register the network parameters and the created program in the PLC CPU.
2) Reset the PLC CPU or turn the power from off to on.
3) Instruct the master station to register the remote device station initialization
procedure. (This instruction may not be necessary in some cases such as
when the remote input RX is set as a startup condition.)
4 - 47 4 - 47
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
POINT
(1) Because one step is performed per link scan, as the number of settings
increases the processing time will extend beyond that specified in the sequence
program.
(2) While SB0D (remote device station initialization procedure registration
instruction) is on, the refresh of the remote input/output and remote registers
stops.
(3) When the remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction
(SB000D) turns OFF after completion of the initial processing, all of RY signals
that have turned ON during the registration turn OFF.
Therefore, for signals that should be kept ON (e.g. CH. Conversion enable
flag of the AJ65BT-64RD3/4), turn them ON in the sequence program.
(4) The remote device station initialization procedure execution complete status
(SB005F) does not turn ON unless the procedure registration for all stations
that are set to the remote device station initialization procedure registration is
completed.
If any error station exists, turn OFF the remote device station initialization
procedure registration instruction (SB000D) depending on the status of the
other stations.
(5) The remote device station initialization procedure registration is not allowed for
the standby master station.
When replacing a remote device station while the standby master station is
operating as a master, perform initial setting on the sequence program.
4 - 48 4 - 48
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.4.2 Performing high-speed processing (Event issuance for the interrupt program)
This function issues events (signals to execute an interrupt program) according to

factors such as the on/off status of specified RX, RY and SB devices and the
match/mismatch status of specified RWr and SW device data, in order to allow the
PLC CPU to execute the interrupt program.
Because the conditions for issuing the events are set using the GX Developer, the
number of program steps is reduced, thus shortening the scan time.
Events can be issued for all stations.
A maximum of 16 event issuance conditions can be set.
(1) Event issuance conditions

Events are issued under the following conditions:
On/off status of specified RX, RY and SB devices
Match/mismatch status of specified RWr and SW device data
When the link scan is completed
(2) Event issuance condition setting method

(a) First, set the "Interrupt setting" in the network parameters.
1) Input format
Set the data input format for "Word device".
Setting range: DEC.
HEX.
Default: DEX.
2) Device code
Set the device to be used for the event issuance conditions.
Setting range: RX
SB
RY
RWr
SW
Scan completed
3) Device No.
Set the device number to be used for the event issuance conditions.
Setting range: When RX or RY is selected 0 to 1FFF (H)
When SB or SW is selected 0 to 01FF (H)
When RWr is selected 0 to 00FF (H)
4) Detection method
Set the detection method for the event issuance conditions.
Setting range: Edge detect (Issues event only at rise and fall.)
Level detect (Issues each link scan event when the event
issuance conditions are established.)
4 - 49 4 - 49
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
5) Interrupt condition
Set the conditions under which events are issued.
Setting range: When RX, SB or RY is selected ON/OFF
When RWr or SW is selected Equal/Unequal
6) Word device
Set the conditions under which events are issued when RWw or SW is
selected.
Setting range: 0 to 65535 (Decimal)
0 to FFFF (Hexadecimal)
7) Interrupt (SI) No.
Set the intelligent function module interrupt pointer number.
(SI is an interrupt pointer for an intelligent function module and not a
device used in an actual program.)
POINT
Only one event issuance condition can be set for each interrupt program.
(b) Set the "PLC parameter" -- "PLC system" -- "Intelligent function module
setting" -- "Interrupt pointer settings".
1) "Interrupt pointer start No." on the PLC side.
Set the interrupt pointer start number for the CPU.
2) "Interrupt pointer No. of units" on the PLC side
Set the number of event issuance conditions specified in the "Interrupt
settings" of the Network parameters
3) "Start I/O No." on the Intelli. unit side
Set the start input/output number for the intelligent function module for
which the interrupt setting was performed.
Setting range: 0 to 0FF0 (H)
4 - 50 4 - 50
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4) "Start SI No." on the intelli. unit side

Set the smallest number for intelligent function module interrupt pointers
specified in "Interrupt (SI) No." of the "Interrupt settings" in the Network
parameters.
(3) Simulation of the interrupt program

When the event issuance conditions are established in the master station using
the GX Developer, the interrupt program is executed even when the
corresponding modules are not connected, and then the interrupt program can
be simulated.
(Example) A case where an event is issued when RX01 turns on, and then an
interrupt program is executed.
Remote device station

(Station number 1:
PLC CPU Master station number of occupied stations: 2)
2) The event
issuance
3) The interrupt conditions are
program is established. 1) Turns on RX01
executed. using the GX
Developer.
4 - 51 4 - 51
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.4.3 Enabling the data link simply by powering on (Automatic CC-Link startup)
When the QJ61BT11N is used in a system configuration including not only remote I/O
stations but also remote device stations and intelligent device stations, the CC-Link
startup and data refresh are performed only by powering up the system and without
creating sequence programs.
Use this function to make an operation check when constructing a system. When
performing control, always set the network parameters.
1) Power ON/Reset 5) STOP RUN
PCL CPU Master station PLC CPU Master station

2) Identifies
QJ61BT11N
3) CC-Link
startup
4) CPU refresh processing
Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
(first module) (64th module) (first module) (64th module)
(1) Contents of default parameter settings at automatic CC-Link startup

The following lists the contents of the default automatic refresh parameter
settings and network parameter settings when the automatic CC-Link starts up.
Content of default automatic refresh parameter settings

Q02/Q02H/Q06H/
Master station/ Master station/
Q12H/Q25H/Q12PH/ Direction Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU side Direction
local station side local station side
Q25PHCPU side
X1000 to X17FF RX0000 to RX07FF X400 to X7FF RX000 to RX3FF
Y1000 to Y17FF RY0000 to RY07FF Y400 to Y7FF RY000 to RY3FF
W1E00 to W1EFF RWr00 to RWrFF W600 to W67F RWr00 to RWr7F
W1F00 to W1FFF RWw00 to RWwFF W700 to W77F RWw00 to RWw7F
SB0600 to SB07FF SB0000 to SB01FF SB200 to SB3FF SB0000 to SB01FF
SW0600 to SW07FF SW0000 to SW01FF SW200 to SW3FF SW0000 to SW01FF
Content of default network parameter settings

Mode setting Remote net ver.1 mode
Total number of connected
64 stations
stations
Number of retries 3 times
Number of automatic return
1 module
modules
Standby master station number No standby master station specified.
CPU down specification Data link stop when a master station CPU error occurs
Scan mode setting Asynchronous
Delay time setting 0
4 - 52 4 - 52
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
Content of buffer memory size specification for intelligent device station

Send buffer 64 words
Receive buffer 64 words
Automatic update buffer 128 words
POINT
(1) Perform an automatic CC-Link startup in the remote net ver. 1 mode.
(2) When the automatic CC-Link startup is executed on a local station, the local
station operates occupying 1 station.
(3) Make sure to perform line tests for all stations if an automatic CC-Link startup is
performed and changes such as replacement of a module, etc. are made to the
system during data link operation.
Stations whose data link has already been established (only stations whose
station numbers overlap) may also go down if stations with overlapping head
station numbers return to the system.
(4) If an automatic CC-Link startup was performed, a temporary error invalid
station cannot be used.
(5) In case of a multiple PLC system where each CPU controls several
QJ61BT11N modules, the automatic CC-Link startup is performed on the
QJ61BT11N that has the smallest head I/O number.
(6) In the Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU, automatic refresh is performed for stations No.1 to
32 only.
Because automatic refresh is not performed for station No. 33 or higher, use
FROM/TO instructions to read/write data.
(2) Execution conditions

(a) When the parameters are not set, the automatic CC-Link startup function is
applicable only to one "QJ61BT11N". Even when more than one
QJ61BT11N is mounted on the base unit, the automatic CC-Link startup
function is applicable only to the first one. It is applied to the QJ61BT11N
that has the smallest start I/O number, as seen from the PLC CPU side.
(b) When performing an automatic CC-Link startup without setting the

parameters, up to three MELSECNET/H modules can be used on the
master station CPU.
4 - 53 4 - 53
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.4.4 Communicating with intelligent device stations (Remote net mode)
The remote net mode allows communication with all stations (remote I/O stations,
remote device stations, local stations, intelligent device stations, and standby master
stations). Furthermore, it allows not only cyclic transfer, but also transient transmission,
which transfers data at an arbitrary timing, to intelligent and local stations.
[Setting method]
Set the remote net mode in "Mode" of the network parameters using the
GX Developer. For more details on the setting, see Sections 6.3 to 6.5.
4.4.5 Speeding up the response from remote I/O stations (Remote I/O net mode)
The remote I/O net mode can be used for a system consisting of only the master
station and remote I/O stations. The remote I/O net mode allows cyclic transmission at
high speed, thus shortening the link scan time.
The table below lists the link scan times for both the remote I/O net mode and the
remote net mode.
Table 4.7
Number of stations Remote I/O net mode Remote net mode
8 0.61 ms 1.2 ms
16 0.94 ms 1.6 ms
32 1.61 ms 2.3 ms
64 2.94 ms 3.8 ms
(Transmission rate: at 10 Mbps)
[Setting method]
Set the remote I/O net mode in "Mode" of the network parameters
using GX Developer. For more details on the setting, see Section 6.6.
4 - 54 4 - 54
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.4.6 Creating a program that contains modules to be added in the future (Reserved station
function)
This function prevents remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations, and a
standby master station that are not actually connected (but to be connected in the
future) from being treated as "data link faulty stations" by the master station and local
stations.
When the master station is placed in the remote net ver.2 mode, points for reserved
stations can be set to 0.
Use GX Developer to set 0 points for reserved stations.
Although dedicated instructions are not usable for this setting, if reading from or writing
to reserved stations is disabled when refreshing cyclic data with FROM/TO
instructions, the same result is obtained.
Station that will be connected in the future
(Reserved station)
Station number 4
Local station
Master (occupies (Reserved station)
station 4 stations)
Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 8 Station number 10
Remote station Remote station Remote station Remote station
(occupies 2 stations) (occupies 1 station) (occupies 2 stations) (occupies 1 station)
POINT
If a connected remote station, local station, intelligent device station, or standby
master station is specified as a reserved station, data link with the specified station
becomes disabled.
[Setting method]
Set the reserved function in "Station information setting" of the network
parameters using the GX Developer.
Make reserved station setting by choosing "Station information setting" -
"Reserve/invalid station select".
Make 0 points setting for the reserved station by choosing "Station
information setting" - "Remote station points".
4 - 55 4 - 55
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.4.7 Powering off a station in operation without error detection (Error invalid station setting
function)
This function prevents remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations, and a
standby master station that are powered off in the system configuration from being
treated as "data link faulty stations" by the master station and local stations, using the
network parameter settings.
Note that if a station is set as an error invalid station, problems occurring in that station
can no longer be detected. In addition, the error invalid station settings cannot be
changed while online because they are set with the network parameters.
Stations set as error invalid stations
Master Local station Local station

(occupies (occupies
station 1 station) 4 stations)
The station does not become data link faulty.


Master (occupies (occupies
station 1 station) 4 stations)
POINT
(1) If a remote station, a local station, an intelligent device station or the standby
master station that is set as an error invalid station is "specified as a reserved
station," the reserved station function overrides the error invalid station setting
function.
(2) If errors are generated at all the stations when they are set as error-invalid
stations, the "ERR." LED will light.
[Setting method]
Set the error invalid station setting function in "Station information setting"
of the network parameters using the GX Developer. For more details on the
setting, see Sections 6.3 to 6.6.
4 - 56 4 - 56
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.4.8 Synchronizing the link scan with the sequence scan (Scan synchronous function)
This function selects whether or not the link scan should be synchronized with the
sequence scan.
(1) Synchronous mode

Performs data linking using the scan that is synchronized with the sequence
program.
(The sequence scan and link scan start at the same time.)
In the synchronous mode, the link scan interval becomes longer when the
sequence scan takes long because the link scan is synchronized with the
sequence scan.
IMPORTANT
While in the synchronous mode, the sequence scan time must not exceed the time
specified for the corresponding transmission rate, as listed below. If the scan time
exceeds the specified time, a time out error occurs at each station.
Transmission rate Sequence scan time
10 Mbps 50 ms
5 Mbps 50 ms
2.5 Mbps 100 ms
625 Mbps 400 ms
156 Mbps 800 ms
POINT
(1) The asynchronous mode is recommended for a mixed system of local stations
A(1S)J61BT11 and A(1S)J61QBT11 when the QJ61BT11N is used as the
master station. When using the synchronous mode, make sure to observe the
restrictions in (2) and (3) below.
(2) When using a system consisting of the QJ61BT11N as the master station in
the synchronous mode and both the A(1S)J61BT11 and A(1S)J61QBT11 as
local stations, set the sequence scan time of the local station CPU to be
shorter than ST. For more details on "ST," see Section 5.1.
(3) When using a system consisting of the QJ61BT11N as the master station in
the synchronous mode and both the A(1S)J61BT11 and A(1S)J61QBT11 as
local stations, use XnC as an interlock of the FROM/TO instructions on the
local station CPU side.
(4) When operating in the synchronous mode, the "L RUN" LED may be lit dimly.
(2) Asynchronous mode

Performs data linking without synchronizing with the sequence program.
(3) Setting method

Set the scan synchronous function in "Scan mode setting" of the network
parameters using the GX Developer. For more details on the setting, see
Sections 6.3 to 6.6.
4 - 57 4 - 57
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(4) Data flows in synchronous and asynchronous modes

The data flows in both the synchronous and asynchronous modes are explained
using examples of communications between the master station and remote I/O
stations.
(a) Data flow in the asynchronous mode
PLC CPU
(Sequence scan)
Master station buffer memory

(Remote input RX)
Link scan
Response time of the first station
Response time of the corresponding station
Response time of the final station
Responses from remote

I/O stations
Input 1) Input 2) Input 3)
I II III IV
Transmission delay time
I: Delay time due to response delay of remote I/O station

II: Delay time of transmission from the remote I/O station to the master
station
III: Delay time from reception by the master station to storage in the buffer
memory
IV: Delay time until the master station's information is refreshed in the PLC
CPU
4 - 58 4 - 58
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(b) Data flow in the synchronous mode
1) Sequence scan > Link scan
PLC CPU
(Sequence scan)

(Remote input RX)
Link scan

I/O stations
Input 1) Input 2)
I II III IV

station
memory
CPU
4 - 59 4 - 59
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
2) Sequence scan < Link scan
PLC CPU
(Sequence scan)

(Remote input RX)
Link scan

I/O stations
Input 1) Input 2)
I II III IV

station
memory
CPU
4 - 60 4 - 60
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.4.9 Replacing modules without error detection (Temporary error invalid station setting
function)
This function prevents remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations, and
the standby master station that are specified with the GX Developer from being treated
as "data link faulty stations" while online. It allows the replacement of modules while
online without error detection.
(1) Input/output status at temporary error invalid station setting

All the cyclic transmission data of the stations set as temporary error-invalid
stations is refreshed. However, when a station set as a temporary error-invalid
station becomes faulty, the input is retained and the output switches off.
(2) Setting method

Set the "Diagnostics" - "CC-Link / CC-Link/LT Diagnostics" - "Monitoring other
station ..." - "Invalid station if temporary error" using the GX Developer. Place the
cursor at the station to be set as a temporary error invalid station and click
"Setting/Cancel".
4 - 61 4 - 61
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.4.10 Checking operations for each local station (Data link stop/restart)
This function stops and restarts local data links. If the data link of the master station is
stopped, the data link of the entire system stops.
[Setting method]
Set the "CC-Link / CC-Link/LT Diagnostics" in "Diagnostics" using the GX
Developer.
(a) Specifying applicable module

Specify the module whose data link is stopped or restarted in "Module
setting".
Specification method: Module No.
I/O Address
(b) Execution of data link stop/restart

Perform these operations by setting "Start Data Link" or "Stop Data Link" in
the network test.
4 - 62 4 - 62
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.4.11 Station number overlap checking function
This function investigates the status of connected stations and checks for the
overlapping numbers of number of occupied stations and whether or not more than
one station whose station number setting is 0 exists in the system.
(1) Number of occupied station number overlap checking

Checks whether or not occupied station numbers duplicate.
(Example)
Local station (station number 1, Station Station Station Station
number of occupied stations: 4) number 1 number 2 number 3 number 4
Duplicate
Station Station
(station number 4, number of occupied stations: 2)
number 4 number 5
1) When there is an duplicate, the "ERR." LED flashes, and the duplicate status
is stored in SW0098 to SW009B (Station number overlap status).
2) Even if an overlap exists, the data link continues with the remaining normally
functioning stations.
3) By correcting the switch setting to normal and resetting the PLC CPU of the
master station, the "ERR." LED is turned off and the data in SW0098 to
SW009B can be cleared.
However, if the starting station number overlaps, it is excluded from the overlap
checking.
(Example)
Local station (station
Station Station Station Station Station Station
number 1, number of
number 1 number 2 number 3 number 4 number 5 number 6
occupied stations: 4)
Duplicate

Station Station
(station number 1, number
number 1 number 2
of occupied stations: 2)
Check the other station data link status (SW0080 to SW0083) for a data link
error. The station number setting of the station where a data link error has
occurred may be wrong.
(2) Station number 0 station overlap checking

Checks whether or not more than one station whose station number setting is 0
exists in the system.
1) When duplicating, the "ERR." LED lights up, an error code is stored in
SW006A (switch setting status), and SB006A (switch setting status) turns on.
2) By correcting the switch setting to normal and restarting the data link, the
"ERR." LED is turned off and the data in SW006A can be cleared.
4 - 63 4 - 63
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.4.12 Multiple PLC system support
This function allows monitoring and reading/writing programs from/to any CPU in a
multiple PLC system mounted with the QJ61BT11N via AJ65BT-G4-S3 or other station
CPUs.
This is illustrated by the following example.
It is possible to monitor CPU4 of the local station from peripheral device A connected
to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 and read the programs of CPU2 of the master station from
peripheral device B connected to CPU3 of the local station.
This function cannot be used with function version A.
Master station
Power CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 CPU4 QJ61

I/O I/O I/O
supply BT11N
Terminal
Peripheral
resistor
AJ65BT-G4-S3 device A
Reading of
programs
Monitoring
Local station
Power CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 CPU4 QJ61

I/O I/O I/O
supply BT11N
Terminal
resistor
Peripheral
device B
POINT
Access source CPUs must be control PLCs in order to make an access.
4 - 64 4 - 64
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.4.13 Reducing the reserved points of the remote I/O stations (Remote I/O station points
setting)
The points of each remote I/O station can be set to 8, 16 or 32 points.

This saves the refresh device points of the PLC CPU.
The remote I/O station points setting can be used in the remote net ver. 2 mode only.
For parameter setting, use GX Developer of version 8.03D or later.
This function cannot be executed if the dedicated instruction is used for parameter
setting. This function can be executed when read/write from/to the CPU devices is
performed according to the I/O points of each station at cyclic data refresh using the
FROM/TO instruction.
(Station number 1: (Station number 2: (Station number 3: (Station number 4:
PLC CPU Master station Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station)
Remote output RY
Station Station Y07 to Y00
number 2 number 1
Station number 3
Y
Station Y07 to Y00
number 4
Y0F to Y00
to
Y0F to Y00
Y1F to Y10
8-point output module 8-point output module 16-point output module 32-point output module
Device area when remote I/O points setting is made
Device area when remote I/O points setting is not made
POINT
Set points to even-numbered 8-point setting remote I/O stations consecutively. If
points are set to odd-numbered 8-point setting remote stations, select 8 points + 8
points reserved in the "remote station points" setting of the last of the consecutive
remote I/O stations.
Master station Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station)
Remote output RY
number 2 number 1
Station
reserved number 3
Station Y07 to Y00
number 4
8points+8points Y07 to Y00

(reserved)
Y0F to Y00
to
Y1F to Y10
Odd-numbered 8-point setting remote stations cannot be set for 8 remote station
points.
Master station Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station)
Remote output RY
number 2 number 1
Station
number 3
Station number 4 Y07 to Y00
Y07 to Y00
Cannot be set.
to Y0F to Y00
Y1F to Y10
Refer to Section 6.2 for parameter setting.
4 - 65 4 - 65
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
[Setting method]
Using GX Developer, make setting by choosing "Station information
setting" - "Remote station points" in the network parameter dialog box.
(1) Precautions for setting the remote I/O station points

The number of parameter-set remote I/O station points should be equal to or
greater than the number of I/O points of the mounted remote I/O stations. If it is
less than the number of I/O points of the mounted remote I/O stations, the
inputs/outputs after the set number of points will not operate normally.
4 - 66 4 - 66
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.4.14 Increasing the number of cyclic points (Remote net ver.2 mode)
This function increases the number of cyclic points.

When increasing the number of cyclic points, select one from the following two modes.
Remote net ver.2 mode .............. Mode suitable for configuring a new system
Remote net additional mode....... Mode suitable for adding a ver. 2 compatible
slave station to the existing ver. 1 system
In the remote net ver. 1 mode, the number of cyclic points cannot be increased.
When using GX Developer for setting, use Version 8.03D or later.
The number of cyclic points per module can be increased as indicated in the following
table.
Table 4.8
Expanded cyclic setting
single double quadruple octuple
Remote I/O (RX, RY) 32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points
Occupies 1 station
Remote register (RWw , RWr) 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points
Occupies 2 stations
Occupies 3 stations
Occupies 4 stations
4 - 67 4 - 67
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(1) Remote net ver.2 mode

This mode is designed to configure a new system.
The number of cyclic points can be increased as indicated below.
Per station, RX/RY can be increased to up to 128 points and RWw/RWr to up to
32 points.
Per CC-Link network, RX/RY can be increased to up to 8192 points and
RWw/RWr to up to 2048 points.
Remote device station Local station Remote device station

Remote I/O station Ver. 2 compatible Ver.2 mode Ver. 2 compatible
Master station (Station number 1: (Station number 2: (Station number 3: (Station number 7:
Ver.2 mode Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 4 stations) Occupies 1 station)
Remote input RX
Ver. 2 Station number 1 Output Station number 1
compatible
remote Station number 2 Remote output RY Station number 2
output RY
Station number 7 Station number 7 Remote output RY
to to
quadruple double octuple
POINT
(1) In the remote net ver. 2 mode, the remote registers of the remote I/O station are
set to 0 points.
(2) When the ver. 2 compatible slave station is added or deleted, the refresh
devices of the PLC CPU will vary by the number of points set to the added or
deleted slave station in the slave stations of the station numbers after the added
or deleted slave station. Confirm the varying number of points in Table 4.8.
[Setting method]
Using GX Developer, set the network parameters.
4 - 68 4 - 68
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(2) Remote net additional mode

This mode is designed for use when slave stations including a ver. 2 compatible
station is added to the existing ver. 1 system.
The program of the existing system can be used as is.
Remote device station Local station Remote device station

Remote I/O station Ver. 1 compatible additional mode Ver. 2 compatible
additional mode Occupies 1 station) Occupies 2 stations) Occupies 4 stations) Occupies 1 station)
Remote input RX
Ver. 1 Station number 1 Output Station number 1
compatible Station number 2 Station number 2
remote Station number 3 Remote output RY
Station number 3
output RY
to to
Ver. 2
compatible
remote
output RY
to to
double octuple
POINT
(1) Set the station numbers of the slave stations to be added after the last station
number used in the existing system.
In the above example, the slave stations are added to and after station No. 4
since the existing system uses up to station No. 3.
(2) When the ver. 2 compatible slave station is added or deleted, the refresh
devices of the PLC CPU will vary by the number of points set to the added or
deleted slave station in the slave stations of the station numbers after the added
or deleted slave station. Confirm the varying number of points in Table 4.8.
(3) In the remote net additional mode, the ver. 2 compatible slave station must be
placed in the latter half as described in (1).
When there is a possibility that ver. 1 compatible slave stations will be added in
the future in the remote net additional mode, set multiple reserved stations after
the ver. 1 compatible slave station to ensure ease of expanding the system.
(4) For the system that includes a standby master station, it is recommended to
change for the remote net ver. 2 mode.
When the remote net additional mode is used, the sequence program for the
standby master station must be corrected.
[Setting method]
Using GX Developer, set the network parameters.
4 - 69 4 - 69
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(3) Precautions for cyclic points increase setting

(a) Whether system can be configured or not
The following table indicates whether cyclic transmission can be made or not
in each station.
QJ61BT11 3
Slave station
AJ61BT11,
A1SJ61BT11,
QJ61BT11N AJ61QBT11, Remote station
A1SJ61QBT11, Intelligent device station
A80BD-J61BT11,
A80BD-J61BT13
Standby
Local Remote I/O
Local station Standby master station master Remote device station
Ver.2 Additional Ver.1 Ver.2 Additional Ver.1 Ver.1 Ver.1 Ver.2 Ver.1 Ver.2 Ver.1 Ver.1
Master station
mode mode mode mode mode mode mode mode compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible
1 1
Ver.2 mode
QJ61BT11N
2 1 1
Additional mode
Ver.1 mode
3
QJ61BT11
Ver.1 mode
: Cyclic transmission enabled, : Cyclic transmission enabled on condition, : Cyclic transmission disabled
1 When the master station is the QJ61BT11N in remote net Ver.2 mode or remote
net additional mode, and when the local station is the QJ61BT 11N in remote net
Ver.1 mode or the QJ61BT11, the local station can communicate with the master
station. However, Ver.2 compatible stations are recognized as faulty so that data
of these stations cannot be confirmed.
Local station Local station Remote device station Remote device station
Ver. 2 mode Ver. 1 mode Ver. 2 compatible Ver. 1 compatible
Ver. 2 mode Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station)
Remote input RX All 0s
Station number 1
Station number 2
Station number 3
Station number 4 Remote output RY
Ver. 2 compatible Ver. 2 compatible
remote output RY remote input RX
to to
double quadruple
4 - 70 4 - 70
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
2 When the master station is in the remote net additional mode of the QJ61BT11N
and the local station is in the remote net ver. 2 mode of the QJ61BT11N, a link is
performed as shown in the following areas.
Local station Local station Local station Standby master station

Ver. 1 mode Ver. 2 mode additional mode additional mode
additional mode Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 4 stations) Occupies 1 station)
Remote input RX
Ver. 1 Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 1
compatible Station number 2
remote
Station number 3
output RY
Station number 4
to Station number 5 to to
Station number 6
Station number 7
to
Ver. 2 Station number 1

compatible Station number 2 Station number 2 Station number 2 Station number 2
remote
output RY Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 3

to to to to
double double octuple
3 The remote net ver. 2 mode and remote net additional mode cannot be used with
the QJ61BT11.
4 Data link is not available when the version set in the station type of the master
station information is different from that of the remote station.
For example, when the station type of the master station information is set as
"Ver.1 remote device station" although the actual remote device station is set to
"Ver.2 remote device station", data link cannot be performed with the "ERR." LED
on the master station flashing and the "L RUN" LED on the remote device station
turned OFF.
4 - 71 4 - 71
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(b) Whether send/receive is enabled or not

The following table indicates whether send/receive of cyclic data is enabled
or not.
Receive station QJ61BT11N

Master station
Ver.2 mode Additional mode Ver.1 mode
Ver. 2 Ver. 1 Ver. 2 Ver. 1 Ver. 2 Ver. 1
compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible
Send station area area area area area area
Ver.2 Ver. 2 compatible area — — — — — —
mode Ver. 1 compatible area — — — — — —
Master Additional Ver. 2 compatible area — — — — — —
station mode Ver. 1 compatible area — — — — — —
QJ61BT11N
Ver.2 Ver. 2 compatible area — —
Local Additional Ver. 2 compatible area — — — —
station mode Ver. 1 compatible area — — — — — —
mode Ver. 1 compatible area — —
Master
Ver.1 compatible — — — — — —
station
QJ61BT11
Local
Ver.1 compatible — —
station
Remote I/O station Ver.1 compatible — —
4 - 72 4 - 72
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11 Remote

Intelligent device Remote device
Master Local I/O
Local station station station
Ver.2 mode Additional mode Ver1 mode
Ver. 2 Ver. 1 Ver. 2 Ver. 1 Ver. 2 Ver. 1 Ver.1 Ver.1 Ver.2 Ver.1 Ver.2 Ver.1 Ver.1
compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible
area area area area area area
— — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — —
— — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
— — —
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
: Cyclic transmission enabled, : Cyclic transmission disabled, —:Prohibited
4 - 73 4 - 73
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
(4) Mismatch in number of points between parameter-set expanded

cyclic setting and installation status
If there is a mismatch in the number of points between the parameter-set
expanded cyclic setting and installation status, the QJ61T11N stores the error
code into SW0069. Also, it stores the matching status of each station into
SW009C.
(5) Precautions for modes between the master and local/standby

master stations
At any of the following settings, an error (error code: B3A0) will occur at the local
station/standby master station.
If the error has occurred, correct the mode in the parameter of the master
station/local station/standby master station, and reset the PLC CPU.
The mode set at the master station differs from the mode set at the standby
master station.
When the master station is set to the remote net ver. 1 mode, the local station is
set to the remote net ver. 2 mode or remote net additional mode.
When the master station is set to the remote net ver. 2 mode, the local station is
set to remote net additional mode.
(6) Automatic refresh setting

(a) By specifying refresh devices, automatic refresh is performed in the END
processing of the PLC CPU.
The automatic refresh covers the areas from station No.1 to the station No.
set with the network parameter (including occupied stations).
(b) When the remote net additional mode is selected, data of station No.1 to
the last Ver.1 compatible station (including occupied stations) and data of
Ver.2 compatible stations from its first station No. (the last Ver.1 compatible
station No. +1) to the last station No. are automatically refreshed to devices
specified in the first and last halves respectively.
(c) In the Ver.2 compatible remote register, data in the area up to the last
remote device or intelligent device station No. are refreshed.
(Example) In the case where the remote net additional mode, Ver.1
compatible station: No. 1 to 8, Ver.2 compatible station: No. 9 to
16 (occupying 1 station, quadruple setting), refresh devices
(first half): Y1000, and refresh devices (last half): Y1100 are set
Master station
remote output
160H Station No.1
PLC CPU
Y0000
16FH Station No.8
Y1000
Y10FF
Y1100
Master station
Ver.2 compatible remote output
Y12FF 4200H
4210H Station No.9
421FH Station No.16
4 - 74 4 - 74
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q
4.5 Transient Transmission Functions
This section explains the transient transmission functions.
4.5.1 Performing transient transmission (Dedicated instructions)
The following dedicated instructions can be used for transient transmission.
Applicable Reference
Instruction Description
station section
Reads data from the buffer memory of a specified station Appendix
RIRD
Master station or a PLC CPU device of a specified station. 2.1
Local station Writes data to the buffer memory of a specified station or Appendix
RIWT
a PLC CPU device of a specified station. 2.2
Appendix
RIRD Reads data from the buffer memory of a specified station.
2.1
Appendix
RIWT Writes data to the buffer memory of a specified station.
2.2
Automatically performs a handshake with the specified
station and reads data from that station's buffer memory. Appendix
RIRCV
Available for modules that have handshake signals (e.g. 2.3
AJ65BT-R2).
Automatically performs a handshake with the specified
Intelligent device station and writes data to that station's buffer memory. Appendix
RISEND
station Available for modules that have handshake signals (e.g. 2.4
AJ65BT-R2).
Reads data from the automatic update buffer of a
specified station. Appendix
RIFR
Available for modules that have the automatic update 2.5
buffer (e.g. AJ65BT-R2).
Writes data to the automatic update buffer of a specified
station. Appendix
RITO
Available for modules that have the automatic update 2.6
buffer (e.g. AJ65BT-R2).
4 - 75 4 - 75
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q
This chapter explains the data link processing time such as the link scan time and
transmission delay time.
5.1 Link Scan Time
This section explains the CC-Link scan time. The following describes the method for
calculating the normal value and maximum value for the remote net mode or remote
I/O net mode.
[Link scan time (LS)]

(1) For remote net mode
LS = BT {27 + (NI 4.8) + (NW 9.6) + (N 30) + (ni 4.8) + (nw 9.6)} +
ST + EX + F + TR (µ s)
BT: Constant (transmission rate)
Transmission rate 156 kbps 625 kbps 2.5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps
BT 51.2 12.8 3.2 1.6 0.8
5 NI: The final station number in a, b and c
(It includes the number of dedicated stations but excludes the
reserved stations, and must be a multiple of 8.)
a: Total number of occupied stations for remote I/O stations
b: Total number of occupied stations for remote device stations
c: Total number of occupied stations for local stations, standby
master station and intelligent device stations
NW: The final station number in b and c
(Includes the number of dedicated stations but excludes the reserved
stations, and must be a multiple of 8.)
Final station number 1 to 8 9 to 16 17 to 24 25 to 32 33 to 40 41 to 48 49 to 56 57 to 64
NI, NW 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64
N: Number of connected stations (excluding reserved stations)
ni: a + b + c (excluding reserved stations)
nw: b + c (excluding reserved stations)
ST: Constant
A: Last station number of remote I/O stations
B: Last station number of remote device stations (including the
number of occupied stations)
C: Last station number of local, standby master and intelligent device
stations (including the number of occupied stations)
(The largest value found in 1) to 3) below. However, 2) is
disregarded when B = 0 and 3) is disregarded when C = 0)
1) 800 + (A 15)
2) 900 + (B 50)
3) For C ≤ 26 : 1200 + (C 100)
For C > 26 : 3700 + {(C - 26) 25}
5-1 5-1
MELSEC-Q
EX: Constant (only when remote net ver. 2 mode or remote net additional
mode is used)
50 + total in the following table
Number of occupied
Occupies Occupies Occupies Occupies
stations
1 station 2 stations 3 stations 4 stations
single 0 0 0 0
70 Number of 80 Number of 90 Number of 100 Number
double
stations stations stations of stations
90 Number of 110 Number 130 Number 150 Number
quadruple
stations of stations of stations of stations
110 Number 160 Number 210 Number 260 Number
octuple
of stations of stations of stations of stations
F: Return processing time {only when there is a faulty station (including

error invalid and temporary error invalid stations)}
Number of faulty stations 118 BT (1 + number of retries)
TR: Transient processing time (only when a transient request is made) 5

When there is a transient request from the master station
180 BT
When there is a transient request from the local station
40.8 BT number of transient transmission stations
(Example) Using the following system configuration when the transmission rate is
10 Mbps (assuming that there is no faulty station or transient
transmission.)
Station
number 8 3
Station Station Station Station
number 1 1 number 2 2 number 4 3 number 12 1
Master Local
station Remote Remote Intelligent station Remote
I/O station device station device station I/O station
1: (occupies 1 station) 2: (occupies 2 stations) 3: (occupies 4 stations)

quadruple single
BT = 0.8 ST = 2300 EX = 50 + 110 1 = 160

NI = 12 16 1) 800 + (12 15) = 980
NW = 11 16 2) 900 + (3 50) = 1050
N=5 3) 1200 + (11 100) = 2300
ni = 12 A = 12, B = 3, C = 11
nw = 10
LS = 0.8 {27 + (16 4.8) + (16 9.6) + (5 30) + (12 4.8) + (10 9.6)} +
2300 + 160
= 2908.8 [µ s]
= 2.91 [ms]
5-2 5-2
MELSEC-Q
(2) For remote I/O net mode

LS = BT {27 + (NI 4.8) + (N 30) + (ni 4.8)} + ST + F [µ s]
BT: Constant (transmission rate)
BT 51.2 12.8 3.2 1.6 0.8
NI: NI: Final station number (must be a multiple of 8)
Final station number 1 to 8 9 to 16 17 to 24 25 to 32 33 to 40 41 to 48 49 to 56 57 to 64
NI 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64
N: Number of connected modules
ni: Total number of occupied stations
ST: Constant
250 + (ni 10)
F: Return processing time {only when there is a faulty station (including
error invalid and temporary error invalid stations)}
Number of faulty stations 118 BT (1 + number of retries)
(Example) Using the following system configuration when the transmission rate is
10 Mbps (assuming that there is no faulty station)
Station Station Station

number 1 1 number 2 1 number 3 1
Master
station Remote Remote Remote
I/O station I/O station I/O station
1: (occupies 1 station)
BT = 0.8 ST = 200 + (ni 10)

NI = 3 8 = 200 + (3 10)
N =3 = 230
ni = 3
LS = 0.8 {27 + (8 4.8) + (3 30) + (3 4.8)} + 230
= 365.84 [µ s]
= 0.37 [ms]
5-3 5-3
MELSEC-Q
5.2 Transmission Delay Time
This section explains the transmission delay time (the time until data is transmitted).
5.2.1 Master station remote I/O station
(1) Master station (RX) remote I/O station (input)

This indicates the time from the moment the signal is input to the remote I/O
station until the CPU device turns ON (OFF).
[Expression]
[Normal value]
(a) Asynchronous mode
SM + LS 1 + Remote I/O station response time [ms]
SM: Master station sequence program scan time
LS : Link scan time (see Section 5.1)
(Example) When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms, the link
scan time is 3 ms and the remote I/O station response time is 1.5 ms.
= 20 + 3 1 + 1.5
= 24.5 [ms]
(b) Synchronous mode

(SM n) 1 + Remote I/O station response time [ms]
LS: Link scan time (see Section 5.1)
n: (LS/SM) value when fractions following the decimal point are
rounded up to the next whole number.
= (20 1) 1 + 1.5
= 21.5 [ms]
[Maximum value]
SM + LS × 2 + Remote I/O station response time [ms]
= 20 + 3 2 + 1.5
= 27.5 [ms]
5-4 5-4
MELSEC-Q

n: (LS/SM) value when fractions following the decimal point are
rounded up to the next whole number
= (20 1) 2 + 1.5
= 41.5 [ms]
(2) Master station (RY) remote I/O station (output)

This indicates the time from the moment the CPU device turns ON (OFF) until
the remote I/O station output turns ON (OFF).
[Expression]
[Normal value]
= 20 + 3 1 + 1.5
= 24.5 [ms]

SM n + LS 2 + Remote I/O station response time [ms]
n: (LS/SM)value when fractions following the decimal point are
SM n + LS + Remote I/O station response time [ms]
= 20 1 + 3 + 1.5
= 24.5 [ms]
5-5 5-5
MELSEC-Q
[Maximum value]
= 20 + 3 2 + 1.5
= 27.5 [ms]

= 20 1 + 3 2 + 1.5
= 27.5 [ms]
5-6 5-6
MELSEC-Q
5.2.2 Master station remote device station (Ver. 1 compatible slave station)
(1) Master station (RX) remote device station (RX)

This indicates the time from the moment the signal is input to the remote device
[Expression]
[Normal value]
SM + LS 1 + Remote device station processing time [ms]
(Example) When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms, the link scan
time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1.5 ms.
= 20 + 3 1 + 1.5
= 24.5 [ms]

(SM n) 1 + Remote device station processing time [ms]
5-7 5-7
MELSEC-Q
= (20 1) 1 + 1.5
= 21.5 [ms]
[Maximum value]
SM + LS 2 + Remote device station response time [ms]
= 20 + 3 2 + 1.5
= 27.5 [ms]

= (20 1) 2 + 1.5
= 41.5 [ms]
(2) Master station (RY) remote device station (RY)

the remote device station output turns ON (OFF).
[Expression]
[Normal value]
= 20 + 3 1 + 1.5
= 24.5 [ms]
5-8 5-8
MELSEC-Q

SM n + LS + Remote device station processing time [ms]
= 20 1 + 3 + 1.5
= 24.5 [ms]
[Maximum value]
= 20 + 3 2 + 1.5
= 27.5 [ms]

SM n + LS 2 + Remote device station processing time [ms]
= 20 1 + 3 2 + 1.5
= 27.5 [ms]
5-9 5-9
MELSEC-Q
(3) Master station (RWr) remote device station (RWr)

station until the data for the CPU device is changed.
[Expression]
[Normal value]
= 20 + 3 1 + 1.5
= 24.5 [ms]
= (20 1) 1 + 1.5
= 21.5 [ms]
[Maximum value]
= 20 + 3 2 + 1.5
= 27.5 [ms]
= (20 1) 2 + 1.5
= 41.5 [ms]
5 - 10 5 - 10
MELSEC-Q
(4) Master station (RWw) remote device station (RWw)

This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the CPU device until the
data for the remote device station is changed.
[Expression]
[Normal value]
= 20 + 3 1 + 1.5
= 24.5 [ms]
= 20 1 + 3 + 1.5
= 24.5 [ms]
[Maximum value]
= 20 + 3 2 + 1.5
= 27.5 [ms]
= 20 1 + 3 2 + 1.5
= 27.5 [ms]
5 - 11 5 - 11
MELSEC-Q
5.2.3 Master station remote device station (Ver. 2 compatible slave station)
(1) Master station (RX) remote device station (RX)

[Expression]
[Normal value]
SM + LS 1 m + Remote device station processing time [ms]
m: Constant (expanded cyclic setting)
Expanded cyclic setting single double quadruple octuple
m 1 3 7 15
time is 3 ms, the expanded cyclic setting is "double", and the remote device
station processing time is 1.5 ms.
= 20 + 3 1 3 + 1.5
= 30.5 [ms]

n: (LS m/SM)value when fractions following the decimal point are
m 1 3 7 15
= (20 1) 1 + 1.5
= 21.5 [ms]
5 - 12 5 - 12
MELSEC-Q
[Maximum value]
m 1 3 7 15
SM + LS 2 m + Remote device station response time [ms]
= 20 + 3 2 3 + 1.5
= 39.5 [ms]

m 1 3 7 15
= (20 1) 2 + 1.5
= 41.5 [ms]
5 - 13 5 - 13
MELSEC-Q
(2) Master station (RY) remote device station (RY)

the remote device station output turns ON (OFF).
[Expression]
[Normal value]
SM + LS (1 m + 1) + Remote device station processing time [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
= 20 + 3 (1 3 + 1) + 1.5
= 33.5 [ms]

SM n + LS m + Remote device station processing time [ms]
n: (LS m /SM)value when fractions following the decimal point are
m 1 3 7 15
= 20 1 + 3 3 + 1.5
= 30.5 [ms]
5 - 14 5 - 14
MELSEC-Q
[Maximum value]
m 1 3 7 15
= 20 + 3 (2 3 + 1) + 1.5
= 42.5 [ms]

m 1 3 7 15
= 20 1 + 3 3 + 1.5
= 30.5 [ms]
5 - 15 5 - 15
MELSEC-Q
(3) Master station (RWr) remote device station (RWr)

station until the data for the CPU device is changed.
[Expression]
[Normal value]
m 1 3 7 15
= 20 + 3 1 3 + 1.5
= 30.5 [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
= (20 1) 1 + 1.5
= 21.5 [ms]
5 - 16 5 - 16
MELSEC-Q
[Maximum value]
m 1 3 7 15
= 20 + 3 2 3 + 1.5
= 39.5 [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
= (20 1) 2 + 1.5
= 41.5 [ms]
5 - 17 5 - 17
MELSEC-Q
(4) Master station (RWw) remote device station (RWw)

This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the CPU device until the
data for the remote device station is changed.
[Expression]
[Normal value]
m 1 3 7 15
= 20 + 3 (1 3 + 1) + 1.5
= 33.5 [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
= 20 1 + 3 3 + 1.5
= 30.5 [ms]
5 - 18 5 - 18
MELSEC-Q
[Maximum value]
m 1 3 7 15
= 20 + 3 (2 3 + 1) + 1.5
= 42.5 [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
= 20 1 + 3 3 + 1.5
= 30.5 [ms]
5 - 19 5 - 19
MELSEC-Q
5.2.4 Master station local station (Ver. 1 compatible slave station)
(1) Master station (RX) local station (RY)

This indicates the time from the moment the local station CPU device turns ON
(OFF) until the master station CPU device turns ON (OFF).
[Expression]
[Normal value]
SM + LS 2 + SL [ms]
SL: Local station sequence program scan time
(Example) When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms, the link scan
time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms.
SM + LS 2 + SL [ms]
= 20 + 3 2 + 10
= 36 [ms]

(SM n) 2 + SL [ms]
(SM n) 2 + SL [ms]
= (20 1) 2 + 10
= 50 [ms]
[Maximum value]
SM + LS 3 + SL [ms]
SM + LS 3 + SL [ms]
= 20 + 3 3 + 10
= 39 [ms]
5 - 20 5 - 20
MELSEC-Q

(SM n) 3 + SL [ms]
(SM n) 3 + SL [ms]
= (20 1) 3 + 10
= 70 [ms]
(2) Master station (RY) local station (RX)

This indicates the time from the moment the master station CPU device turns ON
(OFF) until the local station CPU device turns ON (OFF).
[Expression]
[Normal value]
SM + LS 2 + SL [ms]
SM + LS 2 + SL [ms]
= 20 + 3 2 + 10
= 36 [ms]

SM n + LS 2 + SL [ms]
= 20 1 + 3 2 + 10
= 36 [ms]
5 - 21 5 - 21
MELSEC-Q
[Maximum value]
SM + LS 2 + SL [ms]
SM + LS 2 + SL [ms]
= 20 + 3 2 + 10
= 36 [ms]

= 20 1 + 3 2 + 10
= 36 [ms]
(3) Master station (RWr) local station (RWw)

This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the local station CPU
device until the data is stored in the master station CPU device.
[Expression]
[Normal value]
SM + LS 2 + SL [ms]
SM + LS 2 + SL [ms]
= 20 + 3 2 + 10
= 36 [ms]
5 - 22 5 - 22
MELSEC-Q

(SM n) 2 + SL [ms]
(SM n) 2 + SL [ms]
= (20 1) 2 + 10
= 50 [ms]
[Maximum value]
SM + LS 3 + SL [ms]
SM + LS 3 + SL [ms]
= 20 + 3 3 + 10
= 39 [ms]

(SM n) 3 + SL [ms]
(SM n) 3 + SL [ms]
= (20 1) 3 + 10
= 70 [ms]
5 - 23 5 - 23
MELSEC-Q
(4) Master station (RWw) → local station (RWr)

This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the master station CPU
device until the data is stored in the local station CPU device.
[Expression]
[Normal value]
SM + LS 2 + SL [ms]
SM + LS 2 + SL [ms]
= 20 + 3 2 + 10
= 36 [ms]

= 20 1 + 3 2 + 10
= 36 [ms]
[Maximum value]
SM + LS 2 + SL [ms]
SM + LS 2 + SL [ms]
= 20 + 3 2 + 10
= 36 [ms]
5 - 24 5 - 24
MELSEC-Q

= 20 1 + 3 2 + 10
= 36 [ms]
5 - 25 5 - 25
MELSEC-Q
5.2.5 Master station local station (Ver. 2 compatible slave station)
(1) Master station (RX) local station (RY)

This indicates the time from the moment the local station CPU device turns ON
(OFF) until the master station CPU device turns ON (OFF).
[Expression]
[Normal value]
SM + LS (1 m + 1) + SL [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
scan time is 3 ms, the expanded cyclic setting is "double", and the
sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms.
SM + LS (1 m + 1) + SL [ms]
= 20 + 3 (1 3 + 1) + 10
= 42 [ms]

(SM n) 1 + SL [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
(SM n) 1 + SL [ms]
= (20 1) 1 + 10
= 30 [ms]
5 - 26 5 - 26
MELSEC-Q
[Maximum value]
SM + LS (2 m + 1) + SL [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
SM + LS (2 m + 1) + SL [ms]
= 20 + 3 (2 3 + 1) + 10
= 51 [ms]

(SM n) 2 + SL [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
(SM n) 2 + SL [ms]
= (20 1) 2 + 10
= 50 [ms]
5 - 27 5 - 27
MELSEC-Q
(2) Master station (RY) local station (RX)

This indicates the time from the moment the master station CPU device turns ON
(OFF) until the local station CPU device turns ON (OFF).
[Expression]
[Normal value]
SM + LS (1 m + 1) + SL [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
SM + LS (1 m + 1) + SL [ms]
= 20 + 3 (1 3 + 1) + 10
= 42 [ms]

(SM n) 1 + SL [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
(SM n) 1 + SL [ms]
= (20 1) 1 + 10
= 30 [ms]
5 - 28 5 - 28
MELSEC-Q
[Maximum value]
SM + LS (2 m + 1) + SL [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
SM + LS (2 m + 1) + SL [ms]
= 20 + 3 (2 3 + 1) + 10
= 51 [ms]

(SM n) 2 + SL [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
(SM n) 2 + SL [ms]
= (20 1) 2 + 10
= 50 [ms]
5 - 29 5 - 29
MELSEC-Q
(3) Master station (RWr) local station (RWw)

This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the local station CPU
device until the data is stored in the master station CPU device.
[Expression]
[Normal value]
SM + LS (1 m + 1) + SL [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
SM + LS (1 m + 1) + SL [ms]
= 20 + 3 (1 3 + 1) + 10
= 42 [ms]

(SM n) 1 + SL [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
(SM n) 1 + SL [ms]
= (20 1) 1 + 10
= 30 [ms]
5 - 30 5 - 30
MELSEC-Q
[Maximum value]
SM + LS (2 m + 1) + SL [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
SM + LS (2 m + 1) + SL [ms]
= 20 + 3 (2 3 + 1) + 10
= 51 [ms]

(SM n) 2 + SL [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
(SM n) 2 + SL [ms]
= (20 1) 2 + 10
= 50 [ms]
5 - 31 5 - 31
MELSEC-Q
(4) Master station (RWw) → local station (RWr)

This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the master station CPU
device until the data is stored in the local station CPU device.
[Expression]
[Normal value]
SM + LS (1 m + 1) + SL [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
SM + LS (1 m + 1) + SL [ms]
= 20 + 3 (1 3 + 1) + 10
= 42 [ms]

(SM n) 1 + SL [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
(SM n) 1 + SL [ms]
= (20 1) 1 + 10
= 30 [ms]
5 - 32 5 - 32
MELSEC-Q
[Maximum value]
SM + LS (2 m + 1) + SL [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
SM + LS (2 m + 1) + SL [ms]
= 20 + 3 (2 3 + 1) + 10
= 51 [ms]

(SM n) 2 + SL [ms]
m 1 3 7 15
(SM n) 2 + SL [ms]
= (20 1) 2 + 10
= 50 [ms]
5 - 33 5 - 33
MELSEC-Q
5.2.6 Master station intelligent device station
The transmission delay time between the master station and an intelligent device
station varies by the type of intelligent device station used.
See the User's Manual for the intelligent device module to be used.
5 - 34 5 - 34
MELSEC-Q
5.3 Processing Time for Dedicated Instructions
This indicates the dedicated instruction processing time (the time from the moment an
instruction is issued until a response is received).
5.3.1 Master station local station
(1) Master station local station

This indicates the time from the moment an instruction is issued by the master
station until a response from the local station is received.
[Expression]
[Maximum value]
(a) RIRD instruction
OT + LS [BC + {(read points + 16)/16} 1 1.067] + SL [ms]
OT: QCPU (Q mode) dedicated instruction processing time
QnCPU : 1 [ms]
QnHCPU : 0.5 [ms]
BC: Constant
BC 6 7 9 11 12
(0 when reading buffer memory in the CC-Link)
1: Round up below the decimal point
(Example) When the PLC CPU type is Q06HCPU, the transmission rate is
10 Mbps, the link scan time is 5 ms and the read points are 20 words
(buffer memory in the CC-Link).
OT + LS [BC + {(read points + 16)/16} 1 1.067] [ms]
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {(20 + 16)/16} 1 1.067]
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {3 1.067}]
= 76.505
= 76.5 [ms]
(b) RIWT instruction
OT + LS [BC + {(write points + 16)/72} 1 1.13] + SL [ms]
QnCPU : 1 [ms]
QnHCPU : 0.5 [ms]
BC: Constant
BC 6 7 9 11 12
(0 when writing buffer memory in the CC-Link)
5 - 35 5 - 35
MELSEC-Q
10 Mbps, the link scan time is 5 ms and the write points are 20 words
OT + LS [BC + {(write points + 16)/72} 1 1.13] [ms]
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {(20 + 16)/72} 1 1.13]
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {1 1.13}]
= 66.15
= 66.2 [ms]
(2) Local station master station

This indicates the time from the moment an instruction is issued by the local
station until a response from the master station is received.
[Expression]
[Maximum value]
OT + LS [BC + {(read points + 16)/72} 1 1.13] + SM [ms]
QnCPU : 1 [ms]
QnHCPU : 0.5 [ms]
BC: Constant
BC 6 7 9 11 12
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {(20 + 16)/72} 1 1.13]
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {1 1.13}]
= 66.15
= 66.2 [ms]
OT + LS [BC + {(write points + 16)/16} 1 1.067] + SM [ms]
QnCPU : 1 [ms]
QnHCPU : 0.5 [ms]
BC: Constant
BC 6 7 9 11 12
5 - 36 5 - 36
MELSEC-Q
10 Mbps, the link scan time is 5ms and the write points are 20 words
(buffer memory in the CC-Lnik).
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {(20 + 16)/16} 1 1.067]
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {3 1.067}]
= 76.505
= 76.5 [ms]
5 - 37 5 - 37
MELSEC-Q
5.3.2 Local station local station
(1) Local station local station

This indicates the time from the moment an instruction is executed by one local
station until a response from another local station is received.
[Expression]
[Maximum value]
OT + LS [BC + {(read points + 16)/16} 1 1.067] + SL [ms]
QnCPU : 1 [ms]
QnHCPU : 0.5 [ms]
BC: Constant
BC 6 7 9 11 12
SL: Target station sequence program scan time
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {(20 + 16)/16} 1 1.067]
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {3 1.067}]
= 76.505
= 76.5 [ms]
OT + LS [BC + {(write points + 16)/16} 1 1.067] + SL [ms]
QnCPU : 1 [ms]
QnHCPU : 0.5 [ms]
BC: Constant
BC 6 7 9 11 12
SL: Target station sequence program scan time
10 Mbps, the link scan time is 5 ms and the write points are 20 words
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {(20 + 16)/16} 1 1.067]
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {3 1.067}]
= 76.505
= 76.5 [ms]
5 - 38 5 - 38
MELSEC-Q
5.3.3 Master station intelligent device station
(1) Master station intelligent device station

This indicates the time from the moment an instruction is issued by the master
station and a response from an intelligent device station is received.
[Expression]
[Maximum value]
1
OT + LS [BC + {(read points + 16)/16} 1.067] [ms]
QnCPU : 1 [ms]
QnHCPU : 0.5 [ms]
BC: Constant
BC 6 7 9 11 12
10 Mbps, the link scan time is 5 ms and the read points are 20 words.
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {(20 + 16)/16} 1 1.067]
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {3 1.067}]
= 76.505
= 76.5 [ms]

OT + LS × [BC + {(write points + 16)/72} 1 1.13] [ms]
QnCPU : 1 [ms]
QnHCPU : 0.5 [ms]
BC: Constant
BC 6 7 9 11 12
10 Mbps, the link scan time is 5 ms and the write points are 20 words.
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {(20 + 16)/72} 1 1.13]
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {1 1.13}]
= 66.15
= 66.2 [ms]
5 - 39 5 - 39
MELSEC-Q
5.4 Link Refresh Time
This section indicates link refresh time (increase of END processing time at the PLC
CPU).
5.4.1 Master station/local station
This section indicates the link refresh time of the master/local station.
(1) Remote net ver. 1 mode, remote net ver. 2 mode

[Expression]
RX + RY + SB
KM1 + KM2 ( + RWw + RWr + SW) + E [ms]
16
RX + RY + SB
E = KM3 ( + RWw + RWr + SW)
16
RX : Points of the remote input (RX) refreshed by the master/local station
RY : Points of the remote output (RY) refreshed by the master/local station
RWw : Points of the remote register (RWw) refreshed by the master/local
station
RWr : Points of the remote register (RWr) refreshed by the master/local station
SB : Points of the link special relay (SB) refreshed by the master/local station
SW : Points of the link special register (SW) refreshed by the master/local
station
αE : File register (R, ZR) transfer time on memory card (only when file
register is used)
KM1 : Constant
1) Master station
Constant
KM1
CPU type
Q00JCPU 0.83
Q00CPU 0.68
Q01CPU 0.66
Q02CPU 0.40
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q12PHCPU,
0.16
Q25PHCPU, Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU
2) Local station
Constant
KM1
CPU type
Q00JCPU 1.05
Q00CPU 0.86
Q01CPU 0.79
Q02CPU 0.63
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q12PHCPU,
0.23
Q25PHCPU, Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU
5 - 40 5 - 40
MELSEC-Q
KM2, KM3 : Constant

1) When QJ61BT11N is mounted on main base unit
Constant KM2 KM3
-3 -3
CPU type ( 10 ) ( 10 )
Q00JCPU 0.91 –
Q00CPU 0.83 –
Q01CPU 0.79 –
Q02CPU 0.48 0.32
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU,
0.43 0.14
Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU
2) When QJ61BT11N is mounted on extension base unit

Constant KM2 KM3
-3 -3
CPU type ( 10 ) ( 10 )
Q00JCPU 1.62 –
Q00CPU 1.57 –
Q01CPU 1.55 –
Q02CPU 1.02 0.08
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU,
0.98 0.06
Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU
(Example)
When the PLC CPU type is the Q06HCPU, the QJ61BT11N is mounted
on the main base and used as the master station, and 2048 points of
RX, 2048 points of RY, 256 points of RWw, 256 points of RWr, 512
points of SB and 512 points of SW are refreshed besides the file
register.
RX + RY + SB
KM1 + KM2 ( + RWw + RWr + SW)
16
2048 + 2048 + 512
= 0.16 + 0.00043 ( + 256 + 256 + 512)
16
= 0.16 + 0.00043 1312
= 0.72416
= 0.72 [ms]
5 - 41 5 - 41
MELSEC-Q
(2) Remote net additional mode

[Expression]
KM1 + KM2 (RX + RX2 + RY + RY2 + SB + RWw + RWw2 + RWr + RWr2 + SW) + E [ms]
16
E = KM3 ( RX + RX2 + RY + RY2 + SB + RWw + RWw2 + RWr + RWr2 + SW)

16
RX : Points of the remote input (RX) refreshed by the master/local station
RX2 : Points of the ver. 2 remote input (RX) refreshed by the master/local
station
RY : Points of the remote output (RY) refreshed by the master/local station
RY2 : Points of the ver. 2 remote output (RY) refreshed by the master/local
station
RWw : Points of the remote register (RWw) refreshed by the master/local
station
RWw2 : Points of the ver. 2 remote register (RWw) refreshed by the master/local
station
RWr : Points of the remote register (RWr) refreshed by the master/local station
RWr2 : Points of the ver. 2 remote register (RWr) refreshed by the master/local
station
SB : Points of the link special relay (SB) refreshed by the master/local station
SW : Points of the link special register (SW) refreshed by the master/local
station
αE : File register (R, ZR) transfer time on memory card (only when file
register is used)
KM1 : Constant
1) Master station
Constant
KM1
CPU type
Q00JCPU 1.05
Q00CPU 0.86
Q01CPU 0.80
Q02CPU 0.57
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU 0.22
2) Local station
Constant
KM1
CPU type
Q00JCPU 1.27
Q00CPU 1.04
Q01CPU 0.93
Q02CPU 0.76
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU 0.32
5 - 42 5 - 42
MELSEC-Q
KM2, KM3 : Constant

1) When QJ61BT11N is mounted on main base unit
Constant KM2 KM3
-3 -3
CPU type ( 10 ) ( 10 )
Q00JCPU 0.91 ----
Q00CPU 0.83 ----
Q01CPU 0.79 ----
Q02CPU 0.48 0.32
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU 0.43 0.14
2) When QJ61BT11N is mounted on extension base unit

Constant KM2 KM3
-3 -3
CPU type ( 10 ) ( 10 )
Q00JCPU 1.62 ----
Q00CPU 1.57 ----
Q01CPU 1.55 ----
Q02CPU 1.02 0.08
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU 0.98 0.06
(Example)
When the PLC CPU type is the Q06HCPU, the QJ61BT11N is mounted
on the main base and used as the master station, and 1024 points of
RX, 896 points of RX2, 1024 points of RY, 896 points of RY2, 128
points of RWw, 128 points of RWw2, 128 points of RWr, 128 points of
RWr2, 512 points of SB and 512 points of SW are refreshed besides the
file register.
KM1 + KM2 ( RX + RX2 + RY + RY2 + SB + RWw + RWw2 + RWr + RWr2 + SW)

16
= 0.22 + 0.00043 ( 1024 + 896 + 1024 + 896 + 512 + 128 + 128 + 128 + 128 + 512)
16
= 0.22 + 0.00043 1296
= 0.77728
= 0.78 [ms]
5 - 43 5 - 43
MELSEC-Q
5.5 Station Status at Error Occurrence
This section explains the status of each station at error occurrence.
5.5.1 Status of the master station, standby master station (when the master station is
operating) and remote I/O station at error occurrence
Table 5.1 lists the operation of the master station, standby master station (when the
master station is operating) and remote I/O station upon the occurrence of an error.
Table 5.1 The status of the master station, standby master station
(when the master station is operating) and remote I/O station at error occurrence
Master station, standby master station
Remote I/O station
(when the master station is operating)
Data link status
Remote output Remote Remote register
Remote input (RX) Input Output
(RY) register (RWw) (RWr)
When data link is stopped due to an error generated 1 1
Continue Continue Hold Continue
by the master station PLC CPU (data link continue)
When data link is stopped due to an error generated 2
Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue
by the local station PLC CPU (data link continue)
The GX Developer
When data link for Clear Clear
data link faulty By external
the entire system is Undefined Undefined Hold All points OFF
station is set (master signals
stopped Hold Hold
station setting)
Clears the receive area
from the remote I/O
When a Clear Continues Continues
The GX Developer station having a
communication error operation of operation of
data link faulty communication error By external
(power off, etc.) Continue areas other than areas other than All points OFF
station is set (master Retains the receive signals
occurs in a remote the remote I/O the remote I/O
station setting) area from the remote
I/O station Hold station station
I/O station with a
communication error
Clears the receive
Retains the Continue Continue
area from the remote
When a Clear receive area (Not affected by (Not affected by
The GX Developer device station with a
communication error from the remote the the
data link faulty communication error
(power off, etc.) Continue Continue device station communication communication
station is set (master Retains the receive
occurs in a remote with a status of the status of the
station setting) area from the remote
device station Hold communication remote device remote device
device station with a
error station) station)
communication error.
Clears the receive
area from the local Retains the Continue Continue
When a Clear
The GX Developer station with a receive area (Not affected by (Not affected by
communication error
data link faulty communication error from the local the the
(power off, etc.) Continue Continue
station is set (master Retains the receive station with a communication communication
occurs in a local
station setting) area from the local communication status of the status of the
station Hold
station with a error local station) local station)
communication error
1: If parameter setting has been made using the dedicated instructions, the data is
held. If parameter setting has been made using GX Developer, the data is cleared
when the RY refresh device is set to Y, the data is cleared or held when the RY
refresh device is set to other than Y. (See Section 4.3.5.)
2: When the RY refresh device is set to "Y" for the local station that has stopped,
only the receive area is cleared from the stopped local station ; the receive area is
retained or cleared when the RY refresh device is set to other than Y. (See
Section 4.3.5.) Operation continues for the receive areas from other stations.
5 - 44 5 - 44
MELSEC-Q
5.5.2 Status of the remote device station, local station, standby master station (when the
local station is operating) and intelligent device station at error occurrence
Table 5.2 lists the status of the remote device station, local station, standby master station
(when the local station is operating) and intelligent device station at error occurrence.
Table 5.2 The status of the remote device station, local station, standby master station
(when the local station is operating) and intelligent device station at error occurrence
Remote device station, Local station, standby master station
intelligent device station (when local station is operating)
Data link status Remote Remote Remote Remote
Remote Remote Remote Remote output
register register register register
input (RX) output (RY) input (RX) (RY)
(RWw) (RWr) (RWw) (RWr)
Continue Continue Continue Clear Continue Continue Continue
by the master station PLC CPU (data link continue)
Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue
by the local station PLC CPU (data link continue)
Clears the receive
The GX Developer Clear Clear areas from other Retains the
When data link for
data link faulty All points stations receive area
the entire system is Undefined Undefined Undefined Hold
station is set (local OFF Retains the receive from other
stopped
station setting) Hold Hold areas from other stations
stations
Clears the receive
area from a remote
Clear I/O station with a
When a
The GX Developer communication
communication error
data link faulty error
(power off, etc.) Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue
station is set (local Retains the receive
occurs in a remote
station setting) area from a remote
I/O station
Hold I/O station with a
communication
error
Clears the receive
Retains the
area from a remote
receive area
Clear device station with
When a from a
The GX Developer a communication
communication error remote
(power off, etc.) Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Continue device Continue
occurs in a remote station with
station setting) area from a remote
device station a
Hold device station with
communica-
a communication
tion error
error
Clears the receive
area from a local
Retains the
Clear station with a
When a receive area
The GX Developer communication
communication error from a local
(power off, etc.) Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue station with Continue
occurs in a local a
station setting) area from a local
station communica-
Hold station with a
tion error
communication
error
1: If parameter setting has been made using the dedicated instructions, the data is
held. If parameter setting has been made using GX Developer, the data is clear
when the RY refresh device is set to Y, the data is cleared or held when the RY
refresh device is set to other than Y. (See Section 4.3.5.)
2: When the RY refresh device is set to "Y" for the local station that has stopped,
only the receive area is cleared from the stopped local station; the receive area is
retained or cleared when the RY refresh device is set to other than Y. (See
Section 4.3.5.) Operation continues for the receive areas from other stations.
5 - 45 5 - 45
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q
This chapter explains the parameter settings that are required to perform data link with
the CC-Link.
6.1 Procedure from Parameter Settings to Data Link Startup
The following explains the procedure from setting the parameters to starting the data
link.
6.1.1 CPU parameter area and master module parameter memory
The following explains the relationship between the CPU parameter area and the
master station's parameter memory.
(1) CPU parameter area

This area is used to set the basic values for controlling the PLC system and the
network parameters that control the CC-Link system.
(2) Master station parameter memory

This area stores the network parameters for the CC-Link system.
When the module is powered off or the PLC CPU is reset, the network
parameters are erased.
6
PLC CPU Master station
Parameter area Parameter memory
Power ON
CC-Link system CPU reset CC-Link system
network network
parameter area parameter area
6-1 6-1
MELSEC-Q
6.1.2 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with GX Developer
Follow the procedure below from parameter settings to data link startup:
GX Developer PLC CPU Master station

The GX Developer is used
CC-Link system
to create the network
parameter area Parameter memory
parameters and
automatic refresh Network Network Network
parameters, which are parameters parameters parameters
then written to the Automatic refresh Automatic refresh
PLC CPU. parameters parameters

When the PLC system is
powered ON or the PLC CC-Link system
CPU is reset, the network parameter area Parameter memory
parameters in the PLC Network Network Network
CPU are transferred to parameters parameters parameters
the master station and
Automatic refresh Automatic refresh
the data link is
automatically started.
6
6.1.3 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with dedicated instruction
Follow the procedure below from parameter settings to data link startup:
GX Developer is used to
create the PLC parameters Program memory
(I/O assignment setting)
and a sequence program PLC parameter PLC parameter Parameter area
(containing the RLPASET
instruction), which are Sequence program Sequence program Network
then written to the PLC (RLPASET instruction) (RLPASET instruction) parameter
CPU.
Turn the power supply to

the PLC system on, or
reset the PLC CPU. Stop
and then run the PLC CPU
to execute the sequence Program memory
program. The network
parameters are set and the PLC parameter PLC parameter Parameter area
data link is started by the
RLPASET instruction. Sequence program Sequence program Network
The RLPASET instruction (RLPASET instruction) (RLPASET instruction) parameter
is completed after the data
link is started.
6-2 6-2
MELSEC-Q
6.2 Parameter Setting Items
Table 6.1 lists the items to be stored in the master station parameter memory.
Table 6.1 Parameter setting items (1/2)
Standby
Reference Master Local
Setting item Description master
section station station station
Sets the input data status from the data link disorder station.
Data link
Default value : Clear Section
disorder station
Setting range : Hold input data 4.3.4
setting
: Clear
Sets whether slave stations will be refreshed or compulsorily cleared in case of
PLC CPU STOP.
Case of CPU Section
Default value : Refresh
STOP setting 4.3.5
Setting range : Refresh
: Clears compulsorily
Number of Sets the number of occupied local and standby master stations.
occupied Default value : Occupies 1 station ———
stations Setting range : Occupies 1 to 4 stations
Makes the expanded cyclic setting of the local station.
Expanded Section
Default value : single
cyclic setting 4.4.14
Setting range : single, double, quadruple, octuple
Sets the total number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations
Number of and standby master station that are connected to the master station (including
connected reserved stations). ———
modules Default value : 64 (modules)
Setting range : 1 to 64 (modules)
Sets the number of retries when a communication error occurs.
Number of
Default value : 3 (times) ———
retries
Setting range : 1 to 7 (times)
Sets the total number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations
Number of and standby master station that can be returned to system operation by a single
Section
automatic link scan.
4.3.2
return modules Default value : 1 (module)
Setting range : 1 to 10 (modules)
Standby Specifies the station number of the standby master station.
Section
master station Default value : Blank (no standby master station specified)
4.3.6
specification Setting range : Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station specified)
Operation Specifies the data link status when a master station PLC CPU error occurs.
specification Default value : Stop Section
when CPU is Setting range : Stop 4.3.3
down : Continue
Specifies either the synchronous or asynchronous mode for sequence scan.
Scan mode Default value : Asynchronous Section
specification Setting range : Asynchronous 4.4.8
: Synchronous
Delay time
Set 0 for the delay time. ———
setting
Specifies the reserved station.
Reserved
Default value : Not specified Section
station
Setting range : Not specified 4.4.6
specification
: Specified
Specifies the error invalid station.
Error invalid
Default value : Not specified Section
station
Setting range : Not specified 4.4.7
specification
: Specified
"Number of exclusive stations" on the screen is described as "Number of occupied stations" in this manual.
"Exclusive station 1" on the screen is described as "Occupies 1 station" in this manual.
6-3 6-3
MELSEC-Q
Table 6.1 Parameter setting items (2/2)

Standby
Reference Master Local
Setting item Description master
section station station
station
Sets the type of the connected remote station, local station, intelligent device
station and standby master station.
Default value : Ver.1 remote I/O station, occupies 1 station,
station number 1 to Ver.1 remote I/O station,
occupies 1 station, station number 64
Station
Setting range ———
information
Station type : Remote I/O station, remote device station,
intelligent device station/Ver.1, Ver.2 (single,
double, quadruple, octuple)
Number of occupied stations : 1 to 4
Station number : 1 to 64
Specifies the assignments of buffer memory sizes during transient transmission to
a local station, a standby master station and an intelligent device station.
Default values
Send buffer size : 40H (64) (word)
Receive buffer size : 40H (64) (word)
Assignments of Automatic update buffer size : 80H (128) (word)
communication Setting range
buffer and Communication buffer size : 0H (0) (word) (Not specified), or 40H (64) (word) to ———
automatic 1000H (4096) (word)
update buffer However, the total communication buffer size
must be 1000H (4096) (word) or less.
Automatic update buffer : 0H (0) (word) (Not specified), or 80H (128) (word)
to 1000H (4096) (word)
However, the total automatic buffer size must be
1000H (4096) (word) or less.
POINT
(1) For the communication buffer size, specify the size that is calculated by adding
seven words to the data size to be sent or received.
For the automatic update buffer size, specify the size required for each
intelligent device station.
(2) The network parameters other than operational settings and mode setting are
also made valid when the PLC CPU is switched from STOP to RUN.
Table 6.2 indicates the reference sections for the detailed explanation of the parameter
setting methods.
Table 6.2
Reference
Mode
section
Remote net ver.1 mode Section 6.3
Parameter setting with Remote net ver.2 mode Section 6.4
GX Developer Remote net additional mode Section 6.5
Remote I/O net mode Section 6.6
Remote net ver.1 mode
Remote net ver.2 mode Section 6.7
dedicated instruction
Remote net additional mode
6-4 6-4
MELSEC-Q
6.3 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer (Remote net ver.1 mode)
This section explains the parameter settings using the GX Developer. For more details
on the GX Developer operation, refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual.
The explanations in this section are based on the following example of the system
configuration.
Station
number 4 Station
Station Station Station number 9
Master number 1 number 2 Local station number 8 Intelligent
station Remote Remote (occupies Reserved device station
(X/Y00 to 1F) I/O station device station 4 stations) station (occupies
(occupies (occupies (occupies
1 station) 2 station) 1 station)
4 stations)
6.3.1 Master station network parameter settings
(1) The following describes an example of the parameter settings. See (2) for actual
settings.
(2) Set the network parameters using the following procedure.

(a) Set the "No. of boards in module " for which the network parameters are to be
set.
Default value : None
Setting range: 0 to 4 (Boards)
Modules for the parameter setting with the RLPASET instruction
should not be included in the setting for "No. of boards in
module ".
Example) Set 1 (Board).
(b) Set the "Start I/O No." for the master station.
Setting range: 0000 to 0FE0
Example) Set 0000.
6-5 6-5
MELSEC-Q
(c) Set the Parameter name using "Operational settings." (Even if the Parameter
name is not set, this will not affect the operation of the CC-Link system).
Setting range: 8 characters or less
Example) Set "CC-LinkM".
(d) Set the input status for the data link error station using "Operational settings".
Default value : Clear ("Hold input data" not checked)
Setting range: Hold ("Hold input data" checked)
Clear ("Hold input data" not checked)
Example) Set to Clear ("Hold input data" not checked).
(e) Set the slave station refresh/compulsory clear setting at PLC CPU STOP
using "Operational settings".
Default value : Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked)
Setting range: Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked)
Clears compulsorily ("Clears compulsorily"
checked)
Example) Set to Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked).
6-6 6-6
MELSEC-Q
(f) Set the station type using "Type".

Default value : Master station
Setting range: Master station
Master station (Duplex function)
Local station
Example) Set to Master station.
(g) Set the CC-Link mode using "Mode".
Default value : Remote net(Ver.1 mode)
Setting range: Remote net(Ver.1 mode)
Remote net(Ver.2 mode)
Remote net(Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Example) Set to Remote net (Ver.1 mode).
(h) Set the total number of connected stations in the CC-Link system including
reserved stations using "All connect count".
Default value : 64 (modules)
Setting range: 1 to 64 (modules)
Example) Set to 5 (modules).
(i) Set the number of retries using "Retry count", when a communication error
occurs.
Default value : 3 (times)
Setting range: 1 to 7 (times)
Example) Set to 5 (times).
(j) Set the number of modules that can return to system operation by a single
link scan using "Automatic reconnection station count".
Default value : 1 (module)
(k) Set the station number for the standby master station using "Standby master
station No.".
Default value : Blank (No standby master station specified)
Setting range: Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station
specified)
Example) Set to blank (No standby master station specified).
(l) Set the data link status using "PLC down select", when a master station PLC
CPU error occurs.
Default value : Stop
Setting range: Stop
Continue
Example) Set to Stop.
(m) Set whether the link scan for the sequence scan is synchronous or
asynchronous using "Scan mode setting".
Default value : Asynchronous
Setting range: Asynchronous
Synchronous
Example) Set to Asynchronous.
6-7 6-7
MELSEC-Q
(n) Set 0 for the delay time.
(o) Set the station data using "Station information settings".

Default value : Remote I/O station, single, Occupies 1 station, 32
points, or no setting for reserved stations/error
invalid.
Setting range: Station type - No setting
Remote I/O station
Intelligent device station (including
local station and standby master
station)
Expanded cyclic setting (cannot be changed)-
single
Number of occupied stations -
No setting
Occupies 1 station
Occupies 2 stations
Occupies 3 stations
Occupies 4 stations
Remote station points (cannot be changed)-
32 points [when occupies 1 station]
64 points [when occupies 2 stations]
Reserved/invalid station select -
No setting
Reserved station
Invalid station (error invalid station)
Intelligent buffer select (word) -
No setting
Send 0, 64 to 4096
Receive 0, 64 to 4096
Automatic 0, 128 to 4096
Example) Set the station data according to the system configuration
specified in Section 6.3.
6-8 6-8
MELSEC-Q
(3) The following shows the results of the communication buffer and automatic update
buffer assignments.
1000H First module (station number 4) 2000H First module (station number 4)
Intelligent device station Intelligent device station
Send buffer Automatic update buffer
103FH 207FH
1040H First module(station number 4) 2080H Second module (station number 9)
Receive buffer Automatic update buffer
107FH 20FFH
1080H Second module (station number 9)
Send buffer
10BFH
10C0H Second module (station number 9)
Receive buffer
10FFH
6-9 6-9
MELSEC-Q
6.3.2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings
(1) The following shows an example of the parameter settings. See (2) for actual
settings.
(2) Set the automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure.
(a) Set the remote input (RX) refresh device using "Remote input (RX)".
Setting range: Device name - Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to X1000.
(b) Set the remote output (RY) refresh device using "Remote output (RY)".
Setting range: Device name - Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D,
W, R or ZR.
Example) Set to Y1000.
(c) Set the remote register (RWr) refresh device using "Remote register (RWr)".
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, or ZR.
Example) Set to W0.
6 - 10 6 - 10
MELSEC-Q
(d) Set the remote register (RWw) refresh device using "Remote register
(RWw)".
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W,
R, or ZR.
Example) Set to W100.
(e) Set the special relay (SB) refresh device using "Special relay (SB)".
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or
ZR.
Example) Set to SB0.
(f) Set the special register (SW) refresh device using "Special register (SW)".
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or
ZR.
Example) Set to SW0.
POINT
When setting X, Y, B, W, SB and SW as refresh devices, make setting so that they
do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks, etc.
6 - 11 6 - 11
MELSEC-Q
6.3.3 Local station network parameter settings
settings.
set.
(b) Set the "Start I/O No." for the local station.
Example) Set 0000.
(c) Set the station type using "Type".
Local station
Example) Set to Local station.
6 - 12 6 - 12
MELSEC-Q
(d) Set the Parameter name using "Operational settings". (Even if the Parameter
Example) Set "CC-LinkL".
(e) Set the input status for the data link error station using "Operational settings".
(f) Set the slave station refresh/compulsory clear setting at PLC CPU STOP
checked)
6 - 13 6 - 13
MELSEC-Q
(g) Set the number of occupied local stations using "Number of occupied
stations".
Default value : Occupies 1 station
Setting range: Occupies 1 station
Occupies 2 stations
Occupies 3 stations
Occupies 4 stations
Example) Set to Occupies 4 stations
(h) Set the CC-Link mode using "Mode".

Remote I/O net mode
Off line
6 - 14 6 - 14
MELSEC-Q
6.3.4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings
settings.
ZR.
W, R or ZR.
Example) Set to W0.
6 - 15 6 - 15
MELSEC-Q
(RWw)".
R, or ZR.
ZR.
ZR.
POINT
6 - 16 6 - 16
MELSEC-Q
6.4 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer (Remote net ver.2 mode)
configuration.
Station Station Station
number 2 number 4 number 9
Station Ver. 2 Ver. 2 Station Ver. 1
compatible compatible compatible
Master number 1 remote device number 8
local station intelligent
station Remote station (occupies 4 Reserved device station
(X/Y00 to 1F) I/O station (occupies 2 station
stations) stations) (occupies 4
(occupies double (occupies stations)
1 station) quadruple 1 station)
settings.

set.
module".
Example) Set 0000.
6 - 17 6 - 17
MELSEC-Q
checked)
6 - 18 6 - 18
MELSEC-Q

Local station
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
occurs.
station No.".
specified)
CPU error occurs.
Setting range: Stop
Continue
Synchronous
6 - 19 6 - 19
MELSEC-Q

Default value : Ver.1 Remote I/O station, single, Occupies 1 station,
32 points, or no setting for reserved stations/error
invalid.
Ver.1 Remote I/O station
Ver.1 Remote device station
Ver.1 Intelligent device station (Local
and standby master stations included)
Expanded cyclic setting -
[When station type is ver. 1 compatible station]
single (cannot be changed)
single
double
quadruple
octuple
No setting
Occupies 1 station
Occupies 2 stations
Occupies 3 stations
Occupies 4 stations
Remote station points -
[When station type is ver. 1 remote I/O station]
0 points (reserve station)
8 points
8points+8points(reserved)
16 points
32 points
[When station type is other than ver. 1 remote
I/O station]
n points
n : Calculated automatically by GX
Developer according to the number
of occupied stations and expansion
cyclic setting. Refer to Section 3.1
for the number of points.
No setting
Reserved station
6 - 20 6 - 20
MELSEC-Q

No setting
Send 0, 64 to 4096
buffer assignments.
103FH 207FH
107FH 20FFH
Send buffer
10BFH
Receive buffer
10FFH
6 - 21 6 - 21
MELSEC-Q
settings.
ZR.
W, R or ZR.
Example) Set to W0.
6 - 22 6 - 22
MELSEC-Q
(RWw)".
R, or ZR.
ZR.
ZR.
POINT
6 - 23 6 - 23
MELSEC-Q
settings.
(a) Set the "No. of boards in module" for which the network parameters are to be
set.
Example) Set 0000.
Local station
6 - 24 6 - 24
MELSEC-Q
checked)
6 - 25 6 - 25
MELSEC-Q
stations".
Occupies 2 stations
Occupies 3 stations
Occupies 4 stations
(h) Set the expanded cyclic setting of the local station using "Expanded cyclic
setting".
Setting range: single
double
quadruple
octuple
Example) Set to double.
(i) Set the CC-Link mode using "Mode".

Remote I/O net mode
Off line
6 - 26 6 - 26
MELSEC-Q
settings.
(a) Set the remote input (RX) refresh device using "Remote input (RY)".
ZR.
W, R or ZR.
Example) Set to W0.
6 - 27 6 - 27
MELSEC-Q
(RWw)".
R, or ZR.
ZR.
ZR.
POINT
6 - 28 6 - 28
MELSEC-Q
6.5 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer (Remote net additional mode)
configuration.
number 2 number 4 number 8 number 9
Ver. 2 Ver. 2
Station Ver. 1 Ver. 2 compatible
compatible compatible remote device compatible
Master number 1 remote device station intelligent
local station
station Remote station Reserved device station
(occupies 4 station
(X/Y00 to 1F) I/O station (occupies 2 (occupies 4
stations) stations) (occupies
(occupies 1 station) stations)
double octuple
1 station) quadruple
settings.

set.
module".
Example) Set 0000.
6 - 29 6 - 29
MELSEC-Q
checked)
6 - 30 6 - 30
MELSEC-Q

Local station
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Example) Set to Remote net (Additional mode).
occurs.
station No.".
specified)
CPU error occurs.
Setting range: Stop
Continue
Synchronous
6 - 31 6 - 31
MELSEC-Q

Default value : Ver.1 Remote I/O station, single, Occupies 1 station,
32 points, or no setting for reserved stations/error
invalid.
Ver.1 Remote I/O station
Expanded cyclic setting -
single (cannot be changed)
single
double
quadruple
octuple
No setting
Occupies 1 station
Occupies 2 stations
Occupies 3 stations
Occupies 4 stations
Remote station points -
[When station type is ver. 1 remote I/O station]
8 points
8points+8points(reserved)
16 points
32 points
[When station type is other than ver. 1 remote
I/O station]
n points
n : Calculated automatically by GX
Developer according to the number
of occupied stations and expansion
cyclic setting. Refer to Section 3.1
for the number of points.
No setting
Reserved station
6 - 32 6 - 32
MELSEC-Q

No setting
Send 0, 64 to 4096
buffer assignments.
103FH 207FH
107FH 20FFH
Send buffer
10BFH
Receive buffer
10FFH
6 - 33 6 - 33
MELSEC-Q
settings.
ZR.
W, R or ZR.
Example) Set to W0.
6 - 34 6 - 34
MELSEC-Q
(RWw)".
R, or ZR.
(e) Set the ver. 2 compatible remote input (RX) refresh device using "Ver. 2
remote input (RX)".
ZR.
(f) Set the ver. 2 compatible remote output (RY) refresh device using "Ver. 2
remote output (RY)".
W, R or ZR.
(g) Set the ver. 2 compatible remote register (RWr) refresh device using "Ver. 2
remote register (RWr)".
(h) Set the ver. 2 compatible remote register (RWw) refresh device using "Ver. 2
remote register (RWw)".
R, or ZR.
(i) Set the special relay (SB) refresh device using "Special relay (SB)".
ZR.
6 - 35 6 - 35
MELSEC-Q
(j) Set the special register (SW) refresh device using "Special register (SW)".
ZR.
POINT
6 - 36 6 - 36
MELSEC-Q
settings.
(a) Set the "No. of boards in Boards" for which the network parameters are to be
set.
Example) Set 0000.
Local station
6 - 37 6 - 37
MELSEC-Q
checked)
6 - 38 6 - 38
MELSEC-Q
stations".
Occupies 2 stations
Occupies 3 stations
Occupies 4 stations
(h) Set the expanded cyclic setting of the local station using "Expanded cyclic
setting".
Setting range: single
double
quadruple
octuple
Example) Set to double.
(i) Set the CC-Link mode using "Mode".

Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Example) Set to Remote net (Additional mode).
6 - 39 6 - 39
MELSEC-Q
settings.
ZR.
W, R or ZR.
Example) Set to W0.
6 - 40 6 - 40
MELSEC-Q
(RWw)".
R, or ZR.
(e) Set the ver. 2 compatible remote input (RX) refresh device using "Ver. 2
remote input (RX)".
ZR.
(f) Set the ver. 2 compatible remote output (RY) refresh device using "Ver. 2
remote output (RY)".
W, R or ZR.
(g) Set the ver. 2 compatible remote register (RWr) refresh device using "Ver. 2
remote register (RWr)".
(h) Set the ver. 2 compatible remote register (RWw) refresh device using "Ver. 2
remote register (RWw)".
R, or ZR.
(i) Set the special relay (SB) refresh device using "Special relay (SB)".
ZR.
6 - 41 6 - 41
MELSEC-Q
(j) Set the special register (SW) refresh device using "Special register (SW)".
ZR.
POINT
6 - 42 6 - 42
MELSEC-Q
6.6 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer (Remote I/O net mode)
configuration.
Station Station Station Station Station

Master number 1 number 2 number 3 number 4 number 5
station Remote Remote Remote Remote Remote
(X/Y00 to 1F) I/O station I/O station I/O station I/O station I/O station
(occupies (occupies (occupies (occupies (occupies
1 station) 1 station) 1 station) 1 station) 1 station)
settings.

set.
module".
Example) Set 0000.
6 - 43 6 - 43
MELSEC-Q
checked)
6 - 44 6 - 44
MELSEC-Q

Local station
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Example) Set to Remote I/O net mode.
(h) Set the data link status using "PLC down select", when a master station PLC
CPU error occurs.
Setting range: Stop
Continue
(i) Set whether the link scan for the sequence scan is synchronous or
Synchronous
6 - 45 6 - 45
MELSEC-Q
settings.
ZR.
W, R or ZR.
(c) Set the special relay (SB) refresh device using "Special relay (SB)".
ZR.
6 - 46 6 - 46
MELSEC-Q
(d) Set the special register (SW) refresh device using "Special register (SW)".
ZR.
POINT
6 - 47 6 - 47
MELSEC-Q
6.7 Example of Parameter Setting with Dedicated Instruction
This section explains the parameter setting with the RLPASET instruction. For more
details on the GX Developer operation, refer to the GX Developer Operational Manual.
configuration.
Station number 1
Local Station number 2 Station number 3

Master
station
station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
(occupies
(X/Y00 to 1F) (Error invalid station) (Reserved station)
1 station)
(occupies 1 station) (occupies 1 station)
POINT
Do not use GX Developer for setting the network parameters, if the network
parameters of all the modules are set by the RLPASET instruction.
Change the "No. of boards in module" setting to blank if the network parameters
have been already set by GX Developer.
Moreover, in case a system includes both a module for which the network
parameters are set by GX Developer and a module for which the network
parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction, the module for which the network
parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction should not be included in the "No.
of boards in module" setting of GX Developer.
6 - 48 6 - 48
MELSEC-Q
(1) PLC parameter setting
(a) I/O assignment setting screen

Set the following for the slot in which the master
module is mounted.
The type setting is required; set other items as
needed.
Type : Select "intelli."
Model name : Enter the module model name.
Points : Select 32 points
Start XY : Enter the start I/O number for
the master module.
(b) Intelligent function module switch setting

Click the Switch Setting button in the I/O
assignment setting screen to display the screen
shown to the left.
Set the input format to hexadecimal and enter
values for switches 3, 4. The switch settings are
indicated in the following table.
If switches 3, 4 have not been set or the
settings are not as indicated in the following
table, the RLPASET instruction is completed
with an error.
In this case, the QJ61BT11N with the smallest
start I/O number seen from the PLC CPU
starts CC-Link automatically.
Do not make any settings for other than
switches 3, 4.
Normal operation cannot be guaranteed if
settings other than for switch 4 are made.
Mode Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5

Remote net ver.2 mode 0200 0100
Remote net additional mode 0100 0100
Remote net ver.1 mode 0000 or blank 0100
6 - 49 6 - 49
MELSEC-Q
(2) Program example

Refresh of SB/SW
SB0040 to SB01FF are read
to SB0040 to SB01FF.
SW0040 to SW01FF are read
to SW0040 to SW01FF.
Parameter setting
Instruct to set parameters
RLPASET instruction
· Control data
Clear complete status.
All setting data: Valid
Number of connected modules

involved in communication: 3
Number of retries: 3 times

modules: 1 module
Operation specification when

CPU is down: stop
Scan mode specification:

Asynchronous
Dealay time setting: 0
· Slave station setting data
First: Local station, occupies

1 station, station
number 1 *1
Second: Remote I/O station,
occupies 1 station,
station number 2
Third: Remote I/O station,
occupies 1 station,
· Reserved station specification data station number 3
Reserved station specification:

station number 3
· Error invalid station specification data
Error invalid station specification:

station number 2
· Send, receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data
First (station number 1) local station

Send buffer: 100 word

Receive buffer: 100 word

Automatic refresh buffer: 0 word
*1 Set the station number in hexadecimal. (Example) Set 14H for station No. 20.
6 - 50 6 - 50
MELSEC-Q
· Parameter registration (data link startup)
Dedicated instruction
(RLPASET)
Processing at completion of the RLPASET instruction
Turn the parameter setting

instruction off.
Instruct to refresh at normal
completion of the RLPASET
instruction.
Instruct to start the control
program at normal completion
of the RLPASET instruction.
Performs abnormal
completion processing
Parameter setting change
Parameter
change
instructoin
Instruct to stop data link
Turn the data link stop

instruction off
Instruct to stop refreshing
Instruct to change parameters
RLPASET instruction
· Control data
Clear complete status
Slave station setting data/send,

receive and automatic refresh
buffer assignment data: Valid

modules: 1 module

CPU is down: Stop

Asynchronous
Delay time setting: 0

1 station, station
number 1 *1
occupies 1 station,
station number 2
occupies 1 station,
station number 3
6 - 51 6 - 51
MELSEC-Q



Dedicated instruction (RLPASET)*2

instruction off.
instruction.
Performs abnormal completion processing
Start of the control program
Refresh of RX
RX00 to RX5F are read to
X1000 to X105F.
Refresh of RWr
RXr0 to RWr3 are read to
D1000 to D1003.
Station number 1 control program



Refresh of RWw
D2000 to D2003 are written into
RWw0 to RWw3
Refresh of RY
Y1000 to Y105F are written into
RY00 to RY5F
Refresh of SB/SW
SB0000 to SB003F are refreshed.
SW0000 to SW003F are refreshed.
*2 D150 and D160 are dummy devices.
6 - 52 6 - 52
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

This chapter explains the procedure from the module installation to the data link startup.
7.1 Procedure Before Starting the Data Link
The following describes the procedure from the module installation to the CC-Link data
link startup.
Start
Mount the master module, local module and

standby master module on the base unit.
Mount the remote modules on the control board

and machine.
Check the master module, local module and

standby master module individually to see if · · · · · · · See Section 7.4.
they operate normally (hardware test).
Connect the modules with the CC-Link dedicated

cable. Connect a terminal resistor that matches · · · · · · · See Section 7.5.
the cable type to the modules located at both ends.
Check items prior to turning power ON:

Check the module installation status
Check the input power voltage
Verify that the PLC CPU RUN/STOP switch is
set to "STOP"
Verify that the PLC CPU RESET switch is set
7
to the "middle position"
Set the switches on the master module, local

module and standby master module
(see Sections 7.3 and 7.7).
Station number setting (see Section 7.7.1)
Transmission rate, mode setting
(see Section 7.7.2)
Turn the power ON
To the next page
7-1 7-1
MELSEC-Q
From the previous page

When performing When performing
parameter setting with parameter setting with
GX Developer dedicated instruction
Set the parameters with the GX Developer Set the PLC parameter with the GX Developer.
(see Section 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6). (see Section 6.7)
(1) When remote net ver. 1 mode is used Create a program in which the RLPASET
(a) Network parameters
instruction is used.
(see Sections 6.3.1 and 6.3.3)
(b) Automatic refresh parameters (see Section 6.7)
(2) When remote net ver. 2 mode is used
(b) Automatic refresh parameters
(3) When remote net additional mode is used
(4) When remote I/O net mode is used
(see Sections 6.6.1)
(see Sections 6.6.2)
Register the parameters to the PLC CPU Register PLC parameter/program to the PLC CPU
Set the PLC CPU RESET switch from "RESET" to Set the PLC CPU RESET switch from "RESET" to
"Middle position" or turn the power from OFF to ON "Middle position" or turn the power from OFF to ON
Turn the RUN/STOP switch of the PLC CPU

to "RUN"
7
Check operation using the LED display
(master station):
When data link is normal: L RUN LED is lit
When the data link is faulty: L ERR LED is lit
Check the connection status of each module

(line test). (see Section 7.8)
Check operation using the CC-Link diagnosis.
(see Section 13.4)
Register the control program in the PLC CPU
Set the PLC CPU RESET switch from "RESET" to

"Middle position" or turn the power from OFF to ON
System operation
End
7-2 7-2
MELSEC-Q
7.2 Installation
The following section explains the precautions when handling the master and local
modules, from the time they are unpacked until they are installed.
For more details on the module installation, see the user's manual for the PLC CPU
used.
7.2.1 Handling precautions
(1) Do not drop the module case or subject it to heavy impact since it is made of
resin.
(2) Do not remove the PCB of each module from its case. This may cause a
failure in the module.
(3) Be careful not to let foreign objects such as wire burrs enter the module
during wiring. In the event any foreign object enters, remove it immediately.
(4) The top surface of the module is covered with a protective film to prevent
foreign objects such as wire burrs from entering the module during wiring.
Do not remove this film until the wiring is complete. Before operating the
system, be sure to remove the film to provide adequate heat ventilation.
(5) Solderless terminals with insulation sleeve cannot be used for the terminal
block. It is recommended that the wiring connecting sections of the
solderless terminals will be covered with a marking tube or an insulation
tube.
(6) Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity
charged in the body, etc., before touching the module.
Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module.
(7) Tighten the module mounting screws and terminal screws using torque
within the following ranges.
Screw location Tightening torque range
Module mounting screws (M3 screws) 0.36 to 0.48 N · m
Terminal block screws (M3 screws) 0.42 to 0.58 N · m
Terminal block mounting screws (M3.5 screws) 0.66 to 0.89 N · m
(8) To mount the module on the base unit, fully insert the module fixing latch
into the fixing hole in the base unit and press the module using the hole as a
fulcrum. Improper installation may result in a module malfunction, or may
cause the module to fall off.
POINT
(1) Be sure to turn off the power supply to the applicable station before installing or
removing the terminal block.
If the terminal block is installed or removed without turning off the power supply
to the applicable station, correct data transmission cannot be guaranteed.
(2) Always make sure to power off the system in advance when removing the
terminating resistor to charge the system. If the terminating resistor is removed
and mounted while the system is energized, normal data transmission will not
be guaranteed
7-3 7-3
MELSEC-Q
7.2.2 Installation environment
For further details, see the user's manual for the PLC CPU used.
7.3 Part Identification Nomenclature and Settings
The following section describes the parts names of the master and local modules, and
the contents of the LED display and switch settings.
QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST S MST 1)
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
STATION
NO.
X10
2)
X1
MODE 3)
NC
1
NC
DA
2
SLD
3
4)
DB
4
5
(FG)
DG
6
7
7-4 7-4
MELSEC-Q

1) LED display Verify the data link status with the LED ON/OFF.
LED name Description
On : When the module is operating normally
RUN
Off : When a watchdog timer error occurs
On: All stations have a communication error
Also lights up when the following errors occur.
Switch type setting is incorrect
There are more than one master station on the same line
There is an error in the parameter contents
The data link monitoring timer was activated
ERR. The cable is disconnected
QJ61BT11N Or, the transmission path is affected by noise.
RUN L RUN To check the source of the error, see Section 13.4.
MST S MST
SD RD Or, see Section 8.4.2 for details regarding SW0058 (detailed
ERR. L ERR. LED display status)
Flashing: A communication error station identified, or remote
station No. duplicated.
MST On: Operating as a master station (during data link control)
S MST On: Operating as a standby master station (during standby)
L RUN On: Data link is being executed
On : Communication error (host)
Flashing at fixed intervals: The settings of switches 2) and 3)
were changed while the power is on.
L ERR. Flashing at inconsistent intervals: The terminal resistor is not
attached. The module and CC-
Link dedicated cable are
affected by noise.
SD On: During data sending
RD On: During data receiving
2) Station number setting switches Set the module station number (setting at the time of shipment: 0)
<Setting range>
STATION
NO.
Master station :0
x10 Local station : 1 to 64
Standby master station : 1 to 64
x1 If a number other than 0 to 64 is set, the "ERR." LED lights up.
"MST" and "S MST" LED indicator lamp status and station types
Operation status
Type of station set Operating as a master station Operating as a standby master
(controlling data link) station (standing by)
Master station MST S MST MST S MST
Standby master station MST S MST MST S MST
Local station ——— ———
: On, : Off
7-5 7-5
MELSEC-Q

3) Transmission rate/mode setting Set the transmission rate and operating conditions for the module
switch (settings at time of shipment: 0)
Number Transmission rate settings Mode
0 Transmission rate 156 kbps
1 Transmission rate 625 kbps
Online
2 Transmission rate 2.5 Mbps
(see Section 7.7.2)
3 Transmission rate 5 Mbps
4 Transmission rate 10 Mbps
5 Transmission rate 156 kbps Line test (see Section 7.8)
MODE
6 Transmission rate 625 kbps When the station number setting
7 Transmission rate 2.5 Mbps switch is set to 0: Line test 1
8 Transmission rate 5 Mbps When the station number setting
9 Transmission rate 10 Mbps switch is set to 1 to 64: Line test 2
A Transmission rate 156 kbps

B Transmission rate 625 kbps
Hardware test
C Transmission rate 2.5 Mbps
(see Section 7.4)
D Transmission rate 5 Mbps
E Transmission rate 10 Mbps
F Setting not allowed
4) Terminal block Connect the CC-Link dedicated cable for data linking.
For the connection method, see Section 7.5.
NC Terminals SLD and FG are connected inside the module.

NC Since a 2-piece type terminal block is used, the module can be replaced
DA
without disconnecting the signal line to the terminal block.
SLD
(Replace the module after turning its power OFF.)
DB
(FG)
DG
POINT
The settings of the station number setting switch and the transmission rate/mode
setting switch become valid when the module power is turned from OFF to ON or
the PLC CPU is reset. Thus, if the settings were changed while the module power
was ON, turn the module power from OFF to ON or reset the PLC CPU again.
7-6 7-6
MELSEC-Q
7.4 Checking the Module Status (Hardware Test)
The hardware test checks whether or not each module works properly by itself. Always
perform this hardware test before configuring the system and for each module by itself
without connecting the cable. Otherwise, the hardware test will not be executed
properly.
Execute the hardware test using the following procedure.
Start
Connect the terminal resistor attached to the

module between the DA and DB terminals of
the master/local module.
Check items prior to turning the power ON:

Check the module installation status
Check the input power voltage
set to "STOP"
to the "Middle position"
Set the "transmission rate/mode setting

switch" for the master/local module to "A to E
(the transmission rate should be the same as
when the system is operating)".
Power ON
Operate the PLC CPU RESET switch according

to the following procedure.
1) Set the RESET switch to RESET.
RESET L.CLR
2) Set the RESET switch to the middle position.

RESET L.CLR
"MST" LED is flashing (test in progress)
To the next page
7-7 7-7
MELSEC-Q
The test result is displayed using the "LED"

indicator lamps of the master/local module and
the CPU module.
[When normal]
The PLC CPU "ERR." LED flashes
(to check the operation of the watchdog timer).
[When abnormal]
The "MST" LED lights up and the "ERR."
LED flashes.
Replace the module since there is a hardware

malfunction.
(Check once again to see that the terminal
resistor that comes with the module is
connected between terminals DA and DB.)
End
POINT
When the RUN/STOP switch of the PLC CPU is set to "RUN" and a hardware test
is performed, the system status become SP. UNIT DOWN and the PLC CPU stops
to check the operation of the watch dog timer function. Make sure that the
RUN/STOP switch of the PLC CPU is set to "STOP" and then perform the
hardware test.
7-8 7-8
MELSEC-Q
7.5 Connecting the Modules Using the CC-Link Dedicated Cables
This section explains how to connect the master module, local modules, standby
master module, remote modules and intelligent device modules with the CC-Link
dedicated cables.
(1) CC-Link cables can be connected from any station number.
(2) Connect the supplied "terminal resistors" to each module at both ends of the CC-
Link system.
Connect the terminal resistors between "DA" and "DB".
There are restrictions on the case where the A(1S)J61BT11/A(1S)J61QBT11 is
used as the master station in a T-branch system configuration. Refer to Section
7.6.1 for details.
(3) The terminal resistors to be connected vary depending on the types of cables
used in the CC-Link system.
Cable type Terminal resister
110 Ω 1/2 W (brown - brown – brown)
Version 1.10 compatible CC-Link dedicated cable
CC-Link dedicated high-performance cable 130 Ω 1/2 W (brown - orange – brown)
(4) The master module can be connected at points other than both ends.
(5) Star connection is not allowed.
(6) The connection method is shown below.
Master module Remote module Local module

(Blue)
Terminal DA DA DA Terminal
resistor (White) resistor
DB DB DB
(Yellow)
DG DG DG
SLD CC-Link dedicated cable SLD CC-Link dedicated cable SLD
FG FG FG
IMPORTANT
CC-Link dedicated high-performance cables cannot be used with other cables such
as CC-Link dedicated cables or Ver.1.10 compatible CC-Link dedicated cables. If
used together, correct data transmission will not be guaranteed.
POINT
Connect the shielded wire of the CC-Link dedicated cable to "SLD" of each module,
and ground both ends of the shielded wire using D type grounding via "FG".
The SLD and FG are connected within the module.
7-9 7-9
MELSEC-Q
7.5.1 Wiring check
The following explains how to check the wiring status between the remote I/O and
external devices.
[Example of wiring check]

Specify the "Remote input (RX)" for the master station to "X1000" and the "Remote
output (RY)" to "Y1000" with the GX Developer.
Master station

(Station number 1, number (Station number 2, number
of occupied stations 1) of occupied stations 1)
AJ65BTB1-16D AJ65BTB1-16T
Input module Output module
X00 ON
ON
Y00
(a) Checking the wiring between the input module and an external device
1) Turn ON the switch corresponding to the external device "X0," which is

connected to the input module of station number 1.
2) Using the GX Developer, set "X1000" in the "Device:" field by choosing
"Online" - "Monitor" - "Device batch" and then click on "Start monitor".
3) If X1000 is ON, the connection between the input module and external
device has been properly performed.
(b) Checking the wiring between the output module and an external device
1) Using the GX Developer, set "Y1000" in the "Device:" field for the "Bit
device" by choosing "Online" - "Debug" - "Device test" and then click on
"FORCE ON".
2) If the connection between the output module and external device is
properly performed, the indicator lamp corresponding to the external
device "Y00" is lit.
POINT
If X corresponding to the switch does not turn on or the lamp corresponding to Y
does not turn on, confirm the slave station offset, size information (buffer memory
address 3E0H, Un\G992) to check the RX/RY/RWw/RWr assignment status of the
module.
7 - 10 7 - 10
MELSEC-Q
7.6 T-Branch Connection with the CC-Link Dedicated Cable
This section explains how to perform a T-branch connection using the CC-Link
dedicated cable.
7.6.1 T-Branch system configuration
The following shows a system configuration using T-branch connection.
T-branch terminal
block/connector
(Main line)
Local station/
Remote I/O station/ Master Remote I/O station/ intelligent
remote device station station remote device station device station
(Branch line) (Branch line) (Branch (Branch line)

Terminal resistor Terminal resistor
line)
[between DA and DB] [between DA and DB]
Remote I/O station/

remote device station Remote I/O station/
remote device station
Remote I/O station/

remote device station Local station/
intelligent
device station
Remote I/O station/
remote device station Remote I/O station/ Local station/ Remote I/O station/
remote device station intelligent remote device station
A maximum of 6 stations device station
can be connected
A maximum of 6 stations
can be connected
The number of branch lines is determined by the branch line length
per branch line and the overall branch line length.
When the model name and hardware version of the master module are as indicated
below in a T-branch system configuration, change the terminating resistor connection
method as described below.
When using the other master module, connect the terminating resistor packed with the
product.
AJ61BT11 : Hardware version C or earlier
AJ61QBT11 : Hardware version C or earlier
A1SJ61BT11 : Hardware version D or earlier
A1SJ61QBT11 : Hardware version D or earlier
[Connection] 110Ω DA 110 Ω ± 5 %, 1/2W × 4

DB (Connect between DA and DG/DB and DG) … both ends
110Ω
DG
Use a commercially available terminal resistor of
SLD 110 Ω ± 5% and 1/2 W resistance.
FG
110 Ω and 130 Ω resistors that are supplied with the
master/local modules cannot be used.
7 - 11 7 - 11
MELSEC-Q
7.6.2 T-Branch communication specifications list
The following describes the communication specifications for T branch connection.

For communication specifications not listed below, see Section 3.1.
Item Specification Remarks
Transmission rate 625 kbps 156 kbps 10 M/5 M/2.5 Mbps are not allowed.
Indicates the length of the cable between terminal
100 m 500 m
Maximum length of the main line resistors. The length of the T branch cable (branch line
(328.1 ft.) (1640.5 ft.)
length) is not included.
Maximum length of the branch line 8 m (26.25 ft.) Indicates the overall cable length per branch.
Overall branch line length 50 m (164.05 ft.) 200 m (656.2 ft.) Indicates the overall length of the entire branch cable.
Maximum number of connected The total number of connected stations depends on the
6 stations per branch
stations on the branch line CC-Link specifications.
The CC-Link dedicated high-performance cable
cannot be used.
CC-Link dedicated cable Mixing of different brands of CC-Link dedicated
Connection cable
Ver. 1.10 compatible CC-Link dedicated cable cables is not allowed.
Mixing of different brands of Ver. 1.10 compatible
CC-Link dedicated cables is allowed.
Terminal block: Off-the-shelf terminal block When wiring cables for the main line side, try not to
T branch terminal block/connector Connector: Connector for the FA sensor remove the covering as much as possible.
(ICE947-5-2) comparable product is recommended
CC-Link dedicated cable, Ver.1.10 compatible CC-Link dedicated cable (uses 110 Ω terminal resistor)
Length of cable between the
Distance Length of cable between the master/local station or
Maximum length of main line, distance Transmission Maximum length
between T remote I/O stations or remote intelligent device station and
rate of main line
between T branches, and length of branches device stations 1 2
cable between stations the adjacent station(s)
625 kbps 100 m (328.1 ft.) 3
1 m (3.28 ft.) or longer ( )/
No limit 30 cm (11.8 in.) or longer
4
156 kbps 500 m (1640.5 ft.) 2 m (6.56 ft.) or longer ( )
3: The cable length of 1m (3.28 ft.) or longer is for a system configured only with remote I/O stations and remote
device stations.
4: The cable length of 2m (6.56 ft.) or longer is for a system configuration that contains local stations and intelligent
device stations.
Maximum length of main line (not including the branch line length)
Terminal Distance between T branches
Terminal
resistor 2 2 2 2 resistor
1 1
R Master station R R R 2 L/I L/I

2
2 2 R
2 1 1 1 1
R
1
L/I L/I R R R R R
R
(Length of branch line: 8m (26.25 ft.) or shorter)
1
R Indicates a remote I/O station or a remote device station.
R
L/I Indicates a local station or an intelligent device station.
(Length of branch line: 8m (26.25 ft.) or shorter)
7 - 12 7 - 12
MELSEC-Q
7.7 Switch Settings
This section explains how to set the module switches.
7.7.1 Station number setting
The following explains how to set the station numbers for the master station, local
station, standby master station, remote station and intelligent device station.
For details on the station number setting switches, see Section 7.3.
Specify the station numbers according to the following conditions.
(1) Specify sequential station numbers

Station numbers can be specified regardless of the order in which the stations are
connected.
For a module occupying two or more stations, specify the first station number.
(2) Specify unique station numbers

If duplicate station numbers are specified, an installation error occurs. (Error
codes are stored in SW0069)
[Setting example] When station numbers are specified by skipping one station
number
Station number "0" Station number "5" Station number "10"
3) Standby 5) Local
Master master station
station station (occupies
Station number "1" Station number "2" (occupies Station number "9" 1 station)
4 stations)
1) Remote I/O 2) Remote device 4) Intelligent

station station device station
(occupies 1 station) (occupies 2 stations) (occupies 1 station)
Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 5 Station number 6 Station number 7 Station number 8 Station number 9 Station number 10
1) Remote 2) Remote device station 3) Standby master station 4) Intelligent 5) Local station
I/O station device station
Data link faulty station
(If this station is set as a reserved station, it will not be treated as a faulty station.)
POINT
Specify unoccupied station numbers as reserved stations. An unoccupied station
number will be treated as a "data link faulty station" (can be verified with link special
registers SW0080 to SW0083).
7 - 13 7 - 13
MELSEC-Q
7.7.2 Transmission rate and mode settings
Transmission rate and mode settings are specified with the "transmission rate/mode
setting switch".
For details on the transmission rate/mode setting switch, see Section 7.3.
The transmission rate that can be set varies depending on the total distance.
For more details, see Sections 3.1.1 and 3.1.2.
POINT
Use the same transmission rate for the master station, remote stations, local
stations, intelligent device stations and the standby master station.
If the setting for even one of the stations is different, data link cannot be established
properly.
7 - 14 7 - 14
MELSEC-Q
7.8 Checking the Connection Status (Line Test)
After connecting all of the modules with CC-Link dedicated cables, verify that they are
correctly connected and that data linking can be performed with remote stations, local
stations, intelligent device stations and the standby master station.
Line test 1 checks the status of communication with all modules that have been connected.
Line test 2 checks the status of communication with specific modules.
Neither line test 1 nor line test 2 requires parameter settings.
POINT
(1) Line test 2 is performed when an error is generated by line test 1.
Thus, if the result of line test 1 is normal, there is no need to conduct line test 2.
(2) Network parameter setting is required to execute Line test 2 for the standby
master station.
(1) Checking the connection status and the status of communication with remote
stations/local stations/intelligent device stations/standby master station (line test 1)
Perform the line test according to the following procedure.
Start
Check items prior to executing line test 1:

set to "STOP"
Set the "station number setting switch" for the

master/local module to "0".

switch" for the master/local module to "5 to 9
(the transmission rate should be the same as
when the system is operating)".

RESET L.CLR

RESET L.CLR
To the next page
7 - 15 7 - 15
MELSEC-Q

indicator lamps of the master module.
[When test is complete]
The "L RUN" LED lights up.
The "MST" LED flashes.
The test results are stored in SW00B4 to B7
(line test 1 result). However, since line test 1
is performed for 64 stations, disregard the
bit (s) for any unconnected stations.
For the standby master station, the test result is
stored into SB00B4 (standby master station test
result) only.
[When test is incomplete (all stations are

abnormal)]
The "MST" LED lights up and the "ERR."
LED flashes.
The test results are stored in SW00B8
(line test result).
End
7 - 16 7 - 16
MELSEC-Q
(2) Checking the status of communication with a specific remote station/local

station/intelligent device station/standby master station (line test 2)
Line test 2 checks whether data linking can be performed normally with a specific
remote station, local station, intelligent device station or standby master station.
Execute line test 2 according to the following procedure.
Start
Check items prior to executing line test 2:

set to "STOP"
Set the master module "station number setting

switch" to the station number of the module for
which the test is to be performed.

switch" for the master module to "5 to 9 (the
transmission rate should be the same as when
the system is operating)".

RESET L.CLR

RESET L.CLR
To the next page
7 - 17 7 - 17
MELSEC-Q

indicator lamps of the master module.
[At normal completion of test]
The "L RUN" LED lights up.
[At abnormal completion of test]

The "MST" LED lights up and the "ERR." LED
flashes.
The test results are stored in SW00B8

(line test result).
End
7 - 18 7 - 18
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
8 PROGRAMMING
This chapter explains common items relating to programming.
8.1 Precautions on Programming
The following explains precautions on the creation of a program:
Create a program that allows the detection of data-link status and interlocking with the
remote I/O stations, remote device stations, local stations, intelligent device stations,
and standby master station.
In addition, create an error-handling program.
[Program example]
Set the "Special Relay (SB) Refresh Device" to "SB0" and the "Special Register
(SW) Refresh Device" to "SW0" of the master station with GX Developer.
POINT
When setting the refresh devices of the special relay (SB) and the special register
(SW) to SB and SW, respectively, make sure that they do not duplicate with device
numbers on the MELSECNET/H network.
Module error Module ready Host data link status SW80 to SW83 (Other station data link status)
Xn0 XnF Xn1

BM0V SW80 K4M0 K4
Error-handling program
8
M0
Station number 1 normal operation program
M1
Station number 2 normal operation program
8-1 8-1
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
8.2 I/O Signals for the PLC CPU
This section explains the input/output signals for the PLC CPU of the master/local
module.
8.2.1 I/O signal list
Table 8.1 shows a list of the I/O signals.

The "n" in the table indicates the master/local module's first I/O number, which is
determined by both the installation position and the module installed before the
master/local module.
<Example> When the master/local module's first I/O number is "X/Y30"
Xn0 to X (n + 1) F X30 to X4F
Yn0 to Y (n + 1) F Y30 to Y4F
Table 8.1 I/O signal list

Signal direction: PLC CPU Master/local module Signal direction: PLC CPU Master/local module
Availability Availability
Input number Signal name Output number Signal name
Master station Local station Master station Local station
Xn0 Module error Yn0
Xn1 Host data link status Yn1
Xn2 Use prohibited — — Yn2
Xn3 Other station data link status Yn3
Xn4 Yn4
Xn5 Yn5
Xn6 Yn6
Xn7 Yn7
Xn8 Yn8
Xn9 Use prohibited — — Yn9
XnA YnA
XnB YnB
XnC YnC
XnD YnD
XnE YnE
XnF Module ready YnF
Use prohibited — —
X (n+1) 0 Y (n+1) 0
8 X (n+1) 1 Y (n+1) 1
X (n+1) 2 Y (n+1) 2
X (n+1) 3 Y (n+1) 3
X (n+1) 4 Y (n+1) 4
X (n+1) 5 Y (n+1) 5
X (n+1) 6 Y (n+1) 6
X (n+1) 7 Y (n+1) 7
Use prohibited — —
X (n+1) 8 Y (n+1) 8
X (n+1) 9 Y (n+1) 9
X (n+1) A Y (n+1) A
X (n+1) B Y (n+1) B
X (n+1) C Y (n+1) C
X (n+1) D Y (n+1) D
X (n+1) E Y (n+1) E
X (n+1) F Y (n+1) F
8-2 8-2
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
IMPORTANT
The use-prohibited output signals shown in Table 8.1 are accessed by the system
and cannot be accessed by the user.
In the event these signals are used (turned on/off) by the user, normal operations
cannot be guaranteed.
POINT
In the A/QnA series, data link startup was performed by setting the "Yn6 (Data Link
Startup Request initiated by a buffer memory parameter)" and "Yn8 (Data link
2
Startup Request initiated by an E PROM parameter)".
Do not use "Yn6" and "Yn8" for the Q series because the data link startup is
automatically performed.
8-3 8-3
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
8.2.2 Details of the I/O signals
The following explains the on/off timings and conditions of the I/O signals shown in
Table 8.1:
(1) Module error: Xn0

This signal indicates whether the module is normal or faulty.
OFF: Module normal
ON : Module error
Module error
(Xn0)
Module ready
(XnF)
(2) Host data link status: Xn1

This signal indicates the data link status of the host station.
OFF: Data link is stopped
ON : Data linking in progress
(3) Other station data link status: Xn3

This signal indicates the data link status of other stations (remote, local,
intelligent device and standby master stations).
The SB0080 signal has the same contents.
OFF: All stations normal
ON : There is a faulty station (the faulty station status is stored in SW0080 to
SW0083)
POINT
The other station data link status (Xn3) takes up to 6 seconds to turn on after a
slave station connected to the master/local station becomes faulty.
The time to turn ON differs according to the system configuration, faulty status or
other conditions.
(4) Module ready: XnF

This signal indicates whether the module is ready to operate.
(a) When the module reaches ready-to-operate status, this signal turns ON
automatically.
(b) This signal turns OFF when either of the following conditions occurs:
1) When an error is detected in the switch setting status for the module
2) When the module error signal (Xn0) turns ON
Power ON
Module ready
(XnF)
Module error
(Xn0)
8-4 8-4
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
8.3 Buffer Memory
The buffer memory transfers data between the master/local module and the PLC CPU.
The reading and writing of data are performed by parameter settings or with dedicated
instructions using the GX Developer.
The contents of the buffer memory return to the default when the power is turned OFF
or the PLC CPU is reset.
8.3.1 Buffer memory list
The buffer memory list is shown in Table 8.2.
Table 8.2 Buffer memory list (1/3)

Address Availability
Read/write Reference
Item Description Master Local
Hexadecimal Decimal possibility section
station station
0H 0
Parameter information Section
to to Stores the parameter settings. Read only —
area 8.3.2 (1)
DFH 223
For the master station: Stores the input status
from the remote/local
E0H 224 —
/intelligent device/standby
to to Remote input (RX) 2 Read only
master stations.
15FH 351
For the local station : Stores the input status
—
from the master station.
For the master station: Stores the output status to
the remote/local /intelligent Section
Write only —
device/standby master 8.3.2 (2)
stations.
160H 352 For the local station : Stores the output status to
to to Remote output (RY) 2 the master station.
1DFH 479 Also, stores the receive
Read/write
data from the remote/other —
enabled
local/intelligent
device/standby master
stations.
For the master station: Stores the send data to
the remote device/all local
Write only —
master stations.
Remote register For the local station : Stores the send data to the
(RWw) 2 master/other
1E0H 480 local/intelligent
Master station: Section
to to device/standby master
For sending 8.3.2 (3)
2DFH 735 stations.
Local station: Read/write
Also, stores the receive —
For sending/receiving enabled
data from the remote
device/other
local/intelligent
stations.
: Available, — : Not available
8-5 8-5
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

station station
For the master station: Stores the receive data
Remote register
from the remote
(RWr) 2
2E0H 736 device/local/intelligent —
Master station: Section
to to device/standby master Read only
For receiving 8.3.2 (3)
3DFH 991 stations.
Local station:
For the local station : Stores the receive data
For receiving —
3E0H 992 Stores the offset and size of RX/RY/RWw/RWr
Slave station offset, Section
to to per remote station/local station/intelligent device Read only
size information 8.3.2 (4)
5DFH 1503 station/standby master station.
5E0H 1504 Read/write
enabled Section
to to Link special relay (SB) Stores the data link status.
(write may 8.3.2 (5)
5FFH 1535
be disabled
600H 1536 depending
Link special register Section
to to Stores the data link status. on the
(SW) 8.3.2 (6)
7FFH 2047 device)
800H 2048
to to Use prohibited 1 — — — — —
9FFH 2559
A00H 2560
The specified data is stored and used by Read/write Section
to to Random access buffer
transient transmission. enabled 8.3.2 (7)
FFFH 4095
Stores the send and receive data and control
1000H 4096 data when performing transient transmission
Read/write Section
to to Communication buffers (communication using the communication
enabled 8.3.2 (8)
1FFFH 8191 buffers) with the local station, standby master
station, and intelligent device station.
Stores the automatic update data when
2000H 8192
Automatic update performing transient transmission with the Read/write Section
to to —
buffer AJ65BT-R2 (communication using the enabled 8.3.2 (9)
2FFFH 12287
automatic update buffer).
3000H 12288
3FFFH 16383
8-6 8-6
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

station station
For the master station: Stores the input status
from the remote/local
4000H 16384 —
Ver. 2 compatible /intelligent device/standby
to to Read only
remote input (RX) 3 master stations.
41FFH 16895
For the local station : Stores the input status
—
For the master station: Stores the output status to
the remote/local /intelligent
Write only — Section
8.3.2 (10)
stations.
4200H 16896 For the local station : Stores the output status to
Ver. 2 compatible
to to the master station.
remote output (RY) 3
43FFH 17407 Also, stores the receive
Read/write
data from the remote/other —
enabled
local/intelligent
stations.
For the master station: Stores the send data to
the remote device/all local
Write only —
master stations.
Ver. 2 compatible For the local station : Stores the send data to the
remote register master/other
4400H 17408 (RWw) 3 local/intelligent
to to Master station: device/standby master
4BFFH 19455 For sending stations.
Read/write
Local station: Also, stores the receive —
enabled
For sending/receiving data from the remote
device/other Section
local/intelligent 8.3.2 (11)
stations.
For the master station: Stores the receive data
Ver. 2 compatible from the remote
remote register device/local/intelligent —
4C00H 19456 (RWr) 3 device/standby master
to to Master station: stations. Read only
53FFH 21503 For receiving
Local station: For the local station : Stores the receive data
—
For receiving from the master station.
5400H 21504
7FFFH 32767
1 Do not write to any area where use is prohibited. This may cause errors.
2 Used when the remote net ver. 1 mode or remote net additional mode is selected.
3 Used when the remote net ver. 2 mode or remote net additional mode is selected.
8-7 8-7
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
8.3.2 Buffer memory details
The following explains the details of items shown in Table 8.2, "Buffer Memory List" in
Section 8.3.1.
(1) Parameter information area

Stores the parameter settings.
Do not perform write to the parameter information area. Doing so may cause an
error.
Table 8.3 Parameter Information Area List (1/3)

Addres
Item Description
Hex. Dec.
0H 0 (Use prohibited) —
Stores the total number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations and
standby master station that are connected to the master station (including reserved
Number of connected
1H 1 stations).
modules
Default value: 64 (modules)
Storage area: 1 to 64 (modules)
Stores the number of retries when a communication error occurs.
2H 2 Number of retries Default value: 3 (times)
Storage area: 1 to 7 (times)
Stores the total number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations and
Number of automatic standby master station that can be returned to system operation by a single link scan.
3H 3
return modules Default value: 1 (module)
Storage area: 1 to 10 (modules)
Stores the station number of the standby master station.
4H 4 Default value: 0 (no standby master station specified)
specification
Storage area: 0 to 64 (0: No standby master station specified)
5H 5 (Use prohibited) —
Stores the data link status when a master station PLC CPU error occurs.
Operation specification Default value: 0 (Stop)
6H 6
when CPU is down Storage area: 0 (Stop)
: 1 (Continue)
Stores either the synchronous or asynchronous mode for sequence scan.
Scan mode Default value: 0 (Asynchronous)
7H 7
specification Storage area: 0 (Asynchronous)
: 1 (Synchronous)
Stores the link scan interval. (Unit: 50 µ s)
8H 8 Delay time setting Default value: 0 (0: Not specified)
Storage area: 0 to 100 (0: Not specified)
Stores the reserved station.
Reserved station
10H to 13H 16 to 19 Default value: 0 (Not specified)
specification
Storage area: Bit corresponding to the station number turns on.
Stores the error invalid station.
Error invalid station
14H to 17H 20 to 23 Default value: 0 (Not specified)
specification
8-8 8-8
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Addres
Item Description
Hex. Dec.
18H to 1FH 24 to 31 (Use prohibited) —

Stores the setting status of the types of the connected remote, local,
intelligent device and standby master stations.
Default value: 0101H (Ver.1compatible remote I/O station,
Occupies 1 station, Station number 1) to 0140H
(Ver.1compatible remote I/O station, Occupies 1
station, Station number 64)
Storage area: See below
b15 to b12 b11 to b8b7 to b0
Staion type Number of Station number
occupied stations
1H: Occupies 1 station 1 to 64

20H (first module) 32 (first module) 2H: Occupies 2 stations (01H to 40H)
to to Station information 3H: Occupies 3 stations
5FH (64th module) 95 (64th module) 4H: Occupies 4 stations
0H: Ver. 1 compatible remote I/O station

1H: Ver. 1 compatible remote device station
2H: Ver. 1 compatible intelligent device station
5H: Ver. 2 compatible single remote device station
6H: Ver. 2 compatible single intelligent device station
8H: Ver. 2 compatible double remote device station
9H: Ver. 2 compatible double intelligent device station
BH: Ver. 2 compatible quadruple remote device station
CH: Ver. 2 compatible quadruple intelligent device station
EH: Ver. 2 compatible octuple remote device station
FH: Ver. 2 compatible octuple intelligent device station
60H to 7FH 96 to 127 (Use prohibited) —

Stores the buffer memory assignment status at transient
transmission to the local, intelligent device and standby master
stations.
Default value
The first intelligent
The first intelligent
80H(Send buffer) 128(Send buffer)

device
device
81H(Receive buffer) 129(Receive buffer) Send buffer size: 40H (64) (word)
82H(Automatic update 130(Automatic update
Receive buffer size: 40H (64) (word)
buffer) buffer)
Automatic update buffer size: 80H (128) (word)
Allocation of
Storage area
communication
to to Communication buffer : 0H (0) (word) (no setting) or 40H (64)
buffer and
(word) to 1000H (4096) (word)
The 26th
The 26th
CBH(Send buffer) 203(Send buffer) automatic update

intelligent device
intelligent device
Note that the total size of the

CCH(Receive buffer) 204(Receive buffer)
buffer communication buffer is within
CDH(Automatic update 205(Automatic update
buffer) buffer) 1000H (4096) (word).
Automatic update buffer: 0H (0) (word) (no setting) or 80H
(128) (word) to 1000H (4096) (word)
Note that the total size of the
automatic update buffers is within
1000H (4096) (word).
CEH, CFH 206, 207 (Use prohibited) —

Stores the station numbers of the remote I/O stations set as 8
8-point remote points in the remote I/O station points setting. 1, 2
D0H to D3H 208 to 211
I/O station setting Default value: 0 (no setting)
1 Used in the remote net ver. 2 mode or remote net additional mode.
2 When the setting is "8 points + 8 points (reserved)", the station numbers are stored into both the 8-
point remote I/O station setting and 16-point remote I/O station setting.
8-9 8-9
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Addres
Item Description
Hex. Dec.
Stores the station numbers of the remote I/O stations set as 16
16-point remote points in the remote I/O station points setting. 1, 2
D4H to D7H 212 to 215
I/O station setting Default value: 0 (no setting)
Stores the station numbers of the reserved stations set to 0 points. 1
0 points reserve
D8H to DBH 216 to 219 Default value: 0 (no setting)
station setting
DCH to DFH 220 to 223 (Use prohibited) —
1 Used in the remote net ver. 2 mode or remote net additional mode.
2 When the setting is "8 points + 8 points (reserved)", the station numbers are stored into both the 8-
point remote I/O station setting and 16-point remote I/O station setting.
(2) Remote input (RX) and remote output (RY)
Used when the remote net ver. 1 mode or remote net additional mode is
selected.
(a) Master station remote I/O station/remote device station/local station
1) Master station
The input status from the remote I/O station, remote device station
(RX) and local station (RY) is stored.
Two words are used per station.
2) Local station
Data to be sent to the master station is stored in the remote output
(RY) of the address corresponding to the host station number.
(RX) and other local station is stored.
… The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master
station and the local station.
(In the example below, RY9E and RY9F cannot be used.)
Remote I/O station Local station

Master station (Station number 1: occupies 1 station) (Station number 2: occupies 4 stations)
Address Remote input (RX) Remote output (RY) Address

For station E0H RX F to RX 0 X0F to X00 RY F to RY 0 160H For station
number 1 E1H RX 1F to RX 10 X1F to X10 RY 1F to RY 10 161H number 1
For station E2H RX 2F to RX 20 RY 2F to RY 20 162H For station

number 2 E3H RX 3F to RX 30 RY 3F to RY 30 163H number 2



number 5 E9H RX 9D to RX 90 RY 9D to RY 90 169H number 5
to to to to
For station 15CH RX7CF to RX7C0 RY7CF to RY7C0 1DCH For station
number 63 15DH RX7DF to RX7D0 RY7DF to RY7D0 1DDH number 63
For station 15EH RX7EF to RX7E0 RY7EF to RY7E0 1DEH For station
number 64 15FH RX7FF to RX7F0 RY7FF to RY7F0 1DFH number 64
8 - 10 8 - 10
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer-memory
addresses.
[Master station]
Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses
Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory
number address number address number address number address number address
1 E0H to E1H 14 FAH to FBH 27 114H to 115H 40 12EH to 12FH 53 148H to 149H
2 E2H to E3H 15 FCH to FDH 28 116H to 117H 41 130H to 131H 54 14AH to 14BH
3 E4H to E5H 16 FEH to FFH 29 118H to 119H 42 132H to 133H 55 14CH to 14DH
4 E6H to E7H 17 100H to 101H 30 11AH to 11BH 43 134H to 135H 56 14EH to 14FH
5 E8H to E9H 18 102H to 103H 31 11CH to 11DH 44 136H to 137H 57 150H to 151H
6 EAH to EBH 19 104H to 105H 32 11EH to 11FH 45 138H to 139H 58 152H to 153H
7 ECH to EDH 20 106H to 107H 33 120H to 121H 46 13AH to 13BH 59 154H to 155H
8 EEH to EFH 21 108H to 109H 34 122H to 123H 47 13CH to 13DH 60 156H to 157H
9 F0H to F1H 22 10AH to 10BH 35 124H to 125H 48 13EH to 13FH 61 158H to 159H
10 F2H to F3H 23 10CH to 10DH 36 126H to 127H 49 140H to 141H 62 15AH to 15BH
11 F4H to F5H 24 10EH to10FH 37 128H to 129H 50 142H to 143H 63 15CH to 15DH
12 F6H to F7H 25 110H to 111H 38 12AH to 12BH 51 144H to 145H 64 15EH to 15FH
13 F8H to F9H 26 112H to 113H 39 12CH to 12DH 52 146H to 147H — —
[Local station]
1 160H to 161H 14 17AH to 17BH 27 194H to 195H 40 1AEH to 1AFH 53 1C8H to 1C9H
2 162H to 163H 15 17CH to 17DH 28 196H to 197H 41 1B0H to 1B1H 54 1CAH to 1CBH
3 164H to 165H 16 17EH to 17FH 29 198H to 199H 42 1B2H to 1B3H 55 1CCH to 1CDH
4 166H to 167H 17 180H to 181H 30 19AH to 19BH 43 1B4H to 1B5H 56 1CEH to 1CFH
5 168H to 169H 18 182H to 183H 31 19CH to 19DH 44 1B6H to 1B7H 57 1D0H to 1D1H
6 16AH to 16BH 19 184H to 185H 32 19EH to 19FH 45 1B8H to 1B9H 58 1D2H to 1D3H
7 16CH to 16DH 20 186H to 187H 33 1A0H to 1A1H 46 1BAH to 1BBH 59 1D4H to 1D5H
8 16EH to 16FH 21 188H to 189H 34 1A2H to 1A3H 47 1BCH to 1BDH 60 1D6H to 1D7H
9 170H to 171H 22 18AH to 18BH 35 1A4H to 1A5H 48 1BEH to 1BFH 61 1D8H to 1D9H
10 172H to 173H 23 18CH to 18DH 36 1A6H to 1A7H 49 1C0H to 1C1H 62 1DAH to 1DBH
11 174H to 175H 24 18EH to 18FH 37 1A8H to 1A9H 50 1C2H to 1C3H 63 1DCH to 1DDH
12 176H to 177H 25 190H to 191H 38 1AAH to 1ABH 51 1C4H to 1C5H 64 1DEH to 1DFH
13 178H to 179H 26 192H to 193H 39 1ACH to 1ADH 52 1C6H to 1C7H — —
8 - 11 8 - 11
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
(b) Master station remote I/O station/remote device station/local station
1) Master station
The output status to the remote I/O station, remote device station (RY)
and all local stations (RX) is stored.
2) Local station
The data received from the remote I/O station, remote device station
(RY) and master station (RY) is stored.
(In the example below, RY9E and RY9F cannot be used.)
Remote I/O station Local station

Address Remote output (RY) Remote input (RX) Address
For station 160H RY F to RY 0 Y0F to Y00 RX F to RX 0 E0H For station

number 1 161H RY 1F to RY 10 Y1F to Y10 RX 1F to RX 10 E1H number 1
For station 162H RY 2F to RY 20 RX 2F to RX 20 E2H For station

number 2 163H RY 3F to RY 30 RX 3F to RX 30 E3H number 2



number 5 169H RY 9D to RY 90 RX 9D to RX 90 E9H number 5
to to to to
For station 1DCH RY7CF to RY7C0 RX7CF to RX7C0 15CH For station
number 63 1DDH RY7DF to RY7D0 RX7DF to RX7D0 15DH number 63
For station 1DEH RY7EF to RY7E0 RX7EF to RX7E0 15EH For station
number 64 1DFH RY7FF to RY7F0 RX7FF to RX7F0 15FH number 64
8 - 12 8 - 12
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer memory
addresses.
[Master station]
1 160H to 161H 14 17AH to 17BH 27 194H to 195H 40 1AEH to 1AFH 53 1C8H to 1C9H
2 162H to 163H 15 17CH to 17DH 28 196H to 197H 41 1B0H to 1B1H 54 1CAH to 1CBH
3 164H to 165H 16 17EH to 17FH 29 198H to 199H 42 1B2H to 1B3H 55 1CCH to 1CDH
4 166H to 167H 17 180H to 181H 30 19AH to 19BH 43 1B4H to 1B5H 56 1CEH to 1CFH
5 168H to 169H 18 182H to 183H 31 19CH to 19DH 44 1B6H to 1B7H 57 1D0H to 1D1H
6 16AH to 16BH 19 184H to 185H 32 19EH to 19FH 45 1B8H to 1B9H 58 1D2H to 1D3H
7 16CH to 16DH 20 186H to 187H 33 1A0H to 1A1H 46 1BAH to 1BBH 59 1D4H to 1D5H
8 16EH to 16FH 21 188H to 189H 34 1A2H to 1A3H 47 1BCH to 1BDH 60 1D6H to 1D7H
9 170H to 171H 22 18AH to 18BH 35 1A4H to 1A5H 48 1BEH to 1BFH 61 1D8H to 1D9H
10 172H to 173H 23 18CH to 18DH 36 1A6H to 1A7H 49 1C0H to 1C1H 62 1DAH to 1DBH
11 174H to 175H 24 18EH to 18FH 37 1A8H to 1A9H 50 1C2H to 1C3H 63 1DCH to 1DDH
12 176H to 177H 25 190H to 191H 38 1AAH to 1ABH 51 1C4H to 1C5H 64 1DEH to 1DFH
13 178H to 179H 26 192H to 193H 39 1ACH to 1ADH 52 1C6H to 1C7H — —
[Local station]
1 E0H to E1H 14 FAH to FBH 27 114H to 115H 40 12EH to 12FH 53 148H to 149H
2 E2H to E3H 15 FCH to FDH 28 116H to 117H 41 130H to 131H 54 14AH to 14BH
3 E4H to E5H 16 FEH to FFH 29 118H to 119H 42 132H to 133H 55 14CH to 14DH
4 E6H to E7H 17 100H to 101H 30 11AH to 11BH 43 134H to 135H 56 14EH to 14FH
5 E8H to E9H 18 102H to 103H 31 11CH to 11DH 44 136H to 137H 57 150H to 151H
6 EAH to EBH 19 104H to 105H 32 11EH to 11FH 45 138H to 139H 58 152H to 153H
7 ECH to EDH 20 106H to 107H 33 120H to 121H 46 13AH to 13BH 59 154H to 155H
8 EEH to EFH 21 108H to 109H 34 122H to 123H 47 13CH to 13DH 60 156H to 157H
9 F0H to F1H 22 10AH to 10BH 35 124H to 125H 48 13EH to 13FH 61 158H to 159H
10 F2H to F3H 23 10CH to 10DH 36 126H to 127H 49 140H to 141H 62 15AH to 15BH
11 F4H to F5H 24 10EH to10FH 37 128H to 129H 50 142H to 143H 63 15CH to 15DH
12 F6H to F7H 25 110H to 111H 38 12AH to 12BH 51 144H to 145H 64 15EH to 15FH
13 F8H to F9H 26 112H to 113H 39 12CH to 12DH 52 146H to 147H — —
8 - 13 8 - 13
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
(3) Remote registers (RWw) and (RWr)

selected.
(a) Master station (RWw) remote device station (RWw)/local station (RWr)
1) Master station
The data to be sent to the remote register (RWw) of the remote device
station and the remote registers (RWr) of all local stations are stored.
Four words are used per station.
2) Local station
The data sent to the remote register (RWw) of the remote device
station can also be received.
Remote device station Local station

Address Remote register (RWw) Remote register (RWw) Remote register (RWr) Address
1E0H RWw 0 RWw 0 RWr 0 2E0H
For station 1E1H RWw 1 RWw 1 RWr 1 2E1H For station
number 1 1E2H RWw 2 RWw 2 RWr 2 2E2H number 1
1E3H RWw 3 RWw 3 RWr 3 2E3H
1E4H RWw 4 RWr 4 2E4H
For station 1E5H RWw 5 RWr 5 2E5H For station
number 2 1E6H RWw 6 RWr 6 2E6H number 2
For station 1E9H RWw 9 RWr 9 2E9H For station
number 3 1EAH RWw A RWr A 2EAH number 3
1EBH RWw B RWr B 2EBH
1ECH RWw C RWr C 2ECH
For station 1EDH RWw D RWr D 2EDH For station
number 4 1EEH RWw E RWr E 2EEH number 4
1EFH RWw F RWr F 2EFH
1F0H RWw 10 RWr 10 2F0H
For station 1F1H RWw 11 RWr 11 2F1H For station
number 5 1F2H RWw 12 RWr 12 2F2H number 5
1F3H RWw 13 RWr 13 2F3H
to to to to
2DCH RWw FC RWr FC 3DCH

For station 2DDH RWw FD RWr FD 3DDH For station
number 64 2DEH RWw FE RWr FE 3DEH number 64
2DFH RWw FF RWr FF 3DFH
8 - 14 8 - 14
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
(b) Master station (RWr) ← remote device station (RWr)/local station (RWw)
1) Master station
The send data from the remote register (RWr) of the remote device
station and the remote register (RWw) of the local station is stored.
2) Local station
Data is sent to the master station and other local stations by storing it
in the address corresponding to the host station number.
Data in the remote register (RWr) of the remote device station can also
be received.
Remote device station Local station

Address Remote register (RWr) Remote register (RWr) Remote register (RWw) Address
2E0H RWr 0 RWr 0 RWw 0 1E0H
For station 2E1H RWr 1 RWr 1 RWw 1 1E1H For station
number 1 2E2H RWr 2 RWr 2 RWw 2 1E2H number 1
2E3H RWr 3 RWr 3 RWw 3 1E3H
2E4H RWr 4 RWw 4 1E4H
For station 2E5H RWr 5 RWw 5 1E5H For station
number 2 2E6H RWr 6 RWw 6 1E6H number 2
For station 2E9H RWr 9 RWw 9 1E9H For station
number 3 2EAH RWr A RWw A 1EAH number 3
2EBH RWr B RWw B 1EBH
2ECH RWr C RWw C 1ECH
For station 2EDH RWr D RWw D 1EDH For station
number 4 2EEH RWr E RWw E 1EEH number 4
2EFH RWr F RWw F 1EFH
2F0H RWr 10 RWw 10 1F0H
For station 2F1H RWr 11 RWw 11 1F1H For station
number 5 2F2H RWr 12 RWw 12 1F2H number 5
2F3H RWr 13 RWw 13 1F3H
to to to to
3DCH RWr FC RWw FC 2DCH

For station 3DDH RWr FD RWw FD 2DDH For station
number 64 3DEH RWr FE RWw FE 2DEH number 64
3DFH RWr FF RWw FF 2DFH
8 - 15 8 - 15
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer memory
addresses.
[Master station]
1 2E0H to 2E3H 14 314H to 317H 27 348H to 34BH 40 37CH to 37FH 53 3B0H to 3B3H
2 2E4H to 2E7H 15 318H to 31BH 28 34CH to 34FH 41 380H to 383H 54 3B4H to 3B7H
3 2E8H to 2EBH 16 31CH to 31FH 29 350H to 353H 42 384H to 387H 55 3B8H to 3BBH
4 2ECH to 2EFH 17 320H to 323H 30 354H to 357H 43 388H to 38BH 56 3BCH to 3BFH
5 2F0H to 2F3H 18 324H to 327H 31 358H to 35BH 44 38CH to 38FH 57 3C0H to 3C3H
6 2F4H to 2F7H 19 328H to 32BH 32 35CH to 35FH 45 390H to 393H 58 3C4H to 3C7H
7 2F8H to 2FBH 20 32CH to 32FH 33 360H to 363H 46 394H to 397H 59 3C8H to 3CBH
8 2FCH to 2FFH 21 330H to 333H 34 364H to 367H 47 398H to 39BH 60 3CCH to 3CFH
9 300H to 303H 22 334H to 337H 35 368H to 36BH 48 39CH to 39FH 61 3D0H to 3D3H
10 304H to 307H 23 338H to 33BH 36 36CH to 36FH 49 3A0H to 3A3H 62 3D4H to 3D7H
11 308H to 30BH 24 33CH to 33FH 37 370H to 373H 50 3A4H to 3A7H 63 3D8H to 3DBH
12 30CH to 30FH 25 340H to 343H 38 374H to 377H 51 3A8H to 3ABH 64 3DCH to 3DFH
13 310H to 313H 26 344H to 347H 39 378H to 37BH 52 3ACH to 3AFH — —
[Local station]
1 1E0H to 1E3H 14 214H to 217H 27 248H to 24BH 40 27CH to 27FH 53 2B0H to 2B3H
2 1E4H to 1E7H 15 218H to 21BH 28 24CH to 24FH 41 280H to 283H 54 2B4H to 2B7H
3 1E8H to 1EBH 16 21CH to 21FH 29 250H to 253H 42 284H to 287H 55 2B8H to 2BBH
4 1ECH to 1EFH 17 220H to 223H 30 254H to 257H 43 288H to 28BH 56 2BCH to 2BFH
5 1F0H to 1F3H 18 224H to 227H 31 258H to 25BH 44 28CH to 28FH 57 2C0H to 2C3H
6 1F4H to 1F7H 19 228H to 22BH 32 25CH to 25FH 45 290H to 293H 58 2C4H to 2C7H
7 1F8H to 1FBH 20 22CH to 22FH 33 260H to 263H 46 294H to 297H 59 2C8H to 2CBH
8 1FCH to 1FFH 21 230H to 233H 34 264H to 267H 47 298H to 29BH 60 2CCH to 2CFH
9 200H to 203H 22 234H to 237H 35 268H to 26BH 48 29CH to 29FH 61 2D0H to 2D3H
10 204H to 207H 23 238H to 23BH 36 26CH to 26FH 49 2A0H to 2A3H 62 2D4H to 2D7H
11 208H to 20BH 24 23CH to 23FH 37 270H to 273H 50 2A4H to 2A7H 63 2D8H to 2DBH
12 20CH to 20FH 25 240H to 243H 38 274H to 277H 51 2A8H to 2ABH 64 2DCH to 2DFH
13 210H to 213H 26 244H to 247H 39 278H to 27BH 52 2ACH to 2AFH — —
8 - 16 8 - 16
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
(4) Slave station offset, size information

In the remote net ver. 2 mode or remote net additional mode, the assignment of
RX/RY/RWw/RWr for the station numbers varies according to the expanded
cyclic setting and remote I/O station points setting.
(a) Offset
Stores the head buffer memory address of RX/RY/RWw/RWr assigned to
each station.
When 2 or more stations are occupied, values are stored into only the head
buffer memory address of the station number. (When station No. 1
occupies 2 stations, values are stored into the RX/RY/RWw/RWr offset and
size of station No. 1, and the RX/RY/RWw/RWr offset and size of station
No. 2 remains default.)
(b) Size
Stores the size of RX/RY/RWw/RWr assigned to each station in word unit.
When the size is less than 1 word, it is rounded up and 1 is stored. (When
the remote I/O station points setting is 8 points, 1 is stored.)
Refer to Section 4.4.13 for the remote I/O station points setting method.
For the reserved station, 0000H is stored.
Table 8.4 Correspondence between Station Numbers and

RX/RY/RWw/RWr Offset, Size Buffer Memory Addresses
Buffer memory address
Item Default (Hex.)
Hex. Dec.
3E0H 992 Station No. 1 RX offset 0000H
3E1H 993 Station No. 1 RX size 0000H
to to to —
45EH 1118 Station No. 64 RX offset 0000H
45FH 1119 Station No. 64 RX size 0000H
460H 1120 Station No. 1 RY offset 0000H
461H 1121 Station No. 1 RY size 0000H
to to to —
4DEH 1246 Station No. 64 RY offset 0000H
4DFH 1247 Station No. 64 RY size 0000H
4E0H 1248 Station No. 1 RWw offset 0000H
4E1H 1249 Station No. 1 RWw size 0000H
to to to —
55EH 1374 Station No. 64 RWw offset 0000H
55FH 1375 Station No. 64 RWw size 0000H
560H 1376 Station No. 1 RWr offset 0000H
561H 1377 Station No. 1 RWr size 0000H
to to to —
5DEH 1502 Station No. 64 RWr offset 0000H
5DFH 1503 Station No. 64 RWr size 0000H
8 - 17 8 - 17
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
Example) When the local station where expanded cyclic setting has been made and the remote I/O stations
where remote I/O station points setting has been made are connected
Local station
(Station number 1,
Occupies 2 stations,
Expanded cyclic setting:
Master station octuple)
(Station number 3, (Station number 4,
Occupies 1 station, Occupies 1 station,
Remote I/O station point Remote I/O station point
setting: 8-point setting) setting: 8-point setting)
Buffer memory name Value Description

Station No. 1 RX offset 4000H Head buffer memory address of RX of station No. 1
Station No. 1 RX size 24 (18H) 384 (number of RX points) / 16 = 24 words
Station No. 2 RX offset 4000H As 2 stations are occupied, the area of station No. 1 is checked.
Station No. 2 RX size 0 (default) As 2 stations are occupied, the area of station No. 1 is checked.
Though the lower 8 bits of the buffer memory address 4018H are the corresponding size of
Station No. 3 RX size 1 (1H)
RX of station No. 3, 1 is stored since less than 1 word is rounded up.
Though the upper 8 bits of the buffer memory address 4018H are the corresponding size of
Station No. 4 RX size 1 (1H)
RX of station No. 4, 1 is stored since less than 1 word is rounded up.
Station No. 1 RY offset 4200H Head buffer memory address of RY of station No. 1
Station No. 1 RY size 24 (18H) 384 (number of RY points) / 16 = 24 words
Station No. 2 RY offset 4000H As 2 stations are occupied, the area of station No. 1 is checked.
Station No. 2 RY size 0 (default) As 2 stations are occupied, the area of station No. 1 is checked.
Though the lower 8 bits of the buffer memory address 4218H are the corresponding size of
Station No. 3 RY size 1 (1H)
RY of station No. 3, 1 is stored since less than 1 word is rounded up.
Though the upper 8 bits of the buffer memory address 4218H are the corresponding size of
Station No. 4 RY size 1 (18H)
RY of station No. 4, 1 is stored since less than 1 word is rounded up.
Station No. 1 RWw offset 4400H Head buffer memory address of RWw of station No. 1
Station No. 1 RWw size 64 (40H) 2 (number of occupied stations) 32 (expanded cyclic setting) = 64
Station No. 2 RWw offset 4400H As 2 stations are occupied, the area of station No. 1 is checked.
Station No. 2 RWw size 0 (default) As 2 stations are occupied, the area of station No. 1 is checked.
Station No. 3 RWw size 0 (default) Buffer memory size of RWw of station No. 3
Station No. 4 RWw size 0 (default) Buffer memory size of RWw of station No. 4
Station No. 1 RWr offset 4C00H Head buffer memory address of RWr of station No. 1
Station No. 1 RWr size 64 (40H) 2 (number of occupied stations) 32 (expanded cyclic setting) = 64
Station No. 2 RWr offset 4C00H As 2 stations are occupied, the area of station No. 1 is checked.
Station No. 2 RWr size 0 (default) As 2 stations are occupied, the area of station No. 1 is checked.
Station No. 3 RWr size 0 (default) Buffer memory size of RWr of station No. 3
Station No. 4 RWr size 0 (default) Buffer memory size of RWr of station No. 4
8 - 18 8 - 18
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
(5) Link special relays (SB)

The link special relays store the data link status using bit ON/OFF data.
Buffer memory addresses 5E0H to 5FFH correspond to link special relays
SB0000 to SB01FF.
For details on the link special relays (SB0000 to SB01FF), see Section 8.4.1.
The following table shows the relationship between buffer memory addresses
5E0H to 5FFH and link special relays SB0000 to SB01FF.
Address b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

5E0H F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5E1H 1F 1E 1D 1C 1B 1A 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
5E2H 2F 2E 2D 2C 2B 2A 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
5E3H 3F 3E 3D 3C 3B 3A 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30
5E4H 4F 4E 4D 4C 4B 4A 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40
5E5H 5F 5E 5D 5C 5B 5A 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50
5E6H 6F 6E 6D 6C 6B 6A 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60
5E7H 7F 7E 7D 7C 7B 7A 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70
5E8H 8F 8E 8D 8C 8B 8A 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80
5E9H 9F 9E 9D 9C 9B 9A 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90
5EAH AF AE AD AC AB AA A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
5EBH BF BE BD BC BB BA B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
5ECH CF CE CD CC CB CA C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
5EDH DF DE DD DC DB DA D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
5EEH EF EE ED EC EB EA E9 E8 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0
5EFH FF FE FD FC FB FA F9 F8 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
5F0H 10F 10E 10D 10C 10B 10A 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100
5F1H 11F 11E 11D 11C 11B 11A 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110
5F2H 12F 12E 12D 12C 12B 12A 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120
5F3H 13F 13E 13D 13C 13B 13A 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130
5F4H 14F 14E 14D 14C 14B 14A 149 148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140
5F5H 15F 15E 15D 15C 15B 15A 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150
5F6H 16F 16E 16D 16C 16B 16A 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160
5F7H 17F 17E 17D 17C 17B 17A 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170
5F8H 18F 18E 18D 18C 18B 18A 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180
5F9H 19F 19E 19D 19C 19B 19A 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190
5FAH 1AF 1AE 1AD 1AC 1AB 1AA 1A9 1A8 1A7 1A6 1A5 1A4 1A3 1A2 1A1 1A0
5FBH 1BF 1BE 1BD 1BC 1BB 1BA 1B9 1B8 1B7 1B6 1B5 1B4 1B3 1B2 1B1 1B0
5FCH 1CF 1CE 1CD 1CC 1CB 1CA 1C9 1C8 1C7 1C6 1C5 1C4 1C3 1C2 1C1 1C0
5FDH 1DF 1DE 1DD 1DC 1DB 1DA 1D9 1D8 1D7 1D6 1D5 1D4 1D3 1D2 1D1 1D0
5FEH 1EF 1EE 1ED 1EC 1EB 1EA 1E9 1E8 1E7 1E6 1E5 1E4 1E3 1E2 1E1 1E0
5FFH 1FF 1FE 1FD 1FC 1FB 1FA 1F9 1F8 1F7 1F6 1F5 1F4 1F3 1F2 1F1 1F0
8 - 19 8 - 19
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
(6) Link special registers (SW)

The link special registers store the data link status using word data.
Buffer memory addresses 600H to 7FFH correspond to link special registers
SW0000 to SW01FF.
For more details on the link special registers (SW0000 to SW01FF), see Section
8.4.2.
(7) Random access buffer

The random access buffer stores any data to be sent to other stations.
The reading and writing of data are performed using transient transmission.
(8) Communication buffer

The communication buffers stores the send and receive data when performing
transient transmission (communication using the communication buffers)
between the local stations, standby master station, and intelligent device stations.
The communication buffer sizes for the local station, standby master station, and
intelligent device station are set with network parameters.
For more details on the communication buffer size settings, see Section 6.2.
[Example of communication using the communication buffers]

Master station Local station (first module)
CPU CPU
Buffer memory
1)
Device memory
RIRD
1)
Receive 2)
buffer for the
first module 2)
1) Accesses the buffer memory of the local station or the device memory of the
CPU.
2) Stores the data specified by the control data in the receive buffer for the first
module.
Master station Local station (first module)
CPU CPU
2) Buffer memory
1) Send buffer
Device memory
RIWT for the first
module 2)
1) Stores the data to be written in the buffer memory of the local station or to the
device memory of the CPU in the send buffer for the first module.
2) Accesses the buffer memory of the local station or the device memory of the
CPU.
8 - 20 8 - 20
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
(9) Automatic update buffer

The automatic update buffer stores automatic update data when performing
transient transmission (communication using the automatic update buffer) with
the AJ65BT-R2.
The automatic update buffer size of the AJ65BT-R2 is specified by a network
parameter.
For more details on the automatic update buffer size settings, see Section 6.2.
[Communication example using the automatic update buffer]
Master station AJ65BT-R2 (first module)
CPU
Buffer memory
1) Automatic
RIFR Automatic update update
Automatic
2) update buffer
D buffer for memory
the first
module
1) Accesses the automatic update buffer for the first module.

2) Stores the data specified by the control data in the CPU device.
For details on the automatic update timing, see AJ65BT-R2 Type RS-232C
Interface Module User's Manual.
8 - 21 8 - 21
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
(10) Ver.2 compatible remote input (RX) and Ver.2 compatible remote
output (RY)
selected.
(a) Master station remote I/O station/remote device station/local station
1) Master station
(RX) and local station (RY) is stored.
When 1 station is occupied, 2, 4 or 8 words are used. The number of
used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and
the number of occupied stations. (see Section 3.1)
2) Local station
Data to be sent to the master station is stored in the remote output
(RY) of the address corresponding to the host station number.
(RX) and other local station is stored.
When 1 station is occupied, any of 2 to 8 words are used. The number
of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and
(In the example below, RYEE and RYEF cannot be used.)
Remote I/O station
(Example) (Station number 1: Occupies 1 station, Local station
Remote I/O station point setting: (Station number 2: Occupies 4 stations,
Master station 16-point setting) Expanded cyclic setting: double)
Address Remote input (RX) Remote output (RY) Address

Station Station
4000H RX F to RX 0 X0F to X00 RY F to RY 0 4200H
number 1 number 1
4001H RX 1F to RX 10 RY 1F to RY 10 4201H
Station 4007H RX 7F to RX 70 RY 7F to RY 70 4207H Station

number 2 4008H RX 8F to RX 80 RY 8F to RY 80 4208H number 2
400AH RX AF to RX A0 RY AF to RY A0 420AH
400BH RX BF to RX B0 RY BF to RY B0 420BH
400CH RX CF to RX C0 RY CF to RY C0 420CH
400DH RX DF to RX D0 RY DF to RY D0 420DH
400EH RX ED to RX E0 RY ED to RY E0 420EH
to to to to
41FCH RX1FCF to RX1FC0 RY1FCF to RY1FC0 43FCH

41FDH RX1FDF to RX1FD0 RY1FDF to RY1FD0 43FDH
41FEH RX1FEF to RX1FE0 RY1FEF to RY1FE0 43FEH
41FFH RX1FFF to RX1FF0 RY1FFF to RY1FF0 43FFH
8 - 22 8 - 22
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
(b) Master station remote I/O station/remote device station/local station
1) Master station
The output status to the remote I/O station, remote device station (RY)
and all local stations (RX) is stored.
When 1 station is occupied, 2, 4 or 8 words are used. The number of
used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and
2) Local station
The data received from the remote I/O station, remote device station
(RY) and master station (RY) is stored.
When 1 station is occupied, any of 2 to 8 words are used. The number
of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and
(In the example below, RYEE and RYEF cannot be used.)
Remote I/O station
(Example) (Station number 1: Occupies 1 station, Local station
Remote I/O station point setting: (Station number 2: Occupies 4 stations,
Master station 16-point setting) Expanded cyclic setting: double)
Address Remote output (RY) Remote input (RX) Address

Station Station
4200H RY F to RY 0 X0F to X00 RX F to RX 0 4000H
number 1 number 1
4201H RY 1F to RY 10 RX 1F to RX 10 4001H
Station 4207H RY 7F to RY 70 RX 7F to RX 70 4007H Station

number 2 4208H RY 8F to RY 80 RX 8F to RX 80 4008H number 2
420AH RY AF to RY A0 RX AF to RX A0 400AH
420BH RY BF to RY B0 RX BF to RX B0 400BH
420CH RY CF to RY C0 RX CF to RX C0 400CH
420DH RY DF to RY D0 RX DF to RX D0 400DH
420EH RY ED to RY E0 RX ED to RX E0 400EH
to to to to
43FCH RY1FCF to RY1FC0 RX1FCF to RX1FC0 41FCH

43FDH RY1FDF to RY1FD0 RX1FDF to RX1FD0 41FDH
43FEH RY1FEF to RY1FE0 RX1FEF to RX1FE0 41FEH
43FFH RY1FFF to RY1FF0 RX1FFF to RX1FF0 41FFH
8 - 23 8 - 23
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
(11) Ver.2 compatible remote registers (RWw) and (RWr)

selected.
(a) Master station (RWw) remote device station (RWw)/local station (RWr)
1) Master station
The data to be sent to the remote register (RWw) of the remote device
station and the remote registers (RWr) of all local stations are stored.
When 1 station is occupied, any of 4 to 32 words are used. The
number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic
setting and the number of occupied stations. (see Section 3.1)
2) Local station
The data sent to the remote register (RWw) of the remote device
station can also be received.
(Example) Remote device station Local station

(Station number 1: Occupies 1 station, (Station number 2: Occupies 1 station,
Master station Expanded cyclic setting: single) Expanded cyclic setting: quadruple)
Address Remote register (RWw) Remote register (RWw) Remote register (RWr) Address
4400H RWw 0 RWw 0 RWr 0 4C00H
Station 4401H RWw 1 RWw 1 RWr 1 4C01H Station
number 1 4402H RWw 2 RWw 2 RWr 2 4C02H number 1
4403H RWw 3 RWw 3 RWr 3 4C03H
4404H RWw 4 RWr 4 4C04H
4405H RWw 5 RWr 5 4C05H
4406H RWw 6 RWr 6 4C06H
4407H RWw 7 RWr 7 4C07H
4408H RWw 8 RWr 8 4C08H
4409H RWw 9 RWr 9 4C09H
440AH RWw A RWr A 4C0AH
440BH RWw B RWr B 4C0BH
Station Station
number 2 440CH RWw C RWr C 4C0CH number 2
440DH RWw D RWr D 4C0DH
440EH RWw E RWr E 4C0EH
440FH RWw F RWr F 4C0FH
4410H RWw 10 RWr 10 4C10H
4411H RWw 11 RWr 11 4C11H
4412H RWw 12 RWr 12 4C12H
4413H RWw 13 RWr 13 4C13H
to to to to
4BFCH RWw 7FC RWr 7FC 53FCH

4BFDH RWw 7FD RWr 7FD 53FDH
4BFEH RWw 7FE RWr 7FE 53FEH
4BFFH RWw 7FF RWr 7FF 53FFH
8 - 24 8 - 24
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
(b) Master station (RWr) ← remote device station (RWr)/local station (RWw)
1) Master station
The send data from the remote register (RWr) of the remote device
station and the remote register (RWw) of the local station is stored.
2) Local station
Data is sent to the master station and other local stations by storing it
in the address corresponding to the host station number.
Data in the remote register (RWr) of the remote device station can also
be received.
(Example) Remote device station Local station

(Station number 1: Occupies 1 station, (Station number 2: Occupies 1 station,
Master station Expanded cyclic setting: single) Expanded cyclic setting: quadruple)
Address Remote register (RWr) Remote register (RWr) Remote register (RWw) Address
4C00H RWr 0 RWr 0 RWw 0 4400H
Station 4C01H RWr 1 RWr 1 RWw 1 4401H Station
number 1 4C02H RWr 2 RWr 2 RWw 2 4402H number 1
4C03H RWr 3 RWr 3 RWw 3 4403H
4C04H RWr 4 RWw 4 4404H
4C05H RWr 5 RWw 5 4405H
4C06H RWr 6 RWw 6 4406H
4C07H RWr 7 RWw 7 4407H
4C08H RWr 8 RWw 8 4408H
4C09H RWr 9 RWw 9 4409H
4C0AH RWr A RWw A 440AH
4C0BH RWr B RWw B 440BH
Station Station
number 2 4C0CH RWr C RWw C 440CH number 2
4C0DH RWr D RWw D 440DH
4C0EH RWr E RWw E 440EH
4C0FH RWr F RWw F 440FH
4C10H RWr 10 RWw 10 4410H
4C11H RWr 11 RWw 11 4411H
4C12H RWr 12 RWw 12 4412H
4C13H RWr 13 RWw 13 4413H
to to to to
53FCH RWr 7FC RWw 7FC 4BFCH

53FDH RWr 7FD RWw 7FD 4BFDH
53FEH RWr 7FE RWw 7FE 4BFEH
53FFH RWr 7FF RWw 7FF 4BFFH
8 - 25 8 - 25
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
8.4 Link Special Relays and Registers (SB/SW)
The data link status can be checked with bit data (link special relays: SB) and word
data (link special registers: SW).
The SB and SW represent the information in the buffer memory of the master/local
module, which is used by reading to the device specified in an automatic refresh
parameter.
• Link special relays (SB) : Buffer memory addresses 5E0H to 5FFH
• Link special registers (SW): Buffer memory addresses 600H to 7FFH
8.4.1 Link special relays (SB)
Link special relays SB0000 to SB001F are turned ON/OFF by the sequence program,
and SB0020 to SB01FF are automatically turned ON/OFF.
The values in parentheses in the number column indicate the buffer memory address.
When the standby master station is controlling the data link, the availability of the link's
special relays is basically identical to that of the master station.
When the standby master station is operating as a local station, the availability of the
link's special relays is identical to that of a local station.
For the correspondence with the buffer memory, see Section 8.3.2 (5).
Table 8.5 Link special relay list (1/5)

Availability
( : Available, : Not available)
Online
Offline
Restarts the data link that had been stopped by SB0002.
SB0000
Data link restart OFF: Restart not instructed
(5E0H, b0)
ON : Restart instructed
Instructs to perform cyclic data refresh after the data link control is
SB0001 transferred to the standby master station.
standby master
(5E0H, b1) OFF: Not instructed
switching
ON : Instructed
Stops the host data link.
However, when the master station executes this, the entire system
SB0002
Data link stop will stop.
(5E0H, b2)
OFF: No stop instruction
ON : Stop instructed
Refresh instruction Instructs to refresh cyclic data after changing parameters by the
SB0003 when changing RLPASET instruction.
(5E0H, b3) parameters by the OFF: Not instructed (stop refreshing)
dedicated instruction ON : Instructed (start/continue refreshing)
Establishes the stations specified by SW0003 to SW0007 as
SB0004 Temporary error temporary error invalid stations.
(5E0H, b4) invalid request OFF: Not requested
ON : Requested
Cancels the temporary error invalid status of stations specified by
Temporary error
SB0005 SW0003 to SW0007.
invalid canceling
(5E0H, b5) OFF: Not requested
request
ON : Requested
Executes line tests for the stations specified by SW0008.
SB0008
Line test request OFF: Not requested
(5E0H, b8)
ON : Requested
Reads the parameter setting information for the actual system
SB0009 Parameter information configuration.
(5E0H, b9) read request OFF: Normal
ON : Abnormal
8 - 26 8 - 26
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Availability
Online
Offline
Forcefully transfers the data link control from the standby master
station that is controlling the data link to the standby master station in
SB000C Forced master 2
case the standby master station becomes faulty.
(5E0H, b12) switching
OFF: Not requested
ON : Requested
Starts the initial processing using the information registered during the
initialization procedure registration.
SB000D While SB000D is on, the refresh of the remote input/output and 1
initialization procedure
(5E0H, b13) remote registers stops.
registration instruction
OFF: Not instructed
ON : Instructed
Indicates the module access (module operation) status.
SB0020
Module status OFF: Normal (Module is operating normally)
(5E2H, b0)
ON : Abnormal (Module error has occurred)
Indicates the data link restart instruction acknowledgment status.
SB0040 Data link restart
(5E4H, b0) acceptance
ON : Startup instruction acknowledged
Indicates the data link restart instruction acknowledgment completion
SB0041 Data link restart status.
ON : Startup complete
Refresh instruction Indicates whether or not the refresh instruction at standby master
SB0042 acknowledgment switching have been acknowledged.
(5E4H, b2) status at standby OFF: Not executed
master switching ON : Instruction acknowledged
Refresh instruction Indicates whether or not the refresh instruction at standby master
SB0043 complete status at switching is complete.
(5E4H, b3) standby master OFF: Not executed
switching ON : Switching complete
Indicates the data link stop instruction acknowledgment status.
SB0044 Data link stop
(5E4H, b4) acceptance
ON : Stop instruction acknowledged
Indicates the data link stop instruction acknowledgment completion
SB0045 Data link stop status.
ON : Stop complete
Indicates whether the forced master switching (SB000C) signal can
Forced master
SB0046 be executed or not. 2
switching
(5E4H, b6) OFF: Cannot be executed.
executable status
ON: Can be executed.
Indicates the acknowledgment status of remote station temporary
Temporary error
SB0048 error invalid instruction.
invalid acceptance
(5E4H, b8) OFF: Not executed
status
ON : Instruction acknowledged
Indicates the acknowledgment completion status of remote station
Temporary error temporary error invalid instruction.
SB0049
invalid complete OFF: Not executed
(5E4H, b9)
status ON : Temporary error invalid station established/Specified station
number is invalid
Temporary error Indicates the acknowledgment status of remote station temporary
SB004A invalid canceling error invalid cancel instruction.
(5E4H, b10) acknowledgment OFF: Not executed
status ON : Instruction acknowledged
Indicates the acknowledgment completion status of remote station
Temporary error
SB004B temporary error invalid cancel instruction.
invalid canceling
complete status
ON : Temporary error invalid station cancellation complete
Indicates the line test request acknowledgment status.
SB004C Line test acceptance
OFF: Not executed
(5E4H, b12) status
1: Can be used for the master station only.

2: Can be used for the standby master station only.
8 - 27 8 - 27
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Availability
Online
Offline
Indicates the line test completion status.
SB004D Line test complete
OFF: Not executed
(5E4H, b13) status
ON : Test complete
Indicates the parameter information read request acknowledgment
Parameter information
SB004E status.
read acknowledgment
status
Indicates the completion status of the parameter information read
Parameter information
SB004F request.
read completion
status
ON : Test complete
Indicates the offline test execution status.
SB0050
Offline test status OFF: Not executed
(5E5H, b0)
ON : In progress
Indicates the acknowledgment status of the standby master station
Master switching
SB005A when it has received a master switching request from the line.
request
(5E5H, b10) OFF: Not acknowledged
acknowledgment
ON : Request acknowledged
Indicates whether or not the switching from the standby master
SB005B Master switching station to master station is complete.
(5E5H, b11) request complete OFF: Not complete
ON : Complete
Indicates whether or not a forced master switching request has been
Forced master
SB005C acknowledged. 2
switching request
(5E5H, b12) OFF: Not acknowledged
acknowledgment
Indicates whether or not a forced master switching request is
Forced master
SB005D complete. 2
switching request
(5E5H, b13) OFF: Not complete
complete
ON : Complete
Execution status of Indicates the execution status of the initialization procedure.
SB005E 1
remote device station OFF: Not executed
(5E5H, b14)
initialization procedure ON : Being executed
Indicates the completion status of the initialization procedure
Completion status of
SB005F execution. 1
remote device station
ON : Complete
Indicates the mode setting status of the transmission rate/mode
SB0060 setting switch for the host.
Host mode
(5E6H, b0) OFF: Online
ON : Other than online
Indicates the station type of the host.
SB0061
Host type OFF: Master station (station number 0)
(5E6H, b1)
ON : Local station (station numbers 1 to 64)
Indicates whether or not the standby master station setting exists for
SB0062 Host standby master the host.
(5E6H, b2) station setting status OFF: No setting
ON : Setting exists
Indicates the input status setting from a data link faulty station of the
Input data status of
SB0065 host.
host data link faulty
(5E6H, b5) OFF: Clear
station
ON : Retain

8 - 28 8 - 28
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Availability
Online
Offline
Indicates the setting status of host occupied stations.
SB0066 Number of
(5E6H, b6) SB0066 SB0067
occupied station
Number of host
1 station OFF OFF
occupied stations
2 stations OFF ON
SB0067 3 stations ON ON
(5E6H, b7) 4 stations ON OFF
Indicates the switch setting status.

SB006A
Switch setting status OFF: Normal
(5E6H, b10)
ON : Setting error exists (the error code is stored in SW006A)
Indicates the parameter setting status.
SB006D Parameter setting
OFF: Normal
(5E6H, b13) status
ON : Setting error exists (the error code is stored in SW0068)
Indicates the host data link operation status.
SB006E Host station operation
OFF: Being executed
(5E6H, b14) status
ON : Not executed
Indicates the data link status.
SB0070 Master station
OFF: Data link control by the master station
ON : Data link control by the standby master station
Indicates whether or not a standby master station is present.
SB0071 Standby master
OFF: Not present
(5E7H, b1) station information
ON : Present
Indicates the scan mode setting information.
SB0072 Scan mode setting
OFF: Asynchronous mode
ON : Synchronous mode
Indicates the operation specification status using a parameter when
Operation
SB0073 the CPU is down.
specification when
(5E7H, b3) OFF: Stop
CPU is down status
ON : Continue
Indicates the reserved station specification status using a parameter.
SB0074 Reserved station OFF: No specification
(5E7H, b4) specified status ON : Specification exists (information is stored in SW0074 to
SW0077)
Indicates the error invalid station specification status using a
parameter.
SB0075 Error invalid station
OFF: No specification
(5E7H, b5) specified status
ON : Specification exists (information is stored in SW0078 to
SW007B)
Temporary error Indicates whether there is a temporary error invalid station setting.
SB0076
invalid station setting OFF: No setting
(5E7H, b6)
information ON : Setting exists (information is stored in SW007C to SW007F)
Indicates the parameter receive status from the master station.
SB0077 Parameter receive
OFF: Reception complete
(5E7H, b7) status
ON : Reception not complete
Detects changes to the host setting switch during data linking.
SB0078 Host station switch
OFF: No changes detected
(5E7H, b8) change detection
ON : Changes detected
Indicates whether the "Type" setting of the network parameters is set
Master station return
SB0079 to "Master station" or "Master station (Duplex function)."
specification
(5E7H, b9) OFF: Master station
information
ON : Master station (Duplex function)
8 - 29 8 - 29
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Availability
Online
Offline
Indicates whether the host operates as the master or standby master
Host master/standby
SB007B station.
master operation
(5E7H, b11) OFF: Operates as the master station (controlling data link)
status
ON : Operates as the standby master station (standby)
Slave station
Indicates the parameter-set slave station refresh/compulsory clear
refresh/compulsory
SB007C setting status in case of PLC CPU STOP.
clear setting status in
(5E7H, b12) OFF: Refresh
case of PLC CPU
ON : Clears compulsorily
STOP
Indicates the communication status between remote/local/intelligent
device/standby master stations.
SB0080 Other station data link
3 OFF: All stations normal
(5E8H, b0) status
ON : Faulty station exists (information is stored in SW0080 to
SW0083)
Other station Indicates the occurrence of a watchdog timer error in other stations.
SB0081
watchdog timer error OFF: No error
(5E8H, b1)
status ON : Error occurrence.
Indicates the fuse blown occurrence status at other stations.
SB0082 Other station fuse (SW0088 to SW008B)
(5E8H, b2) blown status OFF: No error
ON : Error occurrence.
Detects changes in setting switches of other stations during data
SB0083 Other station switch linking.
(5E8H, b3) change status OFF: No change
ON : Change detected.
Indicates the line status of the host.
SB0090
Host line status OFF: Normal
(5E9H, b0)
ON : Abnormal (line disconnection)
Indicates whether there is a transient transmission error.
SB0094 Transient
OFF: No error
(5E9H, b4) transmission status
ON : Error occurrence.
Master station Indicates the transient transmission status of the master station.
SB0095
transient transmission OFF: Normal
(5E9H, b5)
status ON : Abnormal
Stores the test result of Line test 1/Line test 2.
SB00B4 Standby master
OFF: Normal
(5EBH, b4) station test result
ON : Abnormal
3: The other station data link status (SB0080) takes up to 6 seconds to turn on after a slave station connected
to the master/local station becomes faulty.
The time to turn ON differs according to the system configuration, faulty status or other conditions.
8 - 30 8 - 30
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
8.4.2 Link special registers (SW)
Data is stored in the link special registers SW000 to SW001F by the sequence
program, and data is automatically stored in SW0020 to SW01FF. The values in
parentheses in the number column indicate the buffer memory addresses.
When the standby master station is controlling the data link, availability is basically
identical to that of the master station.
When the standby master station is operating as a local station, availability is identical
to that of a local station.
Table 8.6 Link special register list (1/8)

Availability
Online
Offline
Select whether multiple temporary error invalid stations are specified.
00 : Specifies multiple stations indicated by SW0004 to
Multiple temporary
SW0003 SW0007.
error invalid station
(603H) 01 to 64: Specifies a single station from 1 to 64.
specification
(The specified number indicates the station number of a
temporary error invalid station.)
Specifies a temporary error invalid station.
0: Not specified as a temporary error invalid station
SW0004
1: Specified as a temporary error invalid station
(604H)
SW0005 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0

(605H) Temporary error
SW0004 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
invalid station
SW0006 SW0005 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
specification 3
(606H) SW0006 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW0007 SW0007 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
(607H)
Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers.
Sets the station for which line tests are executed.

SW0008 Line test station 0 : Entire system (executed for all stations)
(608H) setting 01 to 64 : Specified station only
Default value: 0
Sets the monitoring time when a dedicated instruction is used.
Default value: 10 (seconds)
SW0009 Monitoring time
Setting range: 0 to 360 (seconds)
(609H) setting
The monitoring time of 360 seconds will be used if a value outside
of the above setting range is specified.
Sets the CPU response monitoring time when the CPU is accessed
with a dedicated instruction.
SW000A CPU monitoring time Default value: 90 (seconds)
(60AH) setting Setting range: 0 to 3600 (seconds)
The monitoring time of 3600 seconds will be used if a value outside
of the above setting range is specified.
Indicates the module status.
SW0020
Module status 0 : Normal
(620H)
Stores the execution result of the data link restart instruction with
SW0041 SB0000.
Data link restart result
(641H) 0 : Normal
Indicates the execution result of refresh instruction at standby master
SW0043 switching.
standby master
(643H) 0 : Normal
switching result
3: Only the bit for the first station number is turned on.
8 - 31 8 - 31
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Availability
Online
Offline
Stores the execution result of the data-link stop instruction with
SW0045 SB0002.
Data link stop result
(645H) 0 : Normal
Indicates the execution result of temporary error invalid station
Temporary error
SW0049 specification.
invalid station
(649H) 0 : Normal
specification result
Temporary error Indicates the execution result of the temporary error invalid station
SW004B invalid station specification cancellation.
(64BH) specification cancel 0 : Normal
result Other than 0: Stores the error code (see Section 13.3).
Indicates the execution result of the line test.
SW004D
Line test result 0 : Normal
(64DH)
Indicates the execution result of the parameter setting test.
SW004F Parameter setting test
0 : Normal
(64FH) result
Stores the system configuration check result when a new station is
Automatic CC-Link
SW0052 added to a system using an automatic CC-Link startup.
startup execution
(652H) 0: Normal
result
Other than 0: Stores the error code (see Section 13.3.)
Stores the details of the LED display status.
0: OFF
1: ON
b15 b14b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

0 0 0 0 0 0
LINE(ERROR) : Cable is disconnected or the

transmission path is affected by
noise.
TIME(ERROR): Responses cannot be received from
any station due to the cable being
SW0058 Detailed LED display disconnected or the transmission
path being affected by noise.
(658H) status PRM(ERROR) : Invalid parameter value
M/S(ERROR) : Duplicate master station on the
same line
SW(ERROR) : Error in switch settings
LOCAL : Operating as a local station
S MST : Operating as the standby master station
MST : Operating as the master station
ERR. : Error occurrence
RUN : The module is operating normally.
Stores the contents of the transmission rate setting.

0: Cancel
1: Set
b15 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 to 0 0 0 0
SW0059 Transmission rate
10 Mbps
(659H) setting
5 Mbps
2.5 Mbps
625 kbps
156 kbps
8 - 32 8 - 32
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Availability
Online
Offline
Stores the execution result of the forced master switching instruction
Forced master
SW005D with SB000C. 2
switching instruction
(65DH) 0 : Normal
Remote device station Stores the execution result of the initialization procedure registration
SW005F initialization procedure instruction with SB000B. 1
(65FH) registration instruction 0 : Normal
Stores the mode setting status.
0: Online (Remote net mode)
1: Online (Remote I/O net mode)
SW0060
Mode setting status 2: Offline
(660H) 3: Line test 1
4: Line test 2
6: Hardware test
Stores the station number of the host that is currently in operation.
SW0061
Host station number 0 : Master station
(661H) 1 to 64: Local station
Stores the operation setting status of the module.
b15 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 to 0 0 0 0
Station type
0: Master station/local station
1: Standby master station
(Valid only when b1 is 0)
Master station duplex function
0: Master station duplex function invalid
1: Master station duplex function valid
Input status from the data
link faulty station
0: Clear
1: Hold
SW0062 Module operating Number of occupied stations
00: Occupies 1 station
(662H) status 10: Occupies 2 stations
11: Occupies 3 stations
01: Occupies 4 stations
Master station/local station
start by dedicated instruction
0: Start by CPU parameter
1: Start by dedicated instruction
Slave station refresh/compulsory
clear setting in case of PLC CPU STOP
0: Refresh
1: Clears compulsorily
00: single
01: double
10: quadruple
11: octuple
Indicates the retry count setting information when there is an error
SW0064 No. of retries
response.
(664H) information 1 to 7 (times)
Indicates the setting information for the number of automatic return
SW0065 No. of automatic
stations during one link scan.
(665H) return stations 1 to 10 (stations)
SW0066 Delay timer
Indicates the delay time setting information.
(666H) information
Stores the parameter information area to be used.
0H: CPU built-in parameters
SW0067
Parameter information 3H: Dedicated instruction (parameter setting with the RLPASET
(667H) instruction and data link startup.)
DH: Default parameters (automatically starts CC-Link)
Stores the parameter setting status.
SW0068
Host parameter status 0 : Normal
(668H) Other than 0: Stores the error code (see Section 13.3).
Stores the duplicate station number status and parameter matching of
each station.
SW0069 4 0 : Normal
Loading status Other than 0: Stores the error code (see Section 13.3).
(669H)
Details are stored in SW0098 to 9B and SW009C to
9F.
4: This register checks and stores the status only at link startup.
8 - 33 8 - 33
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Availability
Online
Offline
Stores the switch setting status.
SW006A
Switch setting status 0 : Normal
(66AH)
SW006D
Max. link scan time Stores the maximum value of the link scan time (in 1 ms units).
(66DH)
SW006E
Current link scan time Stores the current value of the link scan time (in 1 ms units).
(66EH)
SW006F
Min. link scan time Stores the minimum value of the link scan time (in 1 ms units).
(66FH)
SW0070 Total number of Stores the final station number set in the parameter.
(670H) stations 1 to 64 (stations)
Stores the maximum station number (setting of the station number
SW0071 Max. communication
setting switch) that is performing data link.
(671H) station number
1 to 64 (stations)
SW0072 Number of connected
Stores the number of modules that are performing data link.
(672H) modules
SW0073 Standby master Stores the station number of the standby master station.
(673H) station number 1 to 64 (stations)
Stores the reserved station setting status.
0: Not reserved station
SW0074
1: Reserved station
(674H)
SW0075 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0

(675H) Reserved station SW0074 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
3
SW0076 specified status SW0075 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
(676H) SW0076 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW0077 SW0077 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
(677H)
Stores the error invalid station setting status.

0: Other than error invalid station
SW0078
1: Error invalid station
(678H)
SW0079 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0

(679H) Error invalid station SW0078 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
3
SW007A specified status SW0079 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
(67AH) SW007A 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW007B SW007B 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
(67BH)
8 - 34 8 - 34
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Availability
Online
Offline
Indicates the temporary error invalid status.
0: Normal status
SW007C
1: Temporary error invalid status
(67CH)
SW007D b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0

(67DH) Temporary error SW007C 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
6
SW007E invalid status SW007D 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
(67EH) SW007E 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW007F SW007F 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
(67FH)
Stores the data link status of each station.

0: Normal
SW0080
1: Data link error occurrence
(680H)
SW0081 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0

(681H) Other station data link SW0080 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
6 8
SW0082 status SW0081 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
(682H) SW0082 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW0083 SW0083 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
(683H)
Indicates the watchdog timer error occurrence status.

0: No watchdog timer error
SW0084
1: Watchdog timer error occurrence
(684H)
SW0085 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0

Other station
(685H) SW0084 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
watchdog timer error
SW0086 3 SW0085 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
occurrence status
(686H) SW0086 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW0087 SW0087 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
(687H)
6: Bits for the number of occupied stations are turned on.
8: The other station data link status (SW0080 to SW0083) takes up to 6 seconds to turn on after a slave
station connected to the master/local station becomes faulty.
The time to turn ON differs according to the system configuration, faulty status or other conditions.
8 - 35 8 - 35
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Availability
Online
Offline
Stores the fuse blown occurrence status of each station.
0: Normal
SW0088
1: Abnormal
(688H)
SW0089 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0

(689H) Other station fuse SW0088 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
6
SW008A blown status SW0089 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
(68AH) SW008A 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW008B SW008B 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
(68BH)
Indicates the switch change status of other stations performing data

link.
SW008C 0: No change
(68CH) 1: Change occurred
SW008D
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
(68DH) Other station switch
3 SW008C 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
SW008E change status
SW008D 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
(68EH)
SW008E 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW008F
SW008F 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
(68FH)
Stores the line status.

SW0090
Line status 0: Normal
(690H)
1: Data link cannot be performed (disconnected)
Indicates the occurrence status of a transient transmission error.
0: No transient transmission error
SW0094
1: Transient transmission error occurrence
(694H)
SW0095 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0

Transient
(695H) SW0094 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
transmission
SW0096 status 3 SW0095 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
(696H) SW0096 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW0097 SW0097 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
(697H)
8 - 36 8 - 36
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Availability
Online
Offline
Stores the overlap status when the first station number of each
module is not overlapped.
SW0098 0: Normal
(698H) 1: Overlap station number (first station number only)
SW0099
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
(699H) Station number
7 SW0098 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
SW009A overlap status
SW0099 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
(69AH)
SW009A 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW009B
(69BH) SW009B 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
Stores the consistency status between the loaded station and the
parameter settings.
A matching error occurs in any of the following cases.
1) Station type mismatch
2) Number of occupied stations mismatch
3) Expanded cyclic setting mismatch
4) CC-Link compatible version mismatch
A matching error will not occur when installation parameter. (For
example, a matching error will not occur when a remote device
station is installed and the parameter setting is an intelligent
SW009C
device station.)
(69CH)
0: Normal
SW009D 1: Matching error
(69DH) Loading/parameter Example of matching error
7
SW009E consistency status
Installation Parameter
(69EH)
Remote device station Remote I/O station
SW009F
(69FH) Remote I/O station
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
SW009C 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
SW009D 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
SW009E 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW009F 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
Stores the line test 1 result.

SW00B4 0: Normal
(6B4H) 1: Abnormal
SW00B5 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0

(6B5H) 6 SW00B4 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
Line test 1 result
SW00B6 SW00B5 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
(6B6H)
SW00B6 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW00B7 SW00B7 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
(6B7H)
Stores the line test 1/line test 2 result.

SW00B8
Line test result 0 : Normal
(6B8H)

7: Only the bit for the first station number is turned on. In addition, these registers check and store the status
at link startup.
8 - 37 8 - 37
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Availability
Online
Offline
Indicates the slave stations compatible with CC-Link ver. 2.
SW0140 0: Ver.1compatible slave station
(740H) 1: Ver.2compatible slave station
SW0141 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0

(741H) Compatible CC-Link
SW0140 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
7
SW0142 ver. information
SW0141 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
(742H)
SW0142 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW0143 SW0143 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
(743H)
Stores the CC-Link version matching status of the parameters and

slave stations.
0: Normal
1: Matching error
SW0144 Example of matching error
(744H)
Installation Parameter
SW0145 Ver.2compatible remote Ver.1compatible remote
CC-Link ver. device station device station
(745H)
installation/parameter Ver.1compatible remote Ver.2compatible remote
SW0146 7 device station device station
matching status
(746H) b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
SW0147 SW0144 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
(747H) SW0145 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
SW0146 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW0147 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
Indicates in which mode the system is operating.

SW0148 0: Remote net ver.1 mode
Parameter mode
(748H) 1: Remote net additional mode
2: Remote net ver.2 mode
Indicates in which mode the host is operating.
SW0149 0: Remote net ver.1 mode
Host parameter mode
(749H) 1: Remote net additional mode
2: Remote net ver.2 mode
7: Only the bit for the first station number is turned on. In addition, these registers check and store the status
at link startup.
8 - 38 8 - 38
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
The timing when the data in a link special register (SW) is updated differs depending
on the link register number.
Table 8.7 lists the update timings of link special registers.
Table 8.7 Update timing of the link special registers

Link special register Data update timing Link special register Data update timing
Updated independently regardless
SW0041 SW0071
Updated independently regardless of SB
of SB (Update after each station is
SW0045 SW0072
stabilized.)
SW0060 When SB0060 changes SW0074 to SW0077 When SB0074 changes
SW0061 When SB0061 changes SW0078 to SW007B When SB0075 changes
SW0062 SW0080 to SW0083 When SB0080 changes
SW0067 SW0088 to SW008B
of SB
SW0068 SW0090 When SB0090 changes
SW0069 Updated independently regardless SW0098 to SW009B
SW006A of SB SW009C to SW009F
SW006D SW00B4 to SW00B7
of SB
SW006E SW00B8
SW006F SW00B9
SW0070 —— ——
8 - 39 8 - 39
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q
8.5 Mode Selection Method
Four different modes are available for CC-Link to be applicable to various systems.
The following flowchart explains the points of mode selection.
1)
Do you use CC-Link for Yes

the first time?
No
Does the system Yes Are modules to be Yes

completely utilize the connected only remote
previous system?
I/O stations?
No No Select the remote I/O

net mode.
Is the previous system Yes
in the remote I/O net
mode? Are modules to be Yes
connected only local
stations?
No
Select the remote net Select the remote I/O No

ver. 1 mode. net mode.
Are the numbers
of points used per station Yes
32 points for RX/RY and 4 points
for RWw/RWr without any
problem?
No
Is a ver. 2 compatible Yes
station added to the
previous system? Select the remote net Select the remote net
ver. 2 mode. ver. 1 mode.
No
Are the sequence Yes Do the modules Yes

programs for ver. 1 to be connected include a
stations utilized? ver. 2 compatible
station?
No No
1) Select the remote net Select the remote net Select the remote net
ver. 2 mode. additional mode. ver. 2 mode.
Will a ver. 2
Yes
compatible station be
connected in the
future?
No
Select the remote net Select the remote net

ver. 1 mode. ver. 2 mode.
8 - 40 8 - 40
9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE I/O

STATIONS
This chapter explains the procedures from module settings to parameter settings,
programming, and finally operation check using a system configuration example.
9.1 When Remote I/O Net Mode is Used
The remote I/O net mode is used.
9.1.1 Configuring a system
As shown below, a system with three connected remote I/O stations is used as an
example.
Master
station
Q61P-A1 Q06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P
Terminal
resistor
Remote I/O station (station number 1) Remote I/O station (station number 2) Remote I/O station (station number 3)
AJ65BTB1-16D AJ65BTB1-16T AJ65BTB1-16DT
Input module Output module I/O module
Terminal
resistor
9-1 9-1
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
(1) Setting the master station

Settings of the master station switches are shown below:
QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
STATION
NO.
× 10
5
0
Station number setting switch
0 ( 10)
Master station must be set to "00".
0 ( 1)
×1
5
C Transmission rate/mode setting switch

MODE 0 (156 kbps/online)
8
NC
1
NC
DA
2
3
SLD
DB
4
5
(FG)
6
DG
7
9-2 9-2
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
(2) Setting the remote I/O stations

Settings of the remote I/O station switches are shown below:
Transmission rate/mode setting switch Station number setting switch

0 (156 kbps/online)
Module 10 1
AJ65BTB1-16D 0 1
AJ65BTC1-16T 0 2
AJ65BTB1-16DT 0 3
MITSUBISHI AJ65BTB1-16D B RATE

0 1
2
PW L RUN SD RD L ERR. 3
4
STATION NO.
× 10 ×1
0 1 9 0 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 2 8 2
3 7 3
6 5 4 6 5 4
9-3 9-3
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
9.1.2 Setting the master station parameters
This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh
parameters of the master station.
(1) Setting the network parameters of the master station

Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting
checklist.
Item Setting range Setting value

Start I/O No. 0000 to 0FE0 0000
Data link
Input data hold/clear
disorder Hold/ clear
Operational Default: Clear
station setting
settings
Case of CPU Refresh/clears compulsorily
Refresh /Clears compulsorily
STOP setting Default: Refresh
Master station
Mater station
Type Local station
Local station
Default: Master station
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Additional mode)
Mode Remote net (Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
Default: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
1 to 64
All connect count 3 modules
Default: 64
Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or
Remote input (RX)
ZR
Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST,
Remote output (RY)
D, W, R or ZR
Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or
Remote register (RWr)
ZR
Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D,
Remote register (RWw)
W, R or ZR
Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or
Ver.2 Remote input (RX)
ZR
Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST,
Ver.2 Remote output (RY)
D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or
(RWr) ZR
Ver.2 Remote register Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D,
(RWw) W, R or ZR
Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB
Special relay (SB)
or ZR
Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW
Special register (SW)
or ZR
9-4 9-4
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

1 to 7
Retry count times
Default: 3
Automatic reconnection 1 to 10
modules
station count Default: 1
Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station
specified)
No.
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
PLC down select Stop /continue
Default: Stop
Asynchronous/synchronous
Scan mode setting Asynchronous /synchronous
Default: Asynchronous
Delay information setting Set 0.
(a) Example of network parameter settings

An example of network parameter settings is shown below:
9-5 9-5
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station

Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below.
1) Set the refresh device for remote input (RX) to X1000.
2) Set the refresh device for remote output (RY) to Y1000.
3) Set the refresh device for special relay (SB) to SB0.
4) Set the refresh device for special register (SW) to SW0.
POINT
When setting the refresh devices for special relay (SB) and special register (SW) to
SB and SW, respectively, make sure that they do not overlap with device numbers
used in the MELSECNET/H network.
(a) Example of automatic refresh parameter settings

An example of automatic refresh parameter settings is shown below:
9-6 9-6
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
9.1.3 Creating a program
This section shows the program used to control the remote I/O stations. The following
diagram shows the relationship between the devices of the PLC CPU and the
inputs/outputs of remote I/O stations.
The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used.
PLC CPU Remote I/O station (station number 1)

AJ65BTB1-16D
Station X100F to X1000 X0F to X00

number 1
X101F to X1010
Station X102F to X1020

number 2
X103F to X1030
Station X104F to X1048 X1047 to X1040 Remote I/O station (station number 2)
number 3
X105F to X1050 AJ65BTB1-16T
Y0F to Y00
Station Y100F to Y1000

number 1
Y101F to Y1010 Remote I/O station (station number 3)
Station Y102F to Y1020 AJ65BTB1-16DT
number 2
Y103F to Y1030
Station Y104F to Y1048 Y1047 to Y1040 Y0F to Y08 X07 to X00

number 3
Y105F to Y1050
9-7 9-7
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
Read data link status

of each station
Station number 1 is faulty

Processing upon
occurrence of faulty Station number 2 is faulty
station
Station number 1 is
performing the data link
Confirmation of data link Station number 2 is
status performing the data link
Station number 3 is
Control program for

station number 1
Control program Control program for

station number 2
Control program for

station number 3
9-8 9-8
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
9.1.4 Performing the data link
Turn on the power to the remote I/O stations first, and then turn on the power to the
master station to start the data link.
(1) Confirming the operation with the LED display

The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and
the remote I/O station when the data link is being performed normally.
(a) LED display of the master station

Make sure that the LED display shows the following status:
: On : Off
Module is normal
QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed
normally
RUN L RUN
Controlling data link MST S MST
SD RD Receiving data
Sending data ERR. L ERR.
(b) LED display of the remote I/O station

: On : Off
AJ65BTB1-16D
PW L RUN SD RD L ERR.
24 V DC is being supplied The data link is being performed normally Sending data Receiving data
9-9 9-9
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
(2) Confirming the operation with the sequence program

Using the sequence program, confirm that the data link is being performed
normally.
1) For example, when X00 of the remote I/O station AJ65BTB1-16D (station
number 1) is turned on, Y40 (QY41P) of the master station turns on.
2) When X21 (QX41) of the master station is turned on, Y08 of the remote I/O
station AJ65BTB1-16DT (station Number 3) turns on.
Master
station
X21 Y40
Terminal
resistor
ON
2)
ON
1)
Remote I/O station (station number 1) Remote I/O station (station number 2) Remote I/O station (station number 3)
AJ65BTB1-16D AJ65BTB1-16T AJ65BTB1-16DT
Input module Output module I/O module
Terminal
resistor
X00 ON
1) ON
Y08 2)
9 - 10 9 - 10
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

DEVICE STATIONS
For more detailed information on remote device stations, see the Remote Device
Station User's Manual.
10.1 When Remote Net Ver. 1 Mode is Used
As shown below, a system with one connected remote I/O station is used as an
example.
Master
station
Terminal
resistor
Terminal
resistor
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
Remote device station (station number 1)
Occupies 3 stations
10
10 - 1 10 - 1
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
STATION
NO.
× 10
5
0
0 ( 10)
0 ( 1)
×1
5

8
NC
1
NC
DA
2
3
SLD
DB
4
5
(FG)
6
DG
7
10
10 - 2 10 - 2
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
(2) Setting the remote device station

Settings of the remote device station switches are shown below:
For more detailed information about the contents of the settings, see the Remote
Device Station User's Manual.
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
CON
A L
I
N
CON K
B
SEL
C
H POWER
1
SET
RUN
2
L RUN
3 L ERR Station number setting switch,

SW1 Transmission speed setting switch
TEST
4
1 place 10 place
40 OFF
1 STATION NO.
20 OFF
2
5 10 OFF
4
8 OFF Station
8 number 1
OFFSET 4 OFF
6 2 OFF
1 ON
GAIN
B RATE
7 4 OFF
2 OFF 156kbps
1 OFF
8
MODE Mode select switch
0 (Nomal mode)
CON
C P
O
W
E
CON R
D
10 - 3 10 - 3
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(a) Setting the network parameters
checklist and station information setting checklist.

Data link
station setting
settings
Master station
Mater station
Type Local station
Local station
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
1 to 64
Default: 64
Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W,
Remote output (RY)
R or ZR
Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R
or ZR
Ver.2 Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
(RWr)
Ver.2 Remote register Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R
(RWw) or ZR
Special relay (SB) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or ZR
Special register (SW) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or ZR
10 - 4 10 - 4
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

1 to 7
Retry count 3 times
Default: 3
1 modules
specified)
No.
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
Default: Stop
Number of Intelligent buffer select (word)

Station Expanded Remote Reserve/invalid
Station type occupied
No. cyclic setting station points station select
stations Send Receive Automatic
Occupies
1 Remote device station single 3 stations 96 points No setting
(b) Example of network parameter settings

10 - 5 10 - 5
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(a) Setting the automatic refresh parameters
3) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWr) to W0.
4) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWw) to W100.
POINT
(b) Setting example

A setting example is shown below.
10 - 6 10 - 6
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
10.1.3 Initial setting of the remote device station
This section explains the initial setting of the remote device station.
(1) Setting the target station number

Set the target station for which the initial setting is performed.
(a) Setting the target station number
Set the target to "1".
(b) Selecting the Regist procedure

Click the "Regist procedure" of the target station number "1".
(2) Setting the regist procedure registration

Set the conditions and details of the remote device station settings.
In this section, AJ65VBTCU-68ADV is used as an example for the Regist
procedure registration.
The details to be set are as follows:
Set channels 1, 2 to A-D conversion enable (the first condition).
Set the Input range of channel 1 to 0 - 5V, and channel 2 to User range setting
1 (the second condition).
Set channel 1 to Sampling processing, and specify channel 2 as Average
processing and set it to Number of times (the third condition).
Set channel 2 Average number of times to 16 times (the forth condition).
Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to ON (the fifth condition).
Turn the Initial data setting request flag to ON (the sixth condition).
Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to OFF (the seventh condition).
Turn the Initial data setting request flag to OFF (the eighth condition).
For more detailed information about the settings, see the Remote Device Station
User's Manual.
Set the input format to "HEX.".

(a) Setting the first condition
1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".
2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Set new".
10 - 7 10 - 7
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
3) Executional condition settings

Set the "Condition Device" to "RX", the "Device Number" to "18", and
the "Execute Condition" to "ON".
4) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RWw", the "Device Number" to "00", and the
"Write Data" to "0003".
(b) Setting the second condition


Set the "Operational condition" to "Same as prev. set".

Set the "Write Device" to "RWw", the "Device Number" to "01", and
(c) Setting the third condition



Set the "Write Device" to "RWw" ,the "Device Number" to "03", and the
(d) Setting the fourth condition



(e) Setting the fifth condition



Set the "Write Device" to "RY", the "Device Number" to "18", and the
"Write Data" to "ON".
10 - 8 10 - 8
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
(f) Setting the sixth condition



Set "Write Device" to "RY", the "Device Number" to "19", and the
(g) Setting the seventh condition



the "Execute Condition" to "OFF".

"Write Data" to "OFF".
(h) Setting the eighth condition




10 - 9 10 - 9
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
(i) Setting results

The results of settings (a) to (h) are shown below.
10 - 10 10 - 10
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
(3) Validating the remote device station initial settings

This section explains the link special relays (SB) relating to the initial settings of
Numeric values in parentheses in the Number column indicate addresses and bit
positions of the buffer memory.
Example: For buffer memory address 5E0H and bit 13: (5E0H, b13)
Table 10.1 List of link special relays related to remote device station initial settings
Availability
Number Name Description Online
Master Offline
Local station
station
Starts initial processing using the information registered during
the initialization procedure registration.
SB000D While SB000D is on, the refresh of the remote input/output and
OFF: No instruction
ON: Instructed
Execution status of remote Indicates the execution status of the initialization procedure.
SB005E
device station initialization OFF: Not executed
(5E5H, b14)
procedure ON: Being executed
Indicates completion status of the execution of the initialization
Complete status of remote
SB005F procedure execution.
device station initialization
procedure
ON: Complete
Stores the execution result of initialization procedure registration
SW005F instruction with SB000B.
(65FH) 0: Normal
instruction result
Other than 0: Store the error code (see Section 13.3).
Cannot be used for the standby master station that is controlling the data link.
For details on how to create a program, see Section 10.1.4.
POINT
(1) When remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction
(SB0000) is turned off after the initial processing completion, all of the RY
signals that has been turned on in the initial procedure registration is turned off.
Therefore, about signals that are required to turn always on, such as conversion
valid signal, they should be turned on in the sequence program.
(2) If the procedure registration is not completed for all stations registered to the
remote device station initialization procedure registration, the completion status
of remote device station initialization procedure (SB005F) does not turn on.
If there is a faulty station, turn off the remote device station initialization
procedure registration instruction (SB000D) according to the completion status
of the other stations.
10 - 11 10 - 11
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
REMARK
Setting with the sequence program (Reference)
For reference, an example setting performed with the sequence program is shown
below.
Checking of AJ65VBTCU-68ADV status

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV data
link normal
link abnormal
Initial settings
A/D conversion enable/
prohibit specification
(RWw0)
CH.1 to CH.4 input
range setting (RWw1)
Average processing
specification (RWw3)
CH.2 average time,
number of times setting
(RWw5)
Turns on initial data
processing completion flag
(RY18).
setting request flag (RY19).
Changing of initial settings
Initial setting change A/D conversion enable/
(RWw0)
CH.1 to CH.4 input
Average processing
CH.2 average time,
(RWw5)
Turns on initial data setting
request flag (RY19).
Processing at initial settings
Turns off initial data
(RY18).
Turns off initial data setting
Read of digital output values
Reads CH.1 digital
output value (RWr0).
Reads CH.2 digital
Processing at error occurrence
Reads error code (RWr8).

Error reset
Turns on error reset
request flag (RY1A).
Turns off error reset
The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed.
10 - 12 10 - 12
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
This section shows a program used to control remote device stations.

The following diagrams show the relationships of the remote input/output and remote
registers between the PLC CPU devices and the remote device station.
For detailed information about each remote device station, see the User's Manual for
each module.
[Remote input (RX) and remote output (RY)]
PLC CPU Remote device station (station number 1)

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
X100F to X1000 RX0F to RX00

X102F to X1020
X103F to X1030
Y100F to Y1000 RY0F to RY00

Y102F to Y1020
Y103F to Y1030
10 - 13 10 - 13
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
[Remote registers (RWw and RWr)]
PLC CPU Remote device station (station number 1)

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
For write
W100 RWw0 (A/D conversion enable/prohibit specification)
W101 RWw1 (CH.1 to CH.4 input range setting)
W103 RWw3 (Average processing specification)
W104 RWw4 (CH.1 average time, number of times setting)
W10A RWwA (CH.7 average time, number of times setting)
W10B RWwB (CH.8 average time, number of times setting)
For read
W000 RWr0 (CH.1 digital output value)
W008 RWr8 (Error code)
W009 RWr9 (Reserved)
W00A RWrA (Reserved)
W00B RWrB (Reserved)
10 - 14 10 - 14
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
Checking of AJ65VBTCU-68ADV status

link normal
link abnormal
Initialization procedure registration Turns on initialization

procedure registration
directive.
Turns off initialization
directive.
Changing of initial settings
(RWw0)
CH.1 to CH.4 input
Average processing
CH.2 average time,
(RWw5)
setting request flag
(RY19).
Read of digital output values
Reads CH.1 digital
Reads CH.2 digital

Processing at error occurrence

Error reset
10 - 15 10 - 15
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
Turn on the power to the remote device station first, and then turn on the power to the

the remote device station when the data link is being performed normally.

: On : Off
Module is normal
normally
RUN L RUN
(b) LED display of the remote device station

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
: On : Off
24 V DC is being supplied
POWER
RUN
Module is normal
L RUN
The data link is being
L ERR performed normally
10 - 16 10 - 16
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

normally.
1) Change the voltage input to the AJ65VBTCU-68ADV and confirm that the A-
D converted digital value also changes.
1)
A-D conversion of AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

D1500 CH1 Digital output value
Master
station
Terminal
resistor
Terminal
resistor
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
1)
Remote device station (station number 1)
Occupies 3 stations
10 - 17 10 - 17
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
10.2 When Remote Net Ver.2 Mode is Used
As shown below, a system where one ver.1 compatible remote device station and one
ver.2 compatible remote device station are connected is used as an example.
Master
station
Terminal
resistor
Terminal
resistor
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
Ver.1 compatible remote device station Ver.2 compatible remote device station
(station number 1) (station number 4)
Occupies 3 stations Occupies 1 station
10 - 18 10 - 18
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
STATION
NO.
× 10
5
0
0 ( 10)
0 ( 1)
×1
5

8
NC
1
NC
DA
2
3
SLD
DB
4
5
(FG)
6
DG
7
10 - 19 10 - 19
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Setting of AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
CON
A L
I
N
CON K
B
SEL
C
H POWER
1
SET
RUN
2
L RUN

TEST
4 1 place 10 place 40 OFF
1 20 OFF
STATION NO.
2
5 10 OFF
4 Station
8 8 OFF
number 1
OFFSET 4 OFF
6 2 OFF
1 ON
GAIN
B RATE
7 4 OFF
2 OFF 156kbps
1 OFF
8
0 (Nomal mode)
CON
C P
O
W
E
CON R
D
10 - 20 10 - 20
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
Setting of AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
CON
A L
I
N
CON K
B
SEL
C
H POWER
1
SET
RUN
2 UP
L RUN
3 DOWN L ERR Station number setting switch,

TEST
4
1 place 10 place
40 OFF
1 20 OFF
STATION NO.
2
5 10 OFF
4 Station
8
8 OFF
number 4
OFFSET 4 ON
6 2 OFF
1 OFF
GAIN
B RATE
7 4 OFF
2 OFF 156kbps
1 OFF
8
3 (Ver.2 Mode Nomal mode)

CON
C P
O
W
E
CON R
D
10 - 21 10 - 21
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q


Data link
station setting
settings
Master station
Mater station
Type Local station
Local station
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
1 to 64
Default: 64
Remote output (RY)
R or ZR
or ZR
R or ZR
(RWr)
(RWw) or ZR
10 - 22 10 - 22
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

1 to 7
Retry count 3 times
Default: 3
1 modules
specified)
No.
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
Default: Stop

Occupies
1 Ver.1Remote device station single 3 stations 96 points No setting
Occupies
4 Ver.2Remote device station quadruple 64 points No setting
1 station

10 - 23 10 - 23
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

POINT
(b) Setting example

10 - 24 10 - 24
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Set the target station numbers to "1" and "4".


User's Manual.


10 - 25 10 - 25
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q














10 - 26 10 - 26
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q











10 - 27 10 - 27
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
(i) Setting results

Similarly, make the procedure registration of the AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN.

Set channels 1, 2 to Analog output enable. (the first condition)

Set the output range of channel 1 to 0 - 5V, and channel 2 to User range
setting 1. (the second condition)
Set the HOLD/CLEAR setting of channels 1, 2 to CLEAR. (the third condition)
Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to ON (the forth condition).
Turn the Initial data setting request flag to ON (the fifth condition).
Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to OFF (the sixth condition).
Turn the Initial data setting request flag to OFF (the seventh condition).
10 - 28 10 - 28
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Availability
Master Offline
Local station
station
OFF: No instruction
ON: Instructed
SB005E
(5E5H, b14)
procedure
ON: Complete
(65FH) 0: Normal
instruction result
POINT
10 - 29 10 - 29
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
REMARK
below.
Status confirmation of AJ65VBTCU-68ADV, AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV,
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
data link normal
link abnormal
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN data
link abnormal
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV initial setting AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

(RWw0)
CH.1 to CH.4 input
Average processing
CH.2 average time,
(RWw5)
(RY18).
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV initial setting change
(RWw0)
CH.1 to CH.4 input
Average processing
CH.2 average time,
(RWw5)
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV initial setting processing
(RY18).
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN initial setting AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
Analog output enable/
disable setting (RWw8)
CH.1 to CH.4 output range
setting (RWw9)
HOLD/CLEAR setting
(RWwB)
(RY18).
(RY19).
(To the next page)
10 - 30 10 - 30
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
REMARK
(From the previous page)
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN initial setting change AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

Initial setting change
setting (RWw9)

AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN initial setting processing
(RY18).
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV digital output value read AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
Reads CH.1 digital
Reads CH.2 digital
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV error occurrence processing
Error reset
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN digital value setting AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
CH.1 digital value
Digital value setting (RWw0) : 500
setting
CH.2 digital value
setting (RWw1) : 1000
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN analog output enable/disable setting
Turns on CH.1 analog
output enable/disable
Analog output flag (RY00).
enable Turns on CH.2 analog
flag (RY01).
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN error occurrence processing
Read CH. check code
(RWr0, RWr1).

Error reset
10 - 31 10 - 31
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

each module.

PLC CPU (station number 1) (station number 4)

X102F to X1020
X103F to X1030
X104F to X1040
X105F to X1050
X108F to X1080
X109F to X1090

Y102F to Y1020
Y103F to Y1030
Y104F to Y1040
Y105F to Y1050
Y108F to Y1080
Y109F to Y1090
10 - 32 10 - 32
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Remote device station (station number 1) Remote device station (station number 4)
PLC CPU AJ65VBTCU-68ADV AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
For write


W100C RWw0 (CH.1 digital value setting)
W100D RWw1 (CH.2 digital value setting)
W100E RWw2 (CH.3 digital value setting)
W100F RWw3 (CH.4 digital value setting)
W1010 RWw4 (CH.5 digital value setting)

W1014 RWw8 (Analog output enable disable setting)
W1015 RWw9 (CH.1 to CH.4 output range setting)
W1016 RWwA (CH.5 to CH.8 output range setting)
W1017 RWwB (HOLD/CLEAR setting)
W1018 RWwC (Reserved)
W1019 RWwD (Reserved)
W101A RWwE (Reserved)
W101B RWwF (Reserved)
For read
W000C RWr0 (CH.1 check code)
W000D RWr1 (CH.2 check code)
W000E RWr2 (CH.3 check code)
W000F RWr3 (CH.4 check code)
W0010 RWr4 (CH.5 check code)
W0016 RWrA (Reserved)
W0017 RWrB (Reserved)
W0018 RWrC (Reserved)
W0019 RWrD (Reserved)
W001A RWrE (Reserved)
W001B RWrF (Reserved)
10 - 33 10 - 33
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV,
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
data link normal
link abnormal
link abnormal
Initialization procedure registration

directive.
Turns on initialization
56 procedure registration
directive.
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV initial setting change AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

(RWw0)
CH.1 to CH.4 input
Average processing
CH.2 average time,
(RWw5)
Reads CH.1 digital
Reads CH.2 digital


Error reset

10 - 34 10 - 34
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN initial setting change

AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
setting (RWw9)

CH.1 digital value
Digital value
setting CH.2 digital value
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN analog output enable/disable setting Turns on CH.1 analog
flag (RY00).
Analog output
flag (RY01).
Read CH. check code
(RWr0, RWr1).

Error reset
10 - 35 10 - 35
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q


: On : Off
Module is normal
normally
RUN L RUN

For both the AJ65VBTCU-68ADV and AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN, confirm that
the LED display status is as shown below.
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
: On : Off
POWER
RUN
Module is normal
L RUN
10 - 36 10 - 36
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

normally.
2) Set digital values to the AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN, and confirm that the voltages
converted from digital to analog are output.
1) A-D conversion of AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

2) D-A conversion of AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
D510 CH1 Digital value setting

Master
station
Terminal
resistor
Terminal
resistor
V
1) 2)
10 - 37 10 - 37
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
10.3 When Remote Net Additional Mode is Used
As shown below, a system where one ver. 1 compatible remote device station and one
ver. 2 compatible remote device station are connected is used as an example.
Master
station
Terminal
resistor
Terminal
resistor
10 - 38 10 - 38
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
STATION
NO.
× 10
5
0
0 ( 10)
0 ( 1)
×1
5

8
NC
1
NC
DA
2
3
SLD
DB
4
5
(FG)
6
DG
7
10 - 39 10 - 39
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Setting of AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
CON
A L
I
N
CON K
B
SEL
C
H POWER
1
SET
RUN
2
L RUN

TEST
4
1 place 10 place 40 OFF
1 20 OFF
STATION NO.
2
5 10 OFF
4
8 OFF Station
8 number 1
OFFSET 4 OFF
6 2 OFF
1 ON
GAIN
B RATE
7 4 OFF
2 OFF 156kbps
1 OFF
8
0 (Nomal mode)
CON
C P
O
W
E
CON R
D
10 - 40 10 - 40
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
Setting of AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
CON
A L
I
N
CON K
B
SEL
C
H POWER
1
SET
RUN
2 UP
L RUN
3 DOWN L ERR Station number setting switch,

TEST
4 40
1 place 10 place
OFF
1 20 OFF
STATION NO.
2
5 10 OFF
4 Station
8
8 OFF
number 4
OFFSET 4 ON
6 2 OFF
1 OFF
GAIN
B RATE
7 4 OFF
2 OFF 156kbps
1 OFF
8
3 (Ver.2 Mode Nomal mode)

CON
C P
O
W
E
CON R
D
10 - 41 10 - 41
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q


Data link
station setting
settings
Master station
Mater station
Type Local station
Local station
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
1 to 64
Default: 64
Remote output (RY)
R or ZR
or ZR
R or ZR
(RWr)
(RWw) or ZR
10 - 42 10 - 42
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

1 to 7
Retry count 3 times
Default: 3
1 modules
specified)
No.
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
Default: Stop

Occupies
1 Ver.1Remote device station single 96 points No setting
3 stations
Occupies
4 Ver.2Remote device station quadruple 64 points No setting
1 station

10 - 43 10 - 43
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

5) Set the refresh device for ver.2 remote input (RX) to X1500.
6) Set the refresh device for ver.2 remote output (RY) to Y1500.
7) Set the refresh device for ver.2 remote register (RWr) to W1000.
8) Set the refresh device for ver.2 remote register (RWw) to W1500.
POINT
(b) Setting example

10 - 44 10 - 44
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Set the target station numbers to "1" and "4".


User's Manual.


10 - 45 10 - 45
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q














10 - 46 10 - 46
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q











10 - 47 10 - 47
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
(i) Setting results

Similarly, make the procedure registration of the AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN.

Set channels 1, 2 to Analog output enable. (the first condition)

Set the Output range of channel 1 to 0 - 5V, and channel 2 to User range
setting 1. (the second condition)
Set the HOLD/CLEAR setting of channels 1, 2 to CLEAR. (the third condition)
Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to ON (the forth condition).
Turn the Initial data setting request flag to ON (the fifth condition).
Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to OFF (the sixth condition).
Turn the Initial data setting request flag to OFF (the seventh condition).
10 - 48 10 - 48
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Availability
Master Offline
Local station
station
OFF: No instruction
ON: Instructed
SB005E
(5E5H, b14)
procedure
ON: Complete
(65FH) 0: Normal
instruction result
POINT
10 - 49 10 - 49
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
REMARK
below.

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV,
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
data link normal
link abnormal
link abnormal
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV initial setting AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

(RWw0)
CH.1 to CH.4 input
Average processing
CH.2 average time,
(RWw5)
(RY18).
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV initial setting change
(RWw0)
CH.1 to CH.4 input
Average processing
CH.2 average time,
(RWw5)
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV initial setting processing
(RY18).
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN initial setting AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
setting (RWw9)
HOLD/CLEAR setting
(RWwB)
(RY18).
(RY19).
(To the next page)
10 - 50 10 - 50
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
REMARK
(From the previous page)

setting (RWw9)
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN initial setting processing
(RY18).
Reads CH.1 digital
Reads CH.2 digital

Error reset
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN digital value setting
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
CH.1 digital value
Digital value setting (RWw0) : 500
setting
CH.2 digital value
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN analog output enable/disable setting
Turns on CH.1 analog
Analog output flag (RY00).
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN error occurrence processing flag (RY01).
Read CH. check code

(RWr0, RWr1).

Error reset

10 - 51 10 - 51
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

each module.

PLC CPU (station number 1) (station number 4)
Ver.1compatible
X102F to X1020
X103F to X1030
X104F to X1040
X105F to X1050
Y102F to Y1020
Y103F to Y1030
Y104F to Y1040
Y105F to Y1050
Ver.2compatible
X152F to X1520
X153F to X1530
Y152F to Y1520
Y153F to Y1530
10 - 52 10 - 52
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Remote device station (station number 1) Remote device station (station number 4)
PLC CPU AJ65VBTCU-68ADV AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
Ver.1compatible for write
Ver.1compatible for read
Ver.2compatible for write

W1508 RWw8 (Analog output enable disable setting)
W1509 RWw9 (CH.1 to CH.4 output range setting)
W150A RWwA (CH.5 to CH.8 output range setting)
W150B RWwB (HOLD/CLEAR setting)
W150C RWwC (Reserved)
W150D RWwD (Reserved)
W150E RWwE (Reserved)
W150F RWwF (Reserved)

Ver.2compatible for read
W100C RWrC (Reserved)
W100D RWrD (Reserved)
W100E RWrE (Reserved)
W100F RWrF (Reserved)
10 - 53 10 - 53
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV,
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
data link normal
link abnormal
link abnormal
Initialization procedure registration

directive.
Turns on initialization
directive.
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV initial setting change AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

(RWw0)
CH.1 to CH.4 input
Average processing
CH.2 average time,
(RWw5)

Reads CH.1 digital
Reads CH.2 digital
Error reset
10 - 54 10 - 54
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Initial setting change Analog output enable/
setting (RWw9)
CH.1 digital value
Digital value
setting CH.2 digital value
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN analog output enable/disable setting Turns on CH.1 analog
flag (RY00).
Analog output
flag (RY01).
Read CH. check code
(RWr0, RWr1).

Error reset

10 - 55 10 - 55
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q


: On : Off
Module is normal
normally
RUN L RUN

For both the AJ65VBTCU-68ADV and AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN, confirm that
the LED display status is as shown below.
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
: On : Off
POWER
RUN
Module is normal
L RUN
10 - 56 10 - 56
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

normally.
2) Set digital values to the AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN, and confirm that the voltages
converted from digital to analog are output.
1) A-D conversion of AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

2) D-A conversion of AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

Master
station
Terminal
resistor
Terminal
resistor
V
1) 2)
10 - 57 10 - 57
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

STATIONS
11
11.1 Secured 32-bit Data
When the following conditions, 1) and 2) are satisfied in the CC-Link network, 32-bit
data in remote registers (RWr/RWw) between a PLC CPU and a master/local station
can be secured.
1) Access starts from a remote resister (RWr/RWw) address of an "even number".
PLC CPU Master station Local station PLC CPU Master station Local station
CPU device Remote register Remote register CPU device Remote register Remote register
W000 RWr00 RWw00 W000 RWr00 RWw00
W004 RWr04 RWw04
Because the start address on the remote resister

side is an "odd address", new and old data may be
mixed in 16-bit (1-word) units.
2) Access by the sequence program must be made in units of even points.
PLC CPU Master station PLC CPU Master station

CPU device Remote register CPU device Remote register
FROM
W000 DFRO RWr00 W000 RWr00
W001 RWr01 W001 RWr01
W002 RWr02 W002 RWr02
W003 RWr03 W003 RWr03
Because the access is made for each single point

(1-word), new and old data may be mixed in 16-bit
(1-word) units.
11 - 1 11 - 1
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
11.2.1 Configuring a system 11
As shown below, a system with one connected local station is used as an example.
Master
station
Terminal
resistor
Local station (station number 1:

occupies 4 stations)
Terminal
resistor
11 - 2 11 - 2
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
(1) Setting the master and local stations

QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
STATION
NO.
× 10
5
Module 10 1
Master station 0 0
Local station 0 1
×1
5

8
NC
1
NC
DA
2
3
SLD
DB
4
5
(FG)
6
DG
7
11 - 3 11 - 3
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q


Data link disorder Input data hold/clear
Hold/ clear
Operational station setting Default: Clear
settings Case of CPU STOP Refresh/clears compulsorily
setting Default: Refresh
Master station
Mater station
Type Local station
Local station
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
1 to 64
Default: 64
Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
1 to 7
Retry count 3 times
Default: 3
Automatic reconnection station 1 to 10
1 modules
count Default: 1
Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station specified)
Standby master station No.
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
Default: Stop
11 - 4 11 - 4
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Station Expanded Remote station Reserve/invalid
No. cyclic setting points station select
Occupies 64 64 128
1 Intelligent device station single 128 points No setting
4 stations

11 - 5 11 - 5
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

POINT
(b) Setting example

11 - 6 11 - 6
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
11.2.3 Setting the local station parameters
parameters of the local station.
(1) Setting the network parameters of the local station

checklist.

Hold/ clear
station setting Default: Clear
Case of CPU STOP Refresh/clears compulsorily
Operational setting Default: Clear: Refresh
settings Number of occupied Occupies 1 to 4 stations
Occupies 4 stations
stations Default: Occupies 1 station
Expanded cyclic single/double/quadruple/octuple
setting Default: single
Master station
Master station
Type Local station
Local station
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
1 to 64
All connect count modules
Default: 64
1 to 7
Retry count times
Default: 3
modules
count Default: 1
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
PLC down select Stop/continue
Default: Stop
Scan mode setting Asynchronous/synchronous
11 - 7 11 - 7
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

11 - 8 11 - 8
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the local station

POINT
(b) Setting example

11 - 9 11 - 9
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
This section shows the program to be used for communication between the master
and local stations. The following diagram shows the relationship between the devices
of the master station PLC CPU and the devices of the local station PLC CPU.

Master station PLC CPU Master station occupies 4 stations) Local station PLC CPU
X100F to X1000 RX00F to RX000 RY00F to RY000 Y100F to Y1000

X107D to X1070 RX07F to RX070 RY07F to RY070 Y107D to Y1070
Y100F to Y1000 RY00F to RY000 RX00F to RX000 X100F to X1000
Y107D to Y1070 RY07F to RY070 RX07F to RX070 X107D to X1070
The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master and local stations.
11 - 10 11 - 10
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Master station PLC CPU Master station Local station Local station PLC CPU
W000 RWr00 RWw00 W100

W001 RWr01 RWw01 W101
W002 RWr02 RWw02 W102
W003 RWr03 RWw03 W103
W004 RWr04 RWw04 W104
W005 RWr05 RWw05 W105
W006 RWr06 RWw06 W106
W007 RWr07 RWw07 W107
W008 RWr08 RWw08 W108
W009 RWr09 RWw09 W109
W00A RWr0A RWw0A W10A
W00B RWr0B RWw0B W10B
W00C RWr0C RWw0C W10C
W00D RWr0D RWw0D W10D
W00E RWr0E RWw0E W10E
W00F RWr0F RWw0F W10F
W100 RWw00 RWr00 W000

W101 RWw01 RWr01 W001
W102 RWw02 RWr02 W002
W103 RWw03 RWr03 W003
W104 RWw04 RWr04 W004
W105 RWw05 RWr05 W005
W106 RWw06 RWr06 W006
W107 RWw07 RWr07 W007
W108 RWw08 RWr08 W008
W109 RWw09 RWr09 W009
W10A RWw0A RWr0A W00A
W10B RWw0B RWr0B W00B
W10C RWw0C RWr0C W00C
W10D RWw0D RWr0D W00D
W10E RWw0E RWr0E W00E
W10F RWw0F RWr0F W00F
11 - 11 11 - 11
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
(1) Master station program
Local station status confirmation

Station number 1 is
Control program
Control program using data
received from a local station
Program to generate
transmission data to a local
station
(2) Local station program
Confirmation of data link status

Local station is performing
data link
Control program
received from the master
station
Program to generate
send data to the master
station
11 - 12 11 - 12
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
REMARK
Securing cyclic data on a per-station basis
By configuring an interlock with remote I/O (RX/RY), cyclic data can be secured on a
1
per-station (4-word) basis.
1 Data of more than one station are not secured.
Configure an interlock with remote I/O (RX/RY) as shown in the following example.
Sending station (master station) Receiving station (local station)

1) 1) 4)
2) 5)
3) 6)
7)
1) The send/receive command (M0) turns ON.

2) Data of D0 to D3 are stored in W100 to W103 (RWw0 to RWw3).
3) Upon completion of storage in W100 to W103, Y1000 (RY0) for handshake
turns ON.
4) By cyclic transmission, remote output (RY) data are sent following the remote
resister (RWw) data, and the receiving station’s X1000 (RX0) turns ON.
5) Data of W0 to W3 (RWr0 to RWr3) are stored in D100 to D103.
6) Upon completion of storage in D100 to D103, Y1000 (RY0) for handshake turns
ON.
7) When the data transmission to the receiving station is complete, Y1000 turns
OFF.
11 - 13 11 - 13
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
Turn on the power to the local station first, and then turn on the power to the master
station to start the data link.

the local station when the data link is being performed normally.

: On : Off
Module is normal
normally
RUN L RUN
(b) LED display of the local station

: On : Off
Module is normal
normally
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
11 - 14 11 - 14
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

normally.
1) When X20 of the master station is turned on, Y41 of the local station turns
on.
2) When X21 of the local station is turned on, Y40 of the master station turns
on.
Master
station
Terminal
resistor

occupies 4 stations)
Terminal
resistor
11 - 15 11 - 15
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
As shown below, a system with two connected local station is used as an example.
Master
station
Terminal
resistor
Ver.1compatible local station

(station number 1: occupies 4 stations)

(station number 5: occupies 2 stations: double)
Terminal
resistor
11 - 16 11 - 16
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
STATION
NO.
× 10
5
Module 10 1
Master station 0 0
Local station 0 1
×1
5

8
NC
1
NC
DA
2
3
SLD
DB
4
5
(FG)
6
DG
7
11 - 17 11 - 17
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q


Hold/ clear
settings Case of CPU STOP Refresh/clears compulsorily
setting Default: Refresh
Master station
Mater station
Type Local station
Local station
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
1 to 64
Default: 64
1 to 7
Retry count 3 times
Default: 3
1 modules
count Default: 1
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
Default: Stop
11 - 18 11 - 18
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Occupies
1 Ver.1Intelligent device station single 128 points No setting 64 64 128
4 stations
Occupies
5 Ver.2Intelligent device station double 96 points No setting 64 64 128
2 stations

11 - 19 11 - 19
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

POINT
(b) Setting example

11 - 20 11 - 20
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
(1) Setting the network parameters of the ver.1 compatible local station
(station number 1)
checklist.

Hold/ clear
Occupies 4 stations
Master station
Master station
Type Local station
Local station
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
1 to 64
Default: 64
1 to 7
Retry count times
Default: 3
modules
count Default: 1
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
Default: Stop
11 - 21 11 - 21
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

11 - 22 11 - 22
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver.1 compatible

local station (station number 1)
POINT
(b) Setting example

11 - 23 11 - 23
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
(station number 5)
checklist.

Hold/ clear
Operational setting Default: Refresh
Occupies 2 stations
double
Master station
Master station
Type Local station
Local station
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
1 to 64
Default: 64
1 to 7
Retry count times
Default: 3
modules
count Default: 1
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
Default: Stop
11 - 24 11 - 24
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

11 - 25 11 - 25
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

POINT
(b) Setting example

11 - 26 11 - 26
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Ver.1compatible local station Ver.2compatible local station
Master station (station number 1: occupies 4 stations) (station number 5: occupies 2 stations: double)
Local station
PLC CPU
RY07F to RY070 Y107D to Y1070

Master station Ver.2 compatible RX05F to RX050 X105F to X1050 Ver.2 compatible Local station
PLC CPU buffer memory RX06F to RX060 X106F to X1060 buffer memory PLC CPU
X100F to X1000 RX00F to RX000 RX07F to RX070 X107D to X1070 RY00F to RY000 Y100F to Y1000
X107D to X1070 RX07F to RX070 RY07F to RY070 Y107D to Y1070
X10AF to X10A0 RX0AF to RX0A0 RY0AF to RY0A0 Y10AF to Y10A0
X10BF to X10B0 RX0BF to RX0B0 RY0BF to RY0B0 Y10BF to Y10B0
X10CF to X10C0 RX0CF to RX0C0 RY0CF to RY0C0 Y10CF to Y10C0
X10DD to X10D0 RX0DF to RX0D0 RY0DF to RY0D0 Y10DD to Y10D0

Y107D to Y1070 RY07F to RY070 RX07F to RX070 X107D to X1070
Y10AF to Y10A0 RY0AF to RY0A0 RX0AF to RX0A0 X10AF to X10A0
Y10BF to Y10B0 RY0BF to RY0B0 RX0BF to RX0B0 X10BF to X10B0
Y10CF to Y10C0 RY0CF to RY0C0 RX0CF to RX0C0 X10CF to X10C0
Y10DD to Y10D0 RY0DF to RY0D0 RX0DF to RX0D0 X10DD to X10D0
11 - 27 11 - 27
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Master station (station number 1) (station number 5)
Local station
PLC CPU
RWw00 W0000
RWw01 W1001
RWw02 W1002
RWw03 W1003
RWw04 W1004
RWw05 W1005
RWw06 W1006
RWw0D W100D
RWw0E W100E
RWw0F W100F
RWr00 W0000
RWr01 W0001
RWr02 W0002
RWr03 W0003
RWr04 W0004
RWr05 W0005
RWr06 W0006
Master station Ver.2 compatible RWr0D W000D Ver.2 compatible Local station
PLC CPU buffer memory RWr0E W000E buffer memory PLC CPU
W0000 RWr00 RWr0F W000F RWw00 W1000
W0001 RWr01 RWw01 W1001
W0002 RWr02 RWw02 W1002
W0003 RWr03 RWw03 W1003
W0004 RWr04 RWw04 W1004
W0005 RWr05 RWw05 W1005
W0006 RWr06 RWw06 W1006

W0010 RWr10 RWw10 W1010
W0011 RWr11 RWw11 W1011
W0012 RWr12 RWw12 W1012
W0013 RWr13 RWw13 W1013
W0014 RWr14 RWw14 W1014
W0015 RWr15 RWw15 W1015
W0016 RWr16 RWw16 W1016

W1000 RWw00 RWr00 W0000

W1001 RWw01 RWr01 W0001
W1002 RWw02 RWr02 W0002
W1003 RWw03 RWr03 W0003
W1004 RWw04 RWr04 W0004
W1005 RWw05 RWr05 W0005
W1006 RWw06 RWr06 W0006

W1010 RWw10 RWr10 W0010
W1011 RWw11 RWr11 W0011
W1012 RWw12 RWr12 W0012
W1013 RWw13 RWr13 W0013
W1014 RWw14 RWr14 W0014
W1015 RWw15 RWr15 W0015
W1016 RWw16 RWr16 W0016

11 - 28 11 - 28
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Control program
Control program of station number 1
Control program using
data received from local
station of station No. 1
Program to generate
transmission data to local
received from local station
of station No. 5
Program to generate

(a) Ver.1 compatible local station (station number 1) program
data link
Control program
received from a master station
Program to generate send
data to the master station
(b) Ver.2 compatible local station (station number 5) program

data link
Control program
11 - 29 11 - 29
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
REMARK
For details, refer to Remark in Section 11.2.4.


: On : Off
Module is normal
normally
RUN L RUN

: On : Off
Module is normal
normally
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
11 - 30 11 - 30
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

normally.
1) When X20 of the master station is turned on, Y41 of the local station of
station No. 1 turns on.
2) When X21 of the local station of station No. 1 is turned on, Y40 of the master
station turns on.
station turns on.
Master
station
Terminal
resistor


Terminal
resistor
11 - 31 11 - 31
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
11.4 When Remote Net Additional Mode is Used
As shown below, a system with two connected local station is used as an example.
Master
station
Terminal
resistor


Terminal
resistor
11 - 32 11 - 32
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
STATION
NO.
× 10
5
Module 10 1
Master station 0 0
Local station 0 1
×1
5

8
NC
1
NC
DA
2
3
SLD
DB
4
5
(FG)
6
DG
7
11 - 33 11 - 33
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q


Hold/ clear
settings Case of CPU Refresh/clears compulsorily
Master station
Mater station
Type Local station
Local station
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
1 to 64
Default: 64
1 to 7
Retry count 3 times
Default: 3
1 modules
count Default: 1
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
Default: Stop
11 - 34 11 - 34
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Occupies
1 Ver.1Intelligent device station single 128 points No setting 64 64 128
4 stations
Occupies
5 Ver.2Intelligent device station double 96 points No setting 64 64 128
2 stations

11 - 35 11 - 35
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

POINT
(b) Setting example

11 - 36 11 - 36
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
(station number 1)
checklist.

Hold/ clear
Occupies 4 stations
Master station
Master station
Type Local station
Local station
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
1 to 64
Default: 64
1 to 7
Retry count times
Default: 3
modules
count Default: 1
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
Default: Stop
11 - 37 11 - 37
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

11 - 38 11 - 38
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

POINT
(b) Setting example

11 - 39 11 - 39
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
(station number 5)
checklist.

Hold/ clear
Operational STOP setting Default: Refresh
settings Number of Occupies 1 to 4 stations
Occupies 2 stations
occupied stations Default: Occupies 1 station
double
Master station
Master station
Type Local station
Local station
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
1 to 64
Default: 64
1 to 7
Retry count times
Default: 3
modules
count Default: 1
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
Default: Stop
11 - 40 11 - 40
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

11 - 41 11 - 41
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

POINT
(b) Setting example

11 - 42 11 - 42
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Master station Ver.1compatible local station Ver.2compatible local station
(station number 1: occupies 4 stations) (station number 5: occupies 2 stations: double)
Master station Ver.1 compatible Local station Ver.1 compatible Local station
PLC CPU buffer memory PLC CPU buffer memory PLC CPU
X100F to X1000 RX00F to RX000 RY00F to RY000 Y100F to Y1000 RY00F to RY000 Y100F to Y1000
X107D to X1070 RX07F to RX070 RY07F to RY070 Y107D to Y1070 RY07F to RY070 Y107D to Y1070
Y100F to Y1000 RY00F to RY000 RX00F to RX000 X100F to X1000 RX00F to RX000 X100F to X1000
Y107D to Y1070 RY07F to RY070 RX07F to RX070 X107D to X1070 RX07F to RX070 X107D to X1070
Ver.2 compatible Ver.2 compatible

buffer memory buffer memory
X154F to X1540 RX0AF to RX0A0 RY0AF to RY0A0 Y154F to Y1540
X155D to X1550 RX0BF to RX0B0 RY0BF to RY0B0 Y155D to Y1550

Y154F to Y1540 RY0AF to RY0A0 RX0AF to RX0A0 X154F to X1540
Y155D to Y1550 RY0BF to RY0B0 RX0BF to RX0B0 X155D to X1550
11 - 43 11 - 43
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Master station (station number 1) (station number 5)
Master station Ver.1 compatible Local station Ver.1 compatible Local station
PLC CPU buffer memory PLC CPU buffer memory PLC CPU
W0000 RWr00 RWw00 W1000 RWw00 W0100
W0001 RWr01 RWw01 W1001 RWw01 W0101
W0002 RWr02 RWw02 W1002 RWw02 W0102
W0003 RWr03 RWw03 W1003 RWw03 W0103
W0004 RWr04 RWw04 W1004 RWw04 W0104
W0005 RWr05 RWw05 W1005 RWw05 W0105
W0006 RWr06 RWw06 W1006 RWw06 W0106
W0007 RWr07 RWw07 W1007 RWw07 W0107
W0008 RWr08 RWw08 W1008 RWw08 W0108
W0009 RWr09 RWw09 W1009 RWw09 W0109
W000A RWr0A RWw0A W100A RWw0A W010A
W000B RWr0B RWw0B W100B RWw0B W010B
W000C RWr0C RWw0C W100C RWw0C W010C
W000D RWr0D RWw0D W100D RWw0D W010D
W000E RWr0E RWw0E W100E RWw0E W010E
W000F RWr0F RWw0F W100F RWw0F W010F
W0100 RWw00 RWr00 W0000 RWr00 W0000

W0101 RWw01 RWr01 W0001 RWr01 W0001
W0102 RWw02 RWr02 W0002 RWr02 W0002
W0103 RWw03 RWr03 W0003 RWr03 W0003
W0104 RWw04 RWr04 W0004 RWr04 W0004
W0105 RWw05 RWr05 W0005 RWr05 W0005
W0106 RWw06 RWr06 W0006 RWr06 W0006
W0107 RWw07 RWr07 W0007 RWr07 W0007
W0108 RWw08 RWr08 W0008 RWr08 W0008
W0109 RWw09 RWr09 W0009 RWr09 W0009
W010A RWw0A RWr0A W000A RWr0A W000A
W010B RWw0B RWr0B W000B RWr0B W000B
W010C RWw0C RWr0C W000C RWr0C W000C
W010D RWw0D RWr0D W000D RWr0D W000D
W010E RWw0E RWr0E W000E RWr0E W000E
W010F RWw0F RWr0F W000F RWr0F W000F
Ver.2 compatible Ver.2 compatible

buffer memory buffer memory
W1000 RWr10 RWw10 W1500
W1001 RWr11 RWw11 W1501
W1002 RWr12 RWw12 W1502
W1003 RWr13 RWw13 W1503
W1004 RWr14 RWw14 W1504
W1005 RWr15 RWw15 W1505
W1006 RWr16 RWw16 W1506
W1007 RWr17 RWw17 W1507
W1008 RWr18 RWw18 W1508
W1009 RWr19 RWw19 W1509
W100A RWr1A RWw1A W150A
W100B RWr1B RWw1B W150B
W100C RWr1C RWw1C W150C
W1500 RWw10 RWr10 W1000

W1501 RWw11 RWr11 W1001
W1502 RWw12 RWr12 W1002
W1503 RWw13 RWr13 W1003
W1504 RWw14 RWr14 W1004
W1505 RWw15 RWr15 W1005
W1506 RWw16 RWr16 W1006
W1507 RWw17 RWr17 W1007
W1508 RWw18 RWr18 W1008
W1509 RWw19 RWr19 W1009
W150A RWw1A RWr1A W100A
W150B RWw1B RWr1B W100B
W150C RWw1C RWr1C W100C
11 - 44 11 - 44
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Control program
Control program using
data received from local
Program to generate
received from local station
of station No. 5
Program to generate

(a) Ver.1 compatible local station (station number 1) program
data link
Control program
(b) Ver.2 compatible local station (station number 5) program

data link
Control program
11 - 45 11 - 45
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q
REMARK
For details, refer to Remark in Section 11.2.4.


: On : Off
Module is normal
normally
RUN L RUN

: On : Off
Module is normal
normally
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
11 - 46 11 - 46
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

normally.
station turns on.
station turns on.
Master
station
Terminal
resistor

(station number 1: Occupies 4 stations)

(station number 5: Occupies 2 stations: double)
Terminal
resistor
11 - 47 11 - 47
INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

The communication method between the master station and intelligent device stations
is different for each intelligent device station.
For more details on the communication between the master station and intelligent
device stations, see the manual for each intelligent device station. 12
12 - 1 12 - 1
MELSEC-Q
MEMO
12
12 - 2 12 - 2
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes the details of the problems that may occur in the CC-Link
System, and lists the check items and procedures for each of the possible problems.
13.1 Verification upon Problem Occurrence
The following lists the details of the check items and procedures for each problem
occurrence.
Description of problem Check item Check procedure
• Check the cable connection visually or with a line 13
Are there any disconnected cables? test.
• Check the line status (SW0090).
Connect the supplied terminal resistors to the
Are terminal resistors connected to the terminal
terminal stations located at each end of the CC-Link
stations located at each end of the CC-Link system?
system.
Connect the appropriate terminal resistors that
match the cable type used for the terminal stations
Are correct terminal resistors connected?
located at each end of the CC-Link system. (See
Section 7.5.)
Has an error occurred at the master station's PLC Check the error code of the PLC CPU and take
CPU? corrective action.
Are the CC-Link parameters set in the PLC CPU of Check the contents of the parameters for the PLC
Unable to perform data link for the entire system. the master station? CPU of the master station.
Does the sequence scan time exceed the tolerance
for each transmission rate when using the
synchronous mode?
10 Mbps : 50 ms Switch to the asynchronous mode, or reduce the
5 Mbps : 50 ms transmission rate.
2.5 Mbps : 100 ms
625 kbps : 400 ms
156 kbps : 800 ms
• Check the host parameter status (SW0068).
• Check the switch setting status (SW006A).
Has an error occurred at the master station? • Check the Loading status (SW0069).
• Check to see if the "ERR." LED on the master
station is flashing. (See Section 13.2.)
• Check the LED display on the corresponding
Is the corresponding remote I/O station performing remote I/O station.
data link? • Check the other station data link status of the
master station. (SW0080 to SW0083)
Is data read from the correct address of remote • Check the sequence program.
input RX (buffer memory)? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
Is the correct master station parameter information
Unable to receive input from a remote I/O station. area being used (CPU built-in parameters, default Check parameter information (SW0067).
parameters)?
• Check the parameters.
• Check the total number of stations (SW0070).
Is the corresponding remote I/O station number • Check the max. communication station number
recognized by the master station? (SW0071).
• Check the number of connected modules
(SW0072).
13 - 1 13 - 1
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Is the corresponding station set as a reserved
• Check the reserved station specified status
station?
(SW0074 to SW0077).
• Check the station number setting.
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
Are there any overlap station numbers?
• Check the station number overlap status
(SW0098 to SW009B).
Unable to receive input from a remote I/O station. • Check the loading status (SW0069).
Do the settings match? (SW0098 to SW009B).
• Check the loading/parameter consistency status
(SW009C to SW009F).
Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh
• Check the sequence program.
13 parameters and the refresh executed with the
• Check the automatic refresh parameter settings.
FROM/TO instructions performed simultaneously?
Is the corresponding remote I/O station performing remote I/O station.
data link? • Check the other station data link status of the
Is data written to the correct address of remote • Check the sequence program.
output RY (buffer memory)? • Check the automatic refresh parameter settings.
Is the master station parameter information area
being used (CPU built-in internal parameters, Check parameter information (SW0067).
default parameters) correct?
Is the corresponding remote I/O station number • Check the max. communication station number
(SW0072).
Unable to output data from a remote I/O station.
station?
(SW0074 to SW0077).
(SW0098 to SW009B).
(SW009C to SW009F).
parameters and the refresh executed with the
Unable to receive remote input (RX) of a remote Is the corresponding remote device station remote device station.
device station. performing data link? • Check the other station data link status of the
13 - 2 13 - 2
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

input RX (buffer memory)? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
area being used (CPU built-in parameters, default Check parameter information (SW0067).
parameters)?
Is the corresponding remote device station number • Check the max. communication station number
(SW0072).
station?
Unable to receive remote input (RX) of a remote (SW0074 to SW0077).
device station. • Check the station number setting.
(SW0098 to SW009B).
(SW009C to SW009F).
Is the remote device station initialization procedure Check if the remote device station initialization
registration being executed? procedure registration instruction (SB000D) is on.
Is the corresponding remote device station remote device station.
performing data link? • Check the other station data link status of the
output RY (buffer memory)? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
parameters)?
Unable to turn on/off remote output (RY) of a remote
device station.
(SW0072).
station?
(SW0074 to SW0077).
(SW0098 to SW009B).
(SW009C to SW009F).
13 - 3 13 - 3
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Unable to turn on/off remote output (RY) of a remote • Check the automatic refresh parameter settings.
device station.
register RWr (buffer memory)? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
parameters)?
(SW0072).
Unable to receive data to the remote register RWr in • Check the parameters.
a remote device station. • Check the reserved station specified status
station?
(SW0074 to SW0077).
(SW0098 to SW009B).
(SW009C to SW009F).
Is data written from the correct address of remote • Check the sequence program.
register RWw (buffer memory)? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
Unable to write data to the remote register RWw in parameters)?
a remote device station. • Check the parameters.
(SW0072).
station?
(SW0074 to SW0077).
13 - 4 13 - 4
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

(SW0098 to SW009B).
Unable to write data to the remote register RWw in Do the settings match? (SW0098 to SW009B).
the remote device station. • Check the loading/parameter consistency status
(SW009C to SW009F).
• Check the LED display on the corresponding local
Is the corresponding local station performing data station.
link? • Check the other station data link status of the
output RY (buffer memory) of the master station? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
input RX (buffer memory) of the local station? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
Is the corresponding local station number • Check the max. communication station number
Unable to communicate from the master station
(remote output RY) to a local station (remote input
(SW0072).
RX).
station?
(SW0074 to SW0077).
(SW0098 to SW009B).
(SW009C to SW009F).
output RY (buffer memory) of the local station? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
Unable to communicate from a local station (remote Is data read from the correct address of remote • Check the sequence program.
output RY) to the master station (remote input RX). input RX (buffer memory) of the master station? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
(SW0072).
13 - 5 13 - 5
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

station?
(SW0074 to SW0077).
Unable to communicate from a local station (remote • Check the station number overlap status
output RY) to the master station (remote input RX). (SW0098 to SW009B).
(SW009C to SW009F).
Is the corresponding local station performing data
link?
station.
Do the number of occupied stations settings for a
• Check the other station data link status of the
local station match to the station information for a
master station?
Is data written to the correct address of remote
register RWw (buffer memory) of the master
• Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
station?
register RWr (buffer memory) of the local station? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
Unable to communicate from the master station
(remote register RWw) to a local station (remote
register RWr).
(SW0072).
station?
(SW0074 to SW0077).
(SW0098 to SW009B).
(SW009C to SW009F).
Unable to communicate from a local station (remote
register RWw) to the master station (remote register
RWr).
register RWw (buffer memory) of the local station? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
register RWr (buffer memory) of the master station? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
13 - 6 13 - 6
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

(SW0072).
Unable to communicate from a local station (remote station? • Check the reserved station specified status
register RWw) to the master station (remote register (SW0074 to SW0077).
RWr). • Check the station number setting.
(SW0098 to SW009B).
(SW009C to SW009F).
Unable to operate the local station at the specified Is the QJ61BT11 of function version A set to occupy
Set the number of occupied stations to 1 or 4.
number of occupied stations. 2 or 3 stations.
Is the data link stop (SB0002) turned on?
Unable to stop data link. • Check the automatic refresh parameter settings.
Has an error occurred? Check the data link stop result (SW0045).
Is the data link restart (SB0000) turned on?
• Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
Has an error occurred? Check the data link restart result (SW0041).
Unable to restart data link. • Check the cable connection visually or with a line
test.
Is the corresponding station disconnected? • Check the parameters (for local station).
• Check the operation status of the PLC CPU in the
corresponding station.
Do the parameters for the number of modules and
The remote station/local station/intelligent device station information match the settings of the Check the parameters.
station/standby master station does not start up. modules that do not start up?
Are there any overlap station numbers? Check the station number setting.
Check that the station number of the local station Check the station number setting switches and
(including the number of occupied stations) is not 65 parameter of the local station/standby master
or more. station.
The local station/standby master station does not Does the mode of the master station match the Check the parameters of the master station and
start up and the "ERR." LED turns on. mode of the local station/standby master station? local station/standby master station.
Check that the parameter of the master station that
will return to the system by the standby master Check the parameter of the master station.
function has not been rewritten.
Is the station set as an error invalid station? Check the parameters.
Faulty stations cannot be detected.
Is the station number overlapped elsewhere? Check the station number setting.
Can the faulty station be identified using the other
station data link status (SW0080 to SW0083)?
• Check the switch settings for the faulty station.
• Check that the cable is properly wired.
Faulty stations are generated depending on • Check that the shield of the cable is grounded.
transmission rate. If the transmission rate is reduced to a lower level • Connect the terminal resistor that matches the
such as 156 kbps, can communication be cable type used to the terminal stations located
performed without producing an error? at each end of the CC-Link system.
• Check the error code for the PLC CPU.

• Check the error code for the master station.
When a dedicated instruction is executed, the
Has an error occurred? • Check the operation status of the PLC CPUs for
abnormal completion bit turns on.
both the master station and the corresponding
local station.
Are there any errors in the initial settings of the • Check the parameters.
The remote device station is not operating normally.
remote device station? • Check the sequence program.
When multiple remote stations are powered off at • Increase the transmission rate.
What is the setting for the retry count?
156 kbps, the "L RUN" LED goes off temporarily. • Reduce the retry count.
Has a value been set for the intelligent function Disable the intelligent function module switch setting
CC-Link cannot be started automatically.
module switch setting? of GX Developer.
Is the switch 4 setting of the intelligent function Set switch 4 of the intelligent function module switch
module switch settings correct? settings of GX Developer to 0100H.
• Check the error code for the PLC CPU.
The abnormal completion bit turns on when the Are the various settings specified by the RLPASET • Check the error code for the master station.
dedicated instruction (RLPASET) is executed. instruction correct? • Check the operation status of the PLC CPU for
the master station.
Has the parameter setting method been changed
Turn the power supply to the PLC system off and
without turning the power supply to the PLC system
back on, or reset the PLC CPU.
off and back on, or resetting the PLC CPU?
Change the module for the one having the same
If the condition returns to normal, the disconnected Has the module been changed for the one having number of occupied stations and station type.
data link error station does not return to the different number of occupied stations When changing the number of occupied stations
the system automatically. and station type during data link? and/or station type, reset the master
station after changing.
Check the error code in the Error dialog box of GX
Check the error code list and take corrective action.
Developer.
GX Developer cannot communicate with the other Does the PLC CPU of the station set in "Transfer
station PLC CPU. Check the error code of the PLC CPU.
setup" have an error?
Is the station set in "Transfer setup" executing data Check whether the "L RUN" LED of the
link? corresponding station is on or not.
13 - 7 13 - 7
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
13.2 Troubleshooting Procedures When the "ERR." LED of the Master Station is Flashing or
When Normal Data cannot be Sent/Received During Data Link
Do the parameter
N
settings and the installed system
configuration match
properly?
Revise the parameter settings
or installed system configuration
Y
Are the master

station link special registers N
SW0080 to SW0083 (other station
data link status)
turned on?
Y Master station malfunction
Are the master

station link special registers N
SW0098 to SW009B (station
number overlap status)
turned on?
Y
Check on master station side
Check the module for which Check the module for which
SW0098 to SW009B are on SW0080 to SW0083 are on
Check on slave station side
Are the
station number N
Is the power on?
switches set properly? N
(Are there any station numbers
that are incompletely
matched? 2) Y Turn on the power
Set the station number
switches properly
Y
Turn on the power again/

turn on the reset switch
N Is there a "POWER" LED

Corresponding module on the module?
malfunction
Y
N
Is the "POWER" LED lit?
Y Is the supplied N
power within the specified
range?
Y
N Set the supplied voltage to
Is the "RD" LED lit? within the specified range
Y Corresponding module
malfunction
Is the communication N
cable wired properly?
1
Correct the communication
Y
cable wiring
Corresponding module
malfunction
To next page To next page To next page
1: Check for short-circuits, reversed connection, disconnection, terminal resistors, FG connection, overall distance,
and distance between stations.
13 - 8 13 - 8
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
From previous page From previous page From previous page
N
Is the "SD" LED lit (flashing)?
Y N
Is the transmission rate
setting correct?
Y
Set the correct transmission
rate

Is the communication N
cable wired properly?
1
Y Wire the communication

cable properly
Corresponding module
malfunction
(baud rate switch)
Are the station

number switches set properly? N
(Are there any station numbers
that are completely
matched? 3)
Set the correct
station numbers
Y

N
Is the "MST" LED unlit?
Corresponding module The master station

malfunction already exists. Reset the
(station number switch) module to operate as the
standby master station.
End
2 Incomplete match
Occupies 2 Occupies 1
stations or more station or more

number number
number n n+1 number n n+1
Or
number number
number m m+1 number m m+1
Occupies 1 Occupies 2
station or more stations or more
3 Complete match
Occupies 1
station or more
Station Station
number
number n n+1
Station Station
number
number m m+1
Occupies 1
station or more
13 - 9 13 - 9
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
13.3 Error Codes

Table 13.1 lists the error codes that are stored in the link special registers (SW).
When the standby master station is operating as the master station, the detectability is
identical to that of the master station.
When the standby master is operating as a local station, the detectability is identical to
that of the local station.
Table 13.1 Error code list (1/6)

Error code Error details Cause of error occurrence (details) Corrective action Detectability
(hexadecimal) Master station Local station
Handle by referring to the
4000 to (Errors detected by the PLC ——— troubleshooting section of CPU
― ―
4FFF CPU) User's Manual (Hardware Design,
Maintenance and Inspection).
7000 to (Errors detected by serial ——— troubleshooting section of the Serial
― ―
7FFF communication module, etc) Communication Module User's
manual
Transient data can not be
B110 A line error has occurred. Check the line.
received.
Transient data receiving order
B111 A line error has occurred. Check the line.
error
B112 Transient data length error A line error has occurred. Check the line.
A line error has occurred or an Check the line, or check the supply
B113 Transient data ID error instantaneous power failure has occurred power and power supply module of
at the send station. the send station.
B114 Link error A line error has occurred. Check the line.
B115 Link error A line error has occurred. Check the line.
B116 Packet error A line error has occurred. Check the line.
In the remote device station initialize
Do not turn the specification of the
Forced termination of the procedure registration function, the
remote device station initialize
B120 remote device station initialize specification of the remote device station
procedure registration off until all
procedure registration function initialize procedure registration was turned
procedures are completed.
off before all procedures were completed.
Error at a station on which the The specification of the remote device Turn on the remote device station
remote device station initialize station initialize procedure registration initialization procedure registration
B124
procedure registration function function was turned on at a station other instruction on the master station
was executed than the master station. (station No.0).
The specification of the remote device Turn on the specification of the remote
Parameter not set error of the station initialize procedure registration device station initialize procedure
B125 remote device station initialize function was turned on without setting the registration function after setting the
procedure registration function remote device station initialize procedure remote device station initialize
registration. procedure registration.
Check the communication status of
A data link error occurred at the other stations, whether or not a
Corresponding station error
B201 corresponding station during transient temporary error invalid station is
during sending
transmission. specified, or if the corresponding
station is stopped.
A transient request was issued to other
B205 Transient target station error Check the target station.
than the intelligent device station.
Processing request error during Line test request was issued while the Perform a line test while the link is
B301
link stop link was stopped. being established
The specified station number exceeded
the highest communication station Specify a station number that is no
Specified station number
B302 number during temporary error invalid greater than the highest
setting error
request/temporary error invalid cancel communication station number.
request.
The station number was not specified during
Specified station number not Set a specified station number.
B303 temporary error invalid request/temporary
set error (SW0003, SW0004 to SW0007)
error invalid cancel request.
An error was detected in a remote Check that the remote station,
station, intelligent device station or intelligent device station or standby
B304 Line test error station detected
standby master station when a line test master station is operational and
was performed. that the cable is not disconnected.
A station number other than the head Specify a head station when
Specified station number station number was specified during temporary error invalid
B306
setting error temporary error invalid request/temporary request/temporary error invalid
error invalid cancel request. cancel request is requested.
All stations were in data link error status
when one of the following requests was
Request again after the data link
B307 All stations data link error made:
becomes normal.
• SB0000 (data link restart)
• SB0002 (data link stop)
Set the station number of the slave
Station number setting error The station number of the slave station is
B308 station within the range between "1
(installation status) outside of the range between "1 and 64".
and 64".
The station number of the connected
module was duplicated (including
B309 Station number overlap error number of occupied stations). Check the module station number.
However, this excludes the duplicate
head station number.
13 - 10 13 - 10
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Error code Error details Cause of error occurrence (details) Corrective action Detectability
The station types of the module are
different from parameter settings.
Example)
Connected Parameter
module setting
Loading/parameter
B30A Remote Set the correct parameters.
compatibility error Remote I/O
device
Remote I/O
Intelligent
Remote
device
device
Set the contents of the

Loading/parameter The contents of the installation status
B30B installation status and network
compatibility error and network parameters do not match.
parameters to match.
Master station switching was instructed Specify the station number that
B30C to a station other than the standby corresponds to the standby
specification error
master station. master station.
Temporary error invalid station
Issue the requests after the
B30D Initial status specification and line test requests were
data link is started.
issued before starting the link.
In the function started by SB/SW, an
attempt was made to execute the Execute the corresponding
B30E Unsupported error function, which is function from the master
supported by only the master station, at station.
the local station.
Specify a temporary error
A temporary error invalid station was invalid station while the data
Temporary error invalid station specified while the data link is being link is performed with
B30F
specification error performed upon automatic CC-Link parameters set using GX
startup. Developer or the dedicated
instruction.
Execute Data link restart
Data link restart (SB0000) was executed
(SB0000) for the station that
B310 Data link restart error for the station that was performing a data
has stopped a data link with
link.
Data link stop (SB0002).
Data link stop (SB0002) was executed Execute Data link stop
B311 Data link stop error for the station that had stopped a data (SB0002) for the station that is
link. performing a data link.
Forced master to standby master
After starting the data link of the
switching (SB000C) was executed in the
Standby master station standby master station, execute
B312 system where no standby master station
absence error Forced master to standby
exists or in the system where the standby
master switching (SB000C).
master station had become faulty.
Forced master to standby master After starting the data link of the
switching (SB000C) was executed in the standby master station, execute
B313 All station fault error
system where all stations had become Forced master to standby
faulty. master switching (SB000C).
Execute Forced master to
Forced master to standby master
standby master switching
B314 Switching target error switching (SB000C) was executed for
(SB000C) for the master
any station other than the master station.
station.
Forced master switching (SB000C) was
Forced master station switching instructed again while the master station Check ON/OFF of Forced
B315
error was being switched to the standby master switching (SB000C).
master station.
Use the RLPASET instruction
according to the procedure
below.
1. Clear the settings of the
network parameters and
refresh parameters of the
The RLPASET instruction was executed
target module using GX
for a module whose parameters have
Developer.
been set by GX Developer.
Network startup setting mode 2. Set the type of I/O
B317 The parameter setting was changed
error assignment setting in GX
without turning the power supply to the
Developer to "intelli."
PLC system off and back on, or resetting
3. Set switch 4 of the intelligent
the PLC CPU.
function module switch
setting in GX Developer to
0100 H.
4. Turn the power supply to the
PLC system off and back on,
or reset the PLC CPU.
Station number switch setting The station number switch was outside of Set the station number switch
B381
error the setting range. within the setting range.
Set the transmission rate
Transmission rate setting The transmission rate setting switch is
B383 setting switch to within the
switch setting error set outside the range.
setting range.
13 - 11 13 - 11
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Error code Detectability
Error details Cause of error occurrence (details) Corrective action
The station number (including the
Station number setting error number of occupied stations) of the Set within the range of "1H to
B384
(parameter) station information parameters was set to 40H".
"other than 1 H to 40H."
The total number of occupied stations set
Total number of stations error Set a parameter value of 64 or
B385 with the station information parameter
(parameter) less.
exceeded 64.
The number of all occupied stations in Set the occupied station
Number of occupied stations
B386 the station information parameter was set number to a value between "1
setting error (parameter)
to "0". and 4".
The delay time setting in the master
Delay time setting error Set a value within the setting
B387 station network parameters is out of the
(parameter) range.
setting range.
Station type setting error The station type in the station information Set to a value between "0 and
B388
(parameter) parameter was set to "other than 0 to 2". 2".
The number of remote device stations Set the remote device station to
Remote device station setting
B38B was set to "43 stations or more" with the "42 stations or less" with the
error (parameter)
station information parameter. station information parameter.
The number of intelligent device stations
Set the intelligent device station
Intelligent device station setting (including local stations) was set to "27
B38C to "26 stations or less" with the
error (parameter) stations or more" with the station
station information parameter.
information parameter.
"Other than module head station
number" or "station number not specified
in the parameter" was set with the invalid Set the "Head station number of
station specification parameter. the module".
Invalid station specified error
B38D <Example of other than head station Do not specify any of the
(parameter)
number> stations not specified with the
A bit other than that for station number 5 parameter.
was ON for a module occupies 4 stations
(station numbers 5 to 8).
The total size of the communication Set the total size of the
Communication buffer
B38E buffers in the station information communication buffers to 4 k
assignment error (parameter)
parameter exceeded 4 k words. words or less.
The total size of the automatic update Set the total size of the
Automatic update buffer
B38F buffer in the station information automatic update buffer to 4 k
assignment error (parameter)
parameter exceeded 4 k words. words or less.
Specify the standby master
Standby master station The standby master station parameter
B390 station to a value within the
specification error (parameter) was set to a value other than "1 to 64".
range from "1 to 64".
Retry count setting error The retry count parameter was set to a Set a value within the range
B391
(parameter) value other than "1 to 7". from "1 to 7".
The operation when the CPU is down
Operation when CPU is down
B392 specification parameter was set to a Set "0 or 1".
specified error (parameter)
value other than "0 or 1".
Scan mode specification error The scan mode parameter was set to a
B393 Set "0 or 1".
(parameter) value other than "0 or 1".
Number of automatic return The number of automatic return stations
Set a value within the range
B394 stations setting error parameter was set to a value other than
from "1 to 10".
(parameter) "1 to 10".
Station number overlap error A duplicate station number was specified Set so that station numbers are
B396
(parameter) with the station information parameter. not duplicated.
The station information parameter setting
does not meet the following condition:
(16 4) + (54 B) + (88 C) < 2304 Set the parameter so that it
Station information setting error
B397 A: Number of remote I/O stations meets the condition shown on
(parameter)
B: Number of remote device stations left.
C: Number of intelligent device stations
(including local stations)
The number of occupied stations in the
Number of occupied stations Set a value within the range
B398 station information parameter was set to
setting error (parameter) from "1 to 4".
a value other than "1 to 4".
The number of connected modules
Number of connected modules Set a value within the range
B399 parameter was set to a value other than
setting error (parameter) from "1 to 64".
"1 to 64".
13 - 12 13 - 12
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

The station number set with the station
number setting switches of the standby Change the parameter setting of the
master station differs from that set in the master station, or change the
"standby master station No." network station number setting of the
B39A specification error (loading
parameter of the master station, or the local/standby master station, and
status)
station set in the "standby master station then reset the PLC CPU of the
No." network parameter of the master local/standby master station.
station is a local station.
B39B Reserved station setting error All stations were set as reserved stations. Check the reserved station settings.
Any other than Intelligent device station
Specify the standby master station
has been set to the station type for the
as an intelligent device station.
Standby master station "Standby master station No." specified in
B39C Make the same setting to the
setting error the master station network parameter.
master and standby master
The mode setting is different between the
stations.
master and standby master stations.
Reserved station 0 points setting has been Change the mode to the remote net
made in the remote net additional mode. ver. 2 mode.
Reserved station 0 points
B39D Reserved station 0 points setting has been
setting error Set the station of reserved 0 points
made for the station that is not a reserved
setting as a reserved station.
station.
Remote I/O station points setting is 8/16 Change the mode to the remote net
points in the remote net additional mode. ver. 2 mode.
8 points setting and 16 points
8/16 points setting has been made for the
8/16-point remote I/O station setting have been made for the
B39E station other than the remote I/O station.
setting error same remote I/O station.
Make either 8 points setting or 16
Make 8/16 points setting for the same
points setting for the remote I/O
remote I/O station.
station.
In the remote net additional mode,
In the remote net additional mode, the
make network parameter setting so
"maximum station number of ver. 1
that the "maximum station number
Remote net additional mode compatible slave stations" is greater than
B39F of ver. 1 compatible slave stations"
station number illegal the "minimum station number of ver. 2
is less than the "minimum station
compatible slave stations" in the network
number of ver. 2 compatible slave
parameter setting.
stations".
Model illegal has occurred between the
master and local/standby master stations.
• The mode differs between the master
and standby master stations.
• The local station is set to the remote net After correcting the mismatch of
Mode illegal (between master
additional mode, and the master station modes between the master and
B3A0 and local/standby master
is set to other than the remote net local/standby master stations, reset
stations)
additional mode. the PLC CPU.
• The local station is in the remote net ver.
2 mode or remote net additional mode,
and the master station is in the remote
net ver. 1 mode.
At the time of parameter setting with
Set a correct value to switch 5 of the
dedicated instruction, an illegal value has
B3A1 Standby master setting illegal intelligent function module switch
been set to switch 5 of the intelligent
setting.
function module switch setting.
At the time of parameter setting with
Remote I/O net mode station dedicated instruction, the station type of Set all station types to the remote
B3A2
type illegal other than the remote I/O station has been I/O station.
set in the remote I/O net mode.
In the remote net Ver.2 mode or remote
net additional mode, total points for remote Check the points for remote stations
B3A3 Assignment error
stations set in the station information has in the station information setting.
exceeded the maximum of 8192.
When the standby master station was
operating as the master station with the Return the network parameter
B3A4 Parameter mismatch master station duplex function, the network setting of the master station to the
parameter setting of the faulty master original value.
station was changed.
The mode set in the control data of the Check the control data of the
RLPASET instruction differs from the mode RLPASET instruction and the switch
B3A5 Mode illegal (parameter)
set with switch 3 of the intelligent module 3 setting of the intelligent module
switch setting. switch setting.
13 - 13 13 - 13
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Change the parameter after all
Parameter change was executed during transient requests are
B401 Parameter change error
transient request. completed or before any are
requested.
A response from the requested station Set a longer watchdog time. If
B404 Response error was not returned within the watchdog an error persists, check the
time period. requested module and cables.
A transient request was made to a Set the corresponding station to
Transient applicable station
B405 remote I/O station or a remote device a local station or an intelligent
error
station. device station.
The receive buffer size of the dedicated
B410 Receive buffer size error instruction is less than the response data Check the receive buffer size.
size.
The number of read/write points in the Change the number of
B411 Data length outside of range control data of the dedicated instruction read/write points to within the
is outside the setting range. setting range.
The station number in the control data of
Station number outside of Change the station number to
B412 the dedicated instruction is outside the
range within the setting range.
setting range.
Multiple dedicated instructions were
B413 Request error Check the sequence program.
executed for the same station.
The setting of the interlock signal storage Change the setting of the
Interlock signal data outside of
B414 device of the RIRCV or RISEND interlock signal storage device
range
instruction is outside the setting range. to within the setting range.
Check the contents of the
B601 Request type error An unsupported request was received. request, as well as the target
station number.
Wait a while and then send the
Transient request overload There are too many transient requests to
B602 requests (transient overload
error the corresponding station.
status).
Wait a while and then send the
B603 requests (transient overload
status).
Transient transmission was sent when a Wait a while and then
B604 Line test in processing
line test was in progress. retransmit.
Transient storage buffer could Transient storage buffer could not be Wait a while and then
B605
not be obtained obtained. retransmit.
There is an error in the target station's
B607 Target station CPU error Check the target CPU.
CPU.
Wait a while and then
B771 retransmit (transient overloaded
status).
The target station was not an intelligent Check if the target station is an
B774 Transient request error
device station. intelligent device station.
A response was not received from the Check the requested module
B778 Response time out
requested station. and cables.
A transient transmission was executed
B780 Module mode setting error even though the target station was set to Set to the remote net mode.
the I/O mode.
The transmission destination and source Check the transmission
Station number specification
B782 stations were the same when other destination station number, or
error
station connection was specified. change to host connection.
An error occurred in the transient storage
Wait a while and then
B783 Transient storage buffer error buffer when a transient transmission of
retransmit.
greater than 1 k was being performed.
A non-existing access code/attribute was Set a correct access
B801 Access code setting error
set. code/attribute.
An access code that does not exist was
B802 Access code error Use the correct access code.
used.
The number of data points were out of Set the number of data points
B803 Data points error
range. to within 1 to 960 bytes.
13 - 14 13 - 14
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Review the attribute definition.
Attribute definition error The attribute definition was invalid. Check the designation of the
Transient transmission Alternatively, transient transmission was target station number, as well
B804 unsupported station performed even though the target station as the function version and
specification error does not support transient transmission. software version of the target
local station.
Set the range to within 1 to 100
B805 Data points error The number of data was out of range. when writing, and 1 to 160
when reading.
Set the address to a multiple of
The address was not a multiple of 16
B807 Address definition error 16 when accessing the bit
when the bit device was accessed.
device.
The specified combination (addresses Set so that the number of
B80D Setting range error and points) exceeded the valid processing points does not
processing range. exceed the device range .
File register capacity setting The file register capacity was not Specify the file register
B814
error specified. capacity.
A transient transmission was executed
B815 Module mode setting error when the target station was set to the I/O Set to the intelli mode.
mode.
The mode setting of the remote control
B823 Remote control mode error Check the mode specification.
was incorrect.
A transient request was issued to a
Secure a communication buffer
B903 Transient request error station that has not secured a
area with a parameter.
communication buffer area.
The communication buffer size of the
Set the communication buffer
Communication buffer size corresponding station was out of range
B904 size of the corresponding
setting error when a dedicated instruction was
station within the range.
executed.
When the dedicated instruction is Make the communication buffer
executed, the transient data length is size of the corresponding
B905 Transient data length error
greater than the communication buffer station greater than the
size of the corresponding station. transient data length.
The corresponding station that is being
Check the cable and the
BA19 Corresponding station error tested stopped communication during
corresponding station.
line test 1.
All stations stopped communications
BA1B All stations error Check the cables.
during line test 1.
The station number setting switch setting
Check the station number and
of the module is other than "0 to 64".
BBC2 Station number setting error the number of occupied stations
Alternatively, the last station number is
of the module.
greater than 64.
Reduce the number of master
Multiple master stations exist on the
stations on the same line to
same line.
BBC5 Master station overlapping error one.
Alternatively, line noise was detected at
Alternatively, check the line
power on.
status.
There is most likely a hardware
error in either the QJ61BT11N,
the CPU module, the base unit
BD85 Hardware error detection A hardware error was detected.
or other modules. Contact your
nearest Mitsubishi
representative.
Wait for a while before
BFFB transmitting again (transient
overload status).
Check the operation of the
BFFE CPU monitoring timer time out The CPU monitoring timer timed out.
target station.
C000 to (Errors detected by the ——— troubleshooting section of the
— —
CFFF Ethernet module) Ethernet Interface Module
User's manual.
(Error detected by the
troubleshooting section of the
F000 to MELSECENT/H, ——— MELSECNET/H, — —
FFFF MELSECNET10 network MELSECNET/10 network
system system reference manual
13 - 15 13 - 15
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
13.4 CC-Link Diagnostics Using the GX Developer
Check the status of each module after all the modules have been connected using CC-
Link dedicated cables, and verify that data link can be performed normally.
It is also possible when the QJ61BT11N is mounted on the remote I/O station of
MELSECNET/H.
(1) Host monitoring

This function monitors the items such as the data link status of the host (the
station to which peripheral devices are connected).
(a) Operating procedure
[Diagnostics] [CC-Link / CC-Link/LT diagnostics]
1) Select "CC-Link" for "Module Setting".
2) Specify the target module of Host monitoring for "Module No." or "I/O
Address".
3) Click the Start Monitoring button.
(b) Monitoring items

1) Host station
Indicates the type (master station, local station, standby master station)
of the monitored station and the mode* of CC-Link.
For a local station, the station number is also displayed.
Not displayed in the remote net ver. 1 mode.
2) Data link status
Displays the data link status of the host.
3) Action status
Displays the operating status of the host.
4) Switching status
Displays whether the data link is controlled by the master station or
standby master station.
5) Using loop
Displays the line in use.
6) Line status
Displays the line status.
7) Loop type
Displays the line type.
13 - 16 13 - 16
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
POINT
When conducting a network test, do not perform write to buffer memory address
5E0H.
(2) Other station monitoring

This function monitors the items such as the data link status of other stations
(stations other than the one to which peripheral devices are connected).
2) Specify the target master module of Monitoring other station for "Module
No." or "I/O Address".
4) Click the Monitoring other station button.
(b) Monitoring items

1) Station
Displays the head station number of each station.
2) Reserve
Displays whether or not a reserved station is set.
" ": Reserved station is set.
" ": Reserved station is not set.
3) Invalid error
Displays whether or not an error invalid station is set.
" ": Error invalid station is set.
" ": Error invalid station is not set.
13 - 17 13 - 17
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
4) Station type
Displays the station type.
The CC-Link compatible version is also displayed in the remote net ver.
2 mode or remote net additional mode.
"Intelli": Local station, intelligent device station and standby master
station
"I/O" : Remote I/O station
"Device" : Remote device station
5) Number of occupied stations
Displays the number of occupied stations.
6) Status
Displays the link status of the module.
7) Transient error
Displays whether or not an error occurred during transient transmission.
" ": Error occurred.
" ": Error did not occur.
8) Expanded cyclic setting*
Displays the expanded cyclic setting.
9) Remote station points*
Displays the numbers of remote input and output (RX, RY) points of the
remote, local, intelligent device and standby master stations.
Not displayed in the remote net ver. 1 mode.
POINT
When making temporary error invalid station setting, do not perform write to buffer
memory addresses 5E0H, 603H to 607H.
13 - 18 13 - 18
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
(3) Loop test

Checks the operating status of the connected remote stations, local stations,
intelligent device stations and standby master station.
Normal stations are displayed "blue", abnormal stations "red", reserved stations
"green", error invalid stations "yellow", and unused stations "gray".

2) Specify the target master module of loop test for "Module No." or "I/O
Address".
4) Click the Loop Test button.
5) When checking the communication status of all stations
Select "All stations" for "Target station", and click the Execute Test
button.
6) When checking the communication status of specific modules
Select "Selected station No." for "Target station", specify the station
number, and click the Execute Test button.
POINT
When conducting a loop test, do not perform write to buffer memory addresses
5E0H, 608H.
13 - 19 13 - 19
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
(4) H/W Information

This function displays the operation and setting statuses of the master module,
local modules, and standby master module.

[Diagnostics] [System monitor]
1) Select the QJ61BT11N.
2) Click the Module Detailed Information button.
3) Click the H/W Information button.
(b) Product information

The function version and serial No. are displayed as follows.
050320000000000-B
Function Version B
Serial No. (first 5 digits)
13 - 20 13 - 20
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
(c) H/W LED Information

The H/W LED Information displays the following data link information.
Item Value
1: When the module is operating normally
RUN
0: At watchdog timer error
1: All stations are faulty
ERR.
Switching between 0 and 1: There is a faulty station
MST 1: Set to the master station
S MST 1: Set to the standby master station
LOCAL 1: Set to a local station
SW 1: Error in switch setting
M/S 1: A master station already exists on the same line
PRM 1: There is an error in the parameter contents
TIME 1: The data link monitoring timer was activated
LINE 1: The cable is broken or the transmission path is affected by noise, etc.
156K 1: A transmission speed of 156 kbps is selected
625K 1: A transmission speed of 625 kbps is selected
2.5M 1: A transmission speed of 2.5 Mbps is selected
5M 1: A transmission speed of 5 Mbps is selected
10M 1: A transmission speed of 10 Mbps is selected
TEST 1: An offline test is being executed
S0 Not used
S1 Not used
S2 Not used
(d) H/W SW Information

The H/W SW Information displays the following information.
Item Value
STNo.x10 Setting value of station number setting switch X10
STNo.x1 Setting value of station number setting switch X1
MODE Setting values of transmission speed and mode setting switches
STNo. Station number of relevant module when the power supply is turned on
S MSTNo. Station number of the standby master station set by parameter
(0: No standby master station specification)
B RATE Setting of transmission speed
MODE Mode setting status
CONFIG SW62 (module operation status)
13 - 21 13 - 21
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
APPENDIX
Appendix 1 External Dimensions Diagram
This section describes the external dimensions of the QJ61BT11N.
QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
STATION
NO.
7 8
4 5 6
9 0 1
X10
2 3
7 8
4 56
9 0 1
X1
2 3
App. BCD
98 (3.86)
8 9A
EF 2
MODE
01
67
345
NC
1
NC
DA
2
SLD
3
DB 4
(FG)
5
DG
6
7
90 (3.54) 27.4 (1.08)
[Terminal block diagram with the cover open]
NC
NC
DA
SLD
DB
(FG)
DG
Unit: mm (inch)
App - 1 App - 1
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 2 Dedicated Instruction List
Transient transmission can be performed for the local stations and intelligent device
stations using dedicated instructions.
The following table lists the dedicated instructions that can be used for each of these
stations:
Target station Instruction Description Reference page

Reads data from the buffer memory or the
RIRD Appendix 2.1
Master station PLC CPU device of the specified station.
Local station Writes data into the buffer memory or the PLC
RIWT Appendix 2.2
CPU device of the specified station.
Reads data from the buffer memory of the
RIRD Appendix 2.1
specified station.
Writes data into the buffer memory of the
RIWT Appendix 2.2
specified station. App.
Automatically performs handshaking with the
specified station and reads data from the
RIRCV buffer memory of that station. Appendix 2.3
Available for modules that have handshake
signals (e.g. AJ65BT-R2).
Automatically performs handshaking with the
Intelligent specified station and writes data into the buffer
device station RISEND memory of that station. Appendix 2.4
Available for modules that have handshake
signals (e.g. AJ65BT-R2).
Reads data in the automatic update buffer of
the specified station.
RIFR Appendix 2.5
Available for modules that have the automatic
update buffer (e.g. AJ65BT-R2).
Writes data into the automatic update buffer of
the specified station.
RITO Appendix 2.6
Available for modules that have the automatic
update buffer (e.g. AJ65BT-R2).
Sets the network parameters for the master
Master station RLPASET Appendix 2.7
station and starts up the data link.
POINT
Execute the dedicated instructions while the data link is being performed.
If any of the dedicated instructions is executed offline, no error will occur, but the
execution of the dedicated instruction will not be completed.
App - 2 App - 2
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 2.1 RIRD instruction
The RIRD instruction reads the data for the specified points from the buffer memory or
the PLC CPU device of the specified station.
Usable devices
Internal device MELSECNET/H Special
Index Constant
Set data (System, user) File Direct J \ function
register Other
register module
Bit Word Bit Word Z K, H S
U \G
(S) — — — — —
(D1) — — — — —
(D2) — — — —
[Instruction [Execution
symbol] condition]
Command
RIRD G.RIRD Un (S) (D1) (D2)
Command
RIRD GP.RIRD Un (S) (D1) (D2)
Set data
Device Description Setting range Data type
Un Start I/O number of the module 0 to FEH Binary 16 bits
Within the range of the
(S) Start number of the device in which control data is stored.
specified device
Device name
(D1) Start number of the device to which read data is to be stored.
specified device
Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of
(D2) reading. Bit
specified device
(D2) + 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion.
The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data.
Control data
Device Item Set data Setting range Set by
Stores the status when the instruction is complete.
(S) + 0 Completion status 0 : No error (normal completion) — System
Other than 0: Error code
Specify the station numbers of the local station and intelligent
(S) + 1 Station number 0 to 64 User
device station.
b15 b8 b7 b0
Access code
(S) + 2 See (1) and (2). User
Attribute code
Access code Attribute code
Buffer memory
Specify the buffer memory start address or device start 1
(S) + 3 address or device User
number.
number
2
Number of points 1 to 480
(S) + 4 Specify the read data count (in word units). 3 User
to read 1 to 32
App - 3 App - 3
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
1: See the manual for the local station or the intelligent device station from which
data will be read. When the random access buffer is specified, specify the
addresses by setting the start address of the random access buffer memory as 0.
2: Indicates the maximum number of data items that can be read.
Specify the buffer memory size of the local station or the intelligent device station.
Also, specify the receive buffer area setting range to be set with a parameter.
3: When the counterpart PLC CPU is other than QCPU (Q mode)/QCPU (A mode)/
QnACPU/AnUCPU and reads the PLC CPU device, the setting range will be 1 to
32 words.
(1) Buffer memory in the CC-Link

Buffer Memory contents Access code Attribute code
Buffer in the intelligent device station 00H
Random access buffer 20H
Remote input 21H
Buffers in master station and local Remote output 22H 04H
station Remote register 24H
Link special relay 63H
Link special register 64H
(2) Device memory in the PLC CPU

Device type
Device contents Name Unit Access code Attribute code
Bit Word
Input relay X Hexadecimal 01H
Output relay Y Hexadecimal 02H
Internal relay M Decimal 03H
Latch relay L Decimal 83H
Link relay B Hexadecimal 23H
Timer (contact) T Decimal 09H
Timer (coil) T Decimal 0AH
Timer (present value) T Decimal 0CH
Retentive timer (contact) ST Decimal 89H
Retentive timer (coil) ST Decimal 8AH
Retentive timer (present value) ST Decimal 8CH 05H
Counter (contact) C Decimal 11H
Counter (coil) C Decimal 12H
Counter (present value) C Decimal 14H
Data register D Decimal 04H
Link register W Hexadecimal 24H
File register R Decimal 84H
Special link relay SB Hexadecimal 63H
Special link register SW Hexadecimal 64H
Special relay SM Decimal 43H
Special register SD Decimal 44H
Devices other than shown above cannot be accessed.
When accessing a bit device, specify it with 0 or a multiple of 16.
App - 4 App - 4
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(3) Functions
(a) Operation chart for the RIRD instruction
Master station Specified

station
PLC CPU Master module Local module PLC CPU
1)
Command
G.RIRD
1)
Buffer memory
2)
Device memory Device memory
3)
Receive buffer 2)
1) Accesses the buffer memory specified by (S)+2 and (S)+3 of the station
specified by (S)+1, or the PLC CPU device.
2) Stores the data that has been read in the receive buffer of the master
module.
3) Stores the data that has been read after the device specified in (D1), and
the device specified by (D2) turns on.
(b) The RIRD instruction can be executed to multiple local stations or intelligent
device stations simultaneously.
Note that concurrent execution of multiple instructions including other
instructions for transient transmission (refer to Appendix 2) is not allowed to
the same local station or intelligent device station.
Create a program in which a flag remains on until the instruction is
completed.
App - 5 App - 5
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(c) There are two types of interlock signals for the RIRD instruction: the
completion device (D2) and status display device at completion (D2) + 1.
1) Completion device
Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIRD instruction
is completed, and turns OFF in the next END processing.
2) Status display device at completion
Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the RIRD
instruction.
Normal completion : Stays OFF and does not change.
Abnormal completion: Turns ON in the END processing of the scan
where the RIRD instruction is completed, and
turns OFF in the next END processing.
END processing END processing END processing END processing
Sequence program
Execution completion of
ON the RIRD instruction
OFF
RIRD instruction
ON
OFF
Completion device ON Abnormal
completion
Status display device OFF Normal completion
at completion 1 scan
(d) Multiple dedicated instructions cannot be executed for the same station.
Since it takes several scans until the processing of the dedicated instruction
is completed, execute the next dedicated instruction after the completion
device has turned ON.
The next dedicated instruction executed before completion of the previously
executed dedicated instruction is ignored.
(e) The basic number of steps of the RIRD instruction is 8 steps.
(f) The receive buffer assignment is performed using the "Station information
setting" of the network parameters of the GX Developer. For more details,
see Section 6.2.
(4) Operation error

In the following cases, an operation error occurs; the error flag (SM0) turns ON
and the error code is stored in SD0.
Error code Description of operation error
When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module.
2112
When the module specified by Un is not a special function module.
4002 When an attempt was made to execute an unsupported instruction.
4003 When the number of devices in the instruction is incorrect.
4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used.
4100 When the instruction contains the data that cannot be used.
When the number of data set to be used exceeds the allowable range.
4101 Or, when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction
exceeds the allowable range.
App - 6 App - 6
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(5) Program example

When X0 is turned ON, this program stores 10-word data to D0 and succeeding
addresses from buffer memory address 100H of the intelligent device station
number 1, which is connected to the master module installed at I/O numbers
from X/Y40 to X/Y5F.
(When the link special register (SW) refresh device is set to SW0)
M12 is the RIRD instruction executing flag.
Performs processing for receive completion.
Performs processing for normal completion.
Performs processing for abnormal completion.
App - 7 App - 7
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 2.2 RIWT instruction
The RIWT instruction writes the data for the specified points, to the buffer memory or
the PLC CPU device of the specified station.
Usable devices
Index Constant
register Other
register module
U \G
(S1) — — — — —
(S2) — — — — —
(D) — — — —
symbol] condition]
Command
RIWT G.RIWT Un (S1) (S2) (D)
Command
RIWT GP.RIWT Un (S1) (S2) (D)
Set data
(S1) Start number of the device in which control data is stored.
specified device
Device name
(S2) Start number of the device to which write data is to be stored.
specified device
(D) writing. Bit
specified device
(D) + 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion.
Control data
(S1) + 0 Completion status 0 : No error (normal completion) — System
Specify the station numbers of the local station and intelligent
(S1) + 1 Station number 0 to 64 User
device station.
b15 b8 b7 b0
Access code
(S1) + 2 See (1) and (2). User
Attribute code
Access code Attribute code
Buffer memory
Specify the buffer memory start address or device start 1
(S1) + 3 address or device User
number.
number
2
Number of points 1 to 480
(S1) + 4 Specify the write data count (in word units). 3 User
to write 1 to 10
App - 8 App - 8
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
1: See the manual for the local station or the intelligent device station to which data
will be written. When the random access buffer is specified, specify the addresses
by setting the start address of the random access buffer memory as 0.
2: Indicates the maximum number of data items that can be written.
Specify the buffer memory capacity of the local station or the intelligent device
station. Also, specify the send buffer area setting range to be set with a parameter.
3: When the counterpart PLC CPU is other than QCPU (Q mode)/QCPU (A mode)/
QnACPU/AnUCPU and writes the PLC CPU device, the setting range will be 1 to
10 words.
(1) Buffer memory in the CC-Link

Buffer Memory contents Access code Attribute code
Buffer in the intelligent device station 00H
Random access buffer 20H
Remote input 21H
Buffers in master station and local Remote output 22H 04H
station Remote register 24H
Link special relay 63H
Link special register 64H
(2) Device memory in the PLC CPU

Device type
Device contents Name Unit Access code Attribute code
Bit Word
Input relay X Hexadecimal 01H
Output relay Y Hexadecimal 02H
Internal relay M Decimal 03H
Latch relay L Decimal 83H
Link relay B Hexadecimal 23H
Timer (contact) T Decimal 09H
Timer (coil) T Decimal 0AH
Timer (present value) T Decimal 0CH
Retentive timer (contact) ST Decimal 89H
Retentive timer (coil) ST Decimal 8AH
Retentive timer (present value) ST Decimal 8CH 05H
Counter (contact) C Decimal 11H
Counter (coil) C Decimal 12H
Counter (present value) C Decimal 14H
Data register D Decimal 04H
Link register W Hexadecimal 24H
File register R Decimal 84H
Special link relay SB Hexadecimal 63H
Special link register SW Hexadecimal 64H
Special relay SM Decimal 43H
Special register SD Decimal 44H
Devices other than shown above cannot be accessed.
When accessing a bit device, specify it with 0 or a multiple of 16.
App - 9 App - 9
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(3) Functions
(a) Operation chart for the RIWT instruction

station
PLC CPU Master module Local module PLC CPU
2)
Command
G.RIWT
1) 2)
Send buffer Buffer memory
3)
Device memory Device memory
3)
4)
1) Stores the data to be written to the specified station in the send buffer of
the master module.
2) Writes the data specified by (S2) to the buffer memory specified by
(S1)+2 and (S1)+3 of the station specified by (S1)+1 or to the PLC CPU
device.
3) The specified station returns the write complete response to the master
station.
4) The device specified by (D) turns ON.
(b) The RIWT instruction can be executed to multiple local stations or intelligent
device stations simultaneously.
the same local station or intelligent device station.
completed.
App - 10 App - 10
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(c) There are two types of interlock signals for the RIWT instruction: the
completion device (D) and the status display device at completion (D) + 1.
Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIWT instruction
is completed, and turns OFF in the next END processing.
Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the RIWT
instruction.
where the RIWT instruction is completed, and
Sequence program
ON the RIWT instruction
OFF
RIWT instruction
ON
OFF
completion
Status display device OFF Normal completion
at completion 1 scan
(e) The basic number of steps of the RIWT instruction is 8 steps.
(f) The send buffer assignment is performed using the "Station information
see Section 6.2.
(4) Operation error

2112
App - 11 App - 11
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(5) Program example

When X0 is turned ON, this program stores 10-word data from D0 to buffer
memory address 100H and succeeding addresses of the intelligent device station
number 1, which is connected to the master module installed at I/O numbers
from X/Y40 to X/Y5F.
M13 is the RIWT instruction executing flag.
Performs processing for receive completion.
App - 12 App - 12
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 2.3 RIRCV instruction
The RIRCV instruction automatically performs handshaking with an intelligent device

station and reads data from the buffer memory of the specified intelligent device station.
Available for modules that have handshake signals (e.g. AJ65BT-R2).
Usable devices
Index Constant
register Other
register module
U \G
(S1) — — — — —
(D1) — — — — —
(S2) — — — — —
(D2) — — — —
symbol] condition]
Command
RIRCV G.RIRCV Un (S1) (D1) (S2) (D2)
Command
RIRCV GP.RIRCV Un (S1) (D1) (S2) (D2)
Set data
specified device
(D1) Start number of the device to which read data is to be stored. Device name
specified device
Start number of the device in which the interlock signals are Within the range of the
(S2)
stored. specified device
Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of Within the range of the
(D2) Bit
reading. (D2)+1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion. specified device
Control data
(S1) + 1 Station number Specify the station number of the intelligent device station. 0 to 64 User
Access code
(S1) + 2 Set "0004H". 0004H User
Attribute code
Buffer memory 1
(S1) + 3 Specify the buffer memory start address. User
address
Number of points 2
(S1) + 4 Specify the read data count (in word units). 1 to 480 User
to read
App - 13 App - 13
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
1: See the manual for the intelligent device station from which data will be read.
2: Indicates the maximum number of data items that can be read.
Specify the buffer memory capacities of the intelligent device station and the receive buffer area setting
range to be set with a parameter.
Interlock signal storage devices

b15 to b8 b7 to b0 RY: Request device 0 to 127 User
(S2) + 0 0 RY
Set the upper 8 bits to 0. 0 User
RX : Completion device 0 to 127 User

b15 to b8 b7 to b0
(S2) + 1 RWr 1 RX
RWr : Error code storage device 0 to 15
User
If none, set to FFH. FFH
0: Complete with the contents of 1 device (RXn).
b15 to b0 1: Complete with the contents of 2 devices (RXn and
(S2) + 2 completion mode 0/1 User
RXn+1).
(RXn+1 turns ON at an abnormal completion.)
1: The same error code as that for the control data completion status is stored in the error code storage
device.
App - 14 App - 14
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(1) Functions
(a) Operation chart for the RIRCV instruction

station

1)
Command
2)
RX RX
G.RIRCV 4)
RY RY
Buffer memory
3)
Device memory Recieve buffer
5)
1) Instructs the master module to read data from the buffer memory
specified in (S1)+2 and (S1)+3 of the station specified in (S1)+1.
2) The master module monitors the remote input (RX) specified in (S2)+1.
3) When the remote input (RX) specified in (S2)+1 turns ON from OFF,
the master module reads data from the buffer memory of the specified
station.
Read data are stored in the receive buffer of the master module.
4) The master module turns the remote output (RY) specified in (S2)+0
ON.
When the remote input specified in (S)+1 turns OFF from ON, the
remote output specified in (S2)+0 turns OFF.
5) Data read out from the specified station are stored in the device
specified in (D1) and subsequent devices, and a device specified in D2
turns ON.
App - 15 App - 15
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(b) The RIRCV instruction can be executed to multiple intelligent device stations
simultaneously.
the same intelligent device station.
completed.
(c) There are two types of interlock signals for the RIRCV instruction: the
completion device (D2) and the status display device at completion (D2)+1.
Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIRCV
instruction is completed, and turns OFF in the next END processing.
Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the RIRCV
instruction.
Normal completion: Stays OFF and does not change.
where the RIRCV instruction is completed, and turns OFF in the next
END processing.

Sequence program
ON
OFF
RIRCV instruction
ON
OFF
Completion device On Abnormal
completion
Normal
Status display OFF completion
device at completion 1 scan
Receive completion
RYn OFF
(Request device)
RXn OFF
(Completion device)
Other end station send ready
(e) The basic number of steps of the RIRCV instruction is 10 steps.
(f) The receive buffer assignment is performed using the "Station information
see Section 6.2.
App - 16 App - 16
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(2) Operation error

2112
(3) Program example

When M1 turns ON, 11-word data in the buffer memory address 400H and later of
the intelligent device station No.63 (AJ65BT-R2), which is connected to the
master module installed in the position of I/O No. X/Y00 to X/Y1F, are read out to
the area starting from D40.
The settings of the interlock signal storage device are as follows: request device
RY2, completion device RX2, error code storage device RWr2, and completion
mode 1.
Also, set the link special register (SW) refresh device to SW0.
M10 is the RIRCV instruction executing flag.
App - 17 App - 17
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 2.4 RISEND instruction

The RISEND instruction automatically performs handshaking with an intelligent device
station and writes data to the buffer memory of the specified intelligent device station.
Available for modules that have handshake signals (e.g. AJ65BT-R2).
Usable devices
Index Constant
register Other
register module
U \G
(S1) — — — — —
(D1) — — — — —
(S2) — — — — —
(D2) — — — —
symbol] condition]
Command
RISEND G.RISEND Un (S1) (D1) (S2) (D2)
Command
RISEND GP.RISEND Un (S1) (D1) (S2) (D2)
Set data
specified device
Device name
(D1) Start number of the device to which write data is to be stored.
specified device
Start number of the device in which the interlock signals are Within the range of the
(S2)
Bit
Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of Within the range of the
(D2)
writing. (D2)+1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion. specified device
Control data
(S1) + 1 Station number Specify the station number of the intelligent device station. 0 to 64 User
Access code
(S1) + 2 Set "0004H". 0004H User
Attribute code
Buffer memory 1
(S1) + 3 Specify the buffer memory start address. User
address
Number of points 2
(S1) + 4 Specify the write data count (in word units). 1 to 480 User
write
App - 18 App - 18
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
1: See the manual for the intelligent device station to which data will be written.
2: Indicates the maximum number of data items that can be written.
Specify the buffer memory capacities of the intelligent device station and the receive buffer area setting
range to be set with a parameter.
Interlock signal storage devices

b15 to b8 b7 to b0 RY: Request device 0 to 127 User
(S2) + 0 0 RY
Set the upper 8 bits to 0. 0 User
RX : Completion device 0 to 127 User

b15 to b8 b7 to b0
(S2) + 1 RWr 1 RX
RWr : Error code storage device 0 to 15
User
If none, set to FFH. FFH
0: Complete with the contents of 1 device (RXn).
b15 to b0 1: Complete with the contents of 2 devices (RXn and
(S2) + 2 Completion mode 0/1 User
RXn+1).
(RXn+1 turns ON at an abnormal completion.)
1: The same error code as that for the control data completion status is stored in the error code storage
device.
App - 19 App - 19
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(1) Functions
(a) Operation chart for the RISEND instruction

station

1)
Command 6) 5) Executes
RX RX request
G.RISEND 4) processing
RY RY
Buffer memory
3)
Device memory Send buffer

2)
7)
1) Instructs the master module to write data to the buffer memory specified
in (S1)+2 and (S1)+3 of the station specified in (S1)+1.
2) Data to be written to the specified station are stored in the send buffer of
the master module.
3) Data are written to the buffer memory specified in (S1)+2 and (S1)+3 of
the station specified in (S1)+1.
4) The master module turns the remote output (RY) specified in (S2)+0
ON.
5) The station specified in (S1)+1 performs processing for the remote
output (RY).
6) Upon completion of the processing for the remote output (RY), the
station specified in (S1)+1 turns the remote input (RX) specified in
(S2)+1 ON and the remote output (RY) specified in (S2)+0 turns OFF.
Also, the response showing completion of write to the master module is
returned.
7) The device specified in (D2) turns ON.
App - 20 App - 20
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(b) The RISEND instruction can be executed to multiple intelligent device

stations simultaneously.
the same intelligent device station. Create a program in which a flag
remains on until the instruction is completed.
(c) There are two types of interlock signals for the RISEND instruction: the
completion device (D2) and the status display device at completion (D2)+1.
Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RISEND
Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the RISEND
instruction.
where the RISEND instruction is completed, and

Sequence program
ON the RISEND instruction
OFF
RISEND instruction
ON
OFF
completion
Normal
Status display OFF completion
device at completion
1 scan
Send completion
RYn OFF
(Request device)
RXn OFF
(Completion device)
Receive completion
(e) The basic number of steps of the RISEND instruction is 10 steps.
(f) The send buffer assignment is performed using the "Station information
see Section 6.2.
App - 21 App - 21
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(2) Operation error

In the following cases, operation error occurs; the error flag (SM0) turns ON and
the error code is stored in SD0.
2112
(3) Program example

When M6 turns ON, 1-word data are written to D10 from the buffer memory
address 111H of the intelligent device station No.63 (AJ65BT-R2), which is
connected to the master module installed in the position of I/O No. X/Y00 to
X/Y1F.
The settings of the interlock signal storage device are as follows: request device
RY4, completion device RX4, error code storage device RWr1, and completion
mode 1.
Also, set the link special register (SW) refresh device to SW0.
M11 is the RISEND instruction executing flag.
App - 22 App - 22
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 2.5 RIFR instruction
The RIFR instruction reads the data from the automatic update buffer of the specified
station.
Available for modules that have the automatic update buffer (e.g. AJ65BT-R2).
Usable devices
Index Constant
register Other
register module
U \G
n1 — — —
n2 — — —
(D) — — — — —
n3 — — —
symbol] condition]
Command
RIFR G.RIFR Un n1 n2 (D) n3
Command
RIFR GP.RIFR Un n1 n2 (D) n3
Set data
Un Start I/O number of the module 0 to FEH
Intelligent device station number 1 to 64
n1
Random access buffer specification FFH
Binary 16 bits
The offset value of the automatic update buffer of the intelligent
Between 0 and parameter
n2 device station specified by the master station or the random
setting value 1
access buffer.
(D) Start number of the device to which read data is to be stored. Device
specified device
n3 Number of points to read 0 to 4096 2 Binary 16 bits
1: The value set in the station information settings of the network parameters of the GX Developer.
2: No processing will be performed when set to "0".
App - 23 App - 23
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(1) Functions
(a) Operation chart for the RIFR instruction

station

Command Communication
G.RIFR commences Buffer memory
when
conditions
1)
are met
Automatic update
buffer memory
Automatic
Device memory update buffer
2)
1) Accesses the automatic update buffer specified by n1 and n2 of the

master module specified by Un.
2) Stores the data read after the device specified by (D).
(b) The RIFR instruction reads data when it is executed.

However, this instruction cannot be executed simultaneously at more than
one location for the same intelligent device station.
(c) The maximum points that can be read by the RIFR instruction are 4096.
(d) The basic number of steps of the RIFR instruction is 9 steps.
(e) The automatic update buffer assignment is performed using the "Station
information setting" of the network parameters of the GX Developer.
For more details, see Section 6.2.
App - 24 App - 24
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(2) Operation error

2112
When the setting for number of points to read (n3) is outside of the setting range.
4100
When the station number specified with n1 does not exist.
(3) Program example

Master module Intelligent device station
PLC CPU (Start I/O number 40) (Station number 1)
Device memory Automatic update buffer Buffer memory
300H
Automatic update
buffer memory
5FFH
When X0 is turned ON, the following example program reads 10-word data to D0
or succeeding addresses from the automatic update buffer offset value of 100
(400H of the intelligent device station) in the master module.
App - 25 App - 25
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 2.6 RITO instruction
The RITO instruction writes data to the automatic update buffer of the specified station.
Available for modules that have the automatic update buffer (e.g. AJ65BT-R2).
Usable devices
Index Constant
register Other
register module
U \G
n1 — — —
n2 — — —
(D) — — — — —
n3 — — —
symbol] condition]
Command
RITO G.RITO Un n1 n2 (D) n3
Command
RITO GP.RITO Un n1 n2 (D) n3
Set data
Un Start I/O number of the module 0 to FEH
Intelligent device station number 1 to 64
n1
Random access buffer specification FFH
Binary 16 bits
The offset value of the automatic update buffer of the intelligent
Between 0 and parameter
n2 device station specified by the master station or the random
setting value 1
access buffer.
(D) Start number of the device to which write data is to be stored. Device
specified device
n3 Number of points to write 0 to 4096 2 Binary 16 bits
1: The value set in the station information settings of the network parameters of the GX Developer.
2: No processing will be performed when set to "0".
App - 26 App - 26
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(1) Functions
(a) Operation chart for the RITO instruction

station

Command Communication
commences Buffer memory
G.RITO
when
conditions
are met
1) Automatic update
buffer memory
Automatic
Device memory update buffer
2)
1) Accesses the device after the device specified by (D) of the master
module specified by Un.
2) Writes to the automatic update buffer specified by n1 and n2.
(b) The RITO instruction writes data when it is executed.

However, this instruction cannot be executed simultaneously at more than
one location for the same intelligent device station.
(c) The maximum points that can be read by the RITO instruction are 4096.
(d) The basic number of steps of the RITO instruction is 9 steps.
(e) The automatic update buffer assignment is performed using the "Station
information setting" of the network parameters of the GX Developer. For
more details, see Section 6.2.
App - 27 App - 27
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(2) Operation error

2112
When the setting for number of points to write (n3) is outside of the setting range.
4100
When the station number specified with n1 does not exist.
(3) Program example
Master module Intelligent device station

PLC CPU (Start I/O number 40) (Station number 1)
Device memory Automatic update buffer Buffer memory
300H
Automatic update
buffer memory
5FFH
When X0 is turned ON, the following example program writes 10-word data from
D0 to the automatic update buffer offset value starting from 100 (400H of the
intelligent device station) in the master module.
App - 28 App - 28
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 2.7 RLPASET instruction
Set the network parameter to the master station and start up the data link.
Usable devices
Index Constant
register Other
register module
U \G
(S1) — — — — —
(S2) — — — — —
(S3) — — — — —
(S4) — — — — —
(S5) — — — — —
(D) — — — —
symbol] condition]
Command
RLPASET G.RLPASET Un (S1) (S2) (S3) (S4) (S5) (D)
Command
RLPASET GP.RLPASET Un (S1) (S2) (S3) (S4) (S5) (D)
Master station set data

(S1) Start number of the device in which control data is stared.
specified device
Start number of the device in which slave station setting data is Within the range of the
(S2)
Start number of the device in which reserved station Within the range of the
(S3) Device name
specification data is stored. specified device
Start number of the device in which error invalid station Within the range of the
(S4)
specification data is stored. specified device
Start number of the device in which send, receive and Within the range of the
(S5)
automatic refresh buffer assignment data is stored. specified device
(D) reading. Bit
specified device
(D)+1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion.
• The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data.
When the setting data for (S2) to (S5) are not to be set, specify a dummy device.
App - 29 App - 29
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
Control data
2
Specifies whether the individual setting data from (S2) to
(S5) is valid or invalid.
0: Invalid 1
1: Valid
b15 b14 b13 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 to 0
Slave station setting data (S2)
Reserved station specification data
(S1) + 1 Setting flag (S3) —
Error invalid station specification data
(S4)
Send, receive and automatic refresh buffer
assignment data (S5)
Mode
00: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
01: Remote net (Additional mode)
10: Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
11: Not used
Number of
User
connected modules
(S1) + 2 Sets the number of connected slave stations. 1 to 64
involved in
communication
(S1) + 3 Number of retries Sets the number of retries to a communication faulty station. 1 to 7
Number of
Sets the number of slave stations that can be returned per
(S1) + 4 automatic return 1 to 10
one link scan.
modules
Specifies the data link status when a master station PLC
Operation
CPU error occurs.
(S1) + 5 specification when 0, 1
0: Stop
CPU is down
1: Continue
Specifies either the synchronous or asynchronous mode for
Scan mode sequence scan.
(S1) + 6 0, 1
specification 0: Asynchronous
1: Synchronous
(S1) + 7 Delay time setting Set 0 for the delay time. 0
1: For the setting data specified invalid, default parameter will be applied.
2: Setting a value outside the setting range results in abnormal completion.
App - 30 App - 30
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
Slave station setting data

The type of slave station, number of occupied slave stations
and station number are set as follows.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b0
Station number
—
Number of occupied slave stations
Type of slave station
The default parameter settings are "0101H to 0140H" (station

number: 1 to 64, number of occupied slave stations: 1, type
of slave station: remote I/O station).
Setting of the station number
1 to 40H
1 to 64 (BIN setting)
Setting of the number of occupied slave stations
Number of occupied
Setting
slave stations
Station 1 1H 1 to 4H
(S2) + 0 Station 2 2H
Setting for 1 to 64
to Station 3 3H User
modules 3
(S2) + 63 Station 4 4H
4
Setting of the type of slave station
Type of slave station Setting
Ver.1compatible remote I/O station 0H
Ver.1compatible remote device station 1H
Ver.1compatible intelligent device station 2H
Ver. 2 compatible single remote device station 5H
Ver. 2 compatible single intelligent device
6H
station
Ver. 2 compatible double remote device station 8H
Ver. 2 compatible double intelligent device 0 to FH
9H
station
Ver. 2 compatible quadruple remote device
BH
station
Ver. 2 compatible quadruple intelligent device
CH
station
Ver. 2 compatible octuple remote device
EH
station
Ver. 2 compatible octuple intelligent device
FH
station
3: Perform the settings for as many connected modules involved in communication as has been specified by the control
data.
4: Setting a value outside the setting range in the slave station type setting results in abnormal completion.
App - 31 App - 31
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
Reserved station specification data

6
Specify reserved stations.
0: Not specified
1: Specified
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
(S3)+0 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
(S3) + 0
Setting for 1 to 64 (S3)+1 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
to — User
modules 5
(S3) + 3 (S3)+2 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
(S3)+3 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.
The default parameter setting is "No reserved station

specification for all stations."
5: Perform the settings for station numbers up to the largest station number set by the slave station setting data.
6: Specify only the head station number of a module in the case of a remote station, local station or intelligent device
station that occupies 2 or more stations.
Error invalid station specification data

8
Specify the error invalid station.
0: Not specified
1: Specified
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
(S4)+0 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
(S4) + 0
Setting for 1 to 64 (S4)+1 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
to — User
modules 7 (S4)+2 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
(S4) + 3
(S4)+3 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.
The default parameter setting is "No error invalid station

specification for all stations."
7: Perform the settings for station numbers up to the largest station number set by the slave station setting data.
8: Specify only the head station number of a module in the case of a remote station, local station or intelligent device
station that occupies 2 or more stations.
The reserved station specification is given the higher priority if both error invalid station and reserved station
specifications are made for the same station.
App - 32 App - 32
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
Send, receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data

Specify assignments of buffer memory size at transient
transmission to local stations and intelligent device stations.
Send/receive
(S5)+0 Send buffer size buffer 10:
(S5)+1 Receive buffer size Settings for the first module 0H (no setting),
Automatic refresh 40H to 1000H
(S5)+2 buffer size 0 (word) (no setting)
64 to 4096 (words)
(S5) + 0
Setting for 1 to 26 to
to User
modules 9
(S5) + 77 Automatic refresh
(S5)+75 Send buffer size
buffer 11:
0H (no setting),
(S5)+76 Receive buffer size Settings for the 26th module
Automatic refresh 80H to 1000H
(S5)+77 buffer size 0 (word) (no setting)
128 to 4096 (words)
The default parameter settings are "send buffer size: 40H,
receive buffer size: 40H, automatic refresh buffer size: 80H."
9: Perform the settings for stations specified as local stations or intelligent device stations in the slave station setting
data, starting from the smallest station number.
10: Keep the total size of the send and receive buffer sizes at 1000H (4096 (words)) or less.
Specify the size of data to be sent and received plus 7 words for the send and receive buffer sizes, respectively.
Setting a value outside the setting range results in abnormal completion.
11: Keep the total size of the automatic refresh buffer sizes at 1000H (4096 (words)) or less.
Specify the necessary automatic refresh buffer size for each intelligent device station.
Setting a value outside the setting range results in abnormal completion.
App - 33 App - 33
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(1) Functions
(a) Operation chart for the RLPASET instruction.
Command
Z.RLPASET
Network
1) parameter
Device
memory
2)
4) Execution result
3) Data link start
1) Pass the network parameters set in (S1) to (S5) to the master module
specified by Un.
2) The master module analyzes the settings of the network parameters.
3) If the network parameter settings are correct, the data link is started.
4) The device specified by (D) turns on.
(b) It is only possible to execute one RLPASET instruction at a time.
App - 34 App - 34
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(C) There are two types or interlock signals for the RLPASET instruction: the
completion device (D) and status display device at completion (D) + 1.
Turns ON in the END Processing of the scan where the RLPASET
Turns On and OFF depending on the completion status of the
RLPASET instruction.
Abnormal completion : Turns ON in the END processing of the scan
where the RLPASET instruction is completed,
and turns OFF in the next END processing.
[When all the stations are normal]

END END END END END END END
processing processing processing processing processing processing processing
Sequence program
Refresh stop Refresh start
Data link stop Data link start
RLPASET
instruction
completion
Host data link status
(X01)
Refresh instruction
(SB03)
Data link stop
(SB02)
Data link stop complete
(SB45)
RLPASET instruction
Direction device ON
Complete device
ON
Status display device Abnormal completion
at completion
1 scan
[When all the stations are faulty]

END END END END END END END
processing processing processing processing processing processing processing
Sequence program
Refresh stop Refresh start
Data link stop Return to system processing Data link start
RLPASET instruction
completion
Host data link status
(X01)
Refresh instruction
(SB03)
Data link stop
(SB02)
Data link stop complete
(SB45)
RLPASET instruction
Direction device ON
Complete device
ON Abnormal
Status display device completion
at completion
1 scan
Return to system
App - 35 App - 35
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(4) Operation error

In the following cased, an operation error occurs; the error flag (SM0) turns ON
2112 When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module.
4100 When the instruction contains the data cannot be used.
When the number of points for data used in the instruction exceeds the available
range, or storage data and constants of a device specified by the instruction
exceeds the available range (including dummy devices).
The number of points required for each data is shown below.
• Control data : 8 points
• Slave station setting data : 64 points
• Reserved station specification data : 4 points
4101
• Error invalid station specification data : 4 points
• Send, receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data : 78 points
Example: Assume that data link registers D0 to D12287 are available for the
Q02CPU. If the device head number of the slave station setting data is
set to D12284 because there are only 4 slave stations, the PLC CPU
nonetheless checks the range from D12284 to D122347 (for 64 stations)
and an error indicating that the available range is exceeded occurs.
App - 36 App - 36
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
(5) Program example

This program sets the network parameters for the master module mounted at the
I/O numbers X/Y00 to X/Y1F and starts the data link.
Station number 1
Local Station number 2 Station number 3

Master
station
station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
(occupies
(X/Y00 to 1F) (Error invalid station) (Reserved station)
1 station)
(occupies 1 station) (occupies 1 station)
Refresh of SB/SW
SB0040 to SB01FF are read
to SB0040 to SB01FF.
SW0040 to SW01FF are read
to SW0040 to SW01FF.
Parameter setting
Instruct to set parameters
RLPASET instruction
· Control data
Clear complete status.
All setting data: Valid


modules: 1 module

CPU is down: stop

Asynchronous
Dealay time setting: 0

1 station, station
number 1 *1
occupies 1 station,
station number 2
occupies 1 station,
· Reserved station specification data station number 3
Reserved station specification:

station number 3
· Error invalid station specification data
Error invalid station specification:

station number 2



App - 37 App - 37
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
Dedicated instruction
(RLPASET)

instruction off.
instruction.
Performs abnormal
completion processing
Parameter setting change
Parameter
change
instructoin
Instruct to stop data link
Turn the data link stop

instruction off
Instruct to stop refreshing
Instruct to change parameters
RLPASET instruction
· Control data
Clear complete status
Slave station setting data/send,

receive and automatic refresh
buffer assignment data: Valid

modules: 1 module

CPU is down: Stop

Asynchronous
Delay time setting: 0

1 station, station
number 1 *1
occupies 1 station,
station number 2
occupies 1 station,
station number 3
App - 38 App - 38
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q



Dedicated instruction (RLPASET)*2

instruction off.
instruction.
Performs abnormal completion processing
Start of the control program
Refresh of RX
RX00 to RX5F are read to
X1000 to X105F.
Refresh of RWr
RXr0 to RWr3 are read to
D1000 to D1003.



Refresh of RWw
D2000 to D2003 are written into
RWw0 to RWw3
Refresh of RY
Y1000 to Y105F are written into
RY00 to RY5F
Refresh of SB/SW
SB0000 to SB003F are refreshed.
SW0000 to SW003F are refreshed.
*2 D150 and D160 are dummy devices.
App - 39 App - 39
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 3 Differences Between the New and Previous Models
The following lists the differences between the QJ61BT11N and older models:
QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11 A (1S) J61BT11 A (1S) J61QBT11

Startup using the Startup using the
parameters of the parameters of the Startup using Yn6, Yn8 Startup using Yn6, Yn8,
Startup procedure master station CPU master station CPU and dedicated and master station CPU
(Yn6 and Yn8 cannot (Yn6 and Yn8 cannot instructions parameters
be used) be used)
initialization procedure Yes Yes No No
registration function
Module reset function
using the sequence No No Yes Yes
program
Access to other
stations via the CC- Yes Yes No No
Link
Parameter settings
using FROM/TO Not supported Not supported Supported Supported
instruction
Parameter settings
using dedicated Supported Supported Supported Not supported
instruction
Parameter settings
Supported Supported Not supported Supported
using GX Developer
Standby master The master station that The master station that The master station that The master station that
function is down can recover is down can recover is down cannot recover is down cannot recover
Event issuance for the
Supported Supported Not supported Not supported
interrupt program
Parameter verification
No No Yes Yes
test
2
E PROM No (CPU parameters) No (CPU parameters) Yes Yes
Expanded cyclic
Yes No No No
setting
Slave station
refresh/compulsory
Yes No No No
clear setting in case of
PLC CPU STOP
App - 40 App - 40
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 4 Precautions when Changing from AJ61QBT11 to QJ61BT11N
(1) The following dedicated instructions for AJ61QBT11 cannot be used in

QJ61BT11N.
Instruction Description
CCL, CCLEND Performs mail box registration for intelligent device and remote device
instructions.
SPCCLR Performs interrupt command to intelligent device instruction.
SPCBUSY Reads remote station status.
SEND Sends data (message) to designated transmission destination station
(QnACPU).
RECV Reads data (message) that has been sent by SEND instruction.
READ, SREAD Designated station QnACPU word device data read by local station.
WRITE, SWRITE Data from local station written to designated station QnACPU word device
data.
REQ Sends and executes transient (such as remote RUN/STOP) requests to
other stations.
(2) The conditions setting switches for AJ61QBT11 shown below cannot be used on
QJ61BT11N.
Use the GX Developer and set the CC-Link network parameters.
Number Setting Description
SW1 Station type
SW4 Input status of data link error station
SW5 Number of occupied stations
Appendix 5 Precautions when Changing from QJ61BT11 to QJ61BT11N
(1) When the remote net mode of the QJ61BT11 is used, use the remote net ver. 1
mode of the QJ61BT11N for changing.
(2) When the remote I/O net mode of the QJ61BT11 is used, use the remote I/O net
mode of the QJ61BT11N for changing.
(3) When the remote net ver. 2 mode/remote net additional mode is set to the master
station of the QJ61BT11, an error (error code: B399, B983, B984) occurs.
The number of connected modules
Set a value within the range
parameter was set to a value other
Number of connected from "1 to 64".
than "1 to 64".
B399 modules setting error
The remote net ver. 2 mode/remote
(parameter) Set to the remote net ver. 1
net additional mode has been set to
mode/remote I/O net mode.
the master station of the QJ61BT11.
Set to the remote net ver. 1
B983 Model illegal net additional mode has been set to
Set to the remote net ver. 1
B984 Model illegal net additional mode has been set to
(4) When the remote net ver. 2 mode/remote net additional mode is set to the local
station of the QJ61BT11, the local station operates in the remote net ver. 1 mode.
App - 41 App - 41
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 6 CPU-dependent Function Availability
The following table indicates whether the functions are available or not depending on
the CPU.
Q02/Q02H/Q06H/
Functions Q12H/Q25H/Q12PH Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU Remote I/O staion
Q25PHCPU
Communication with remote I/O station
Communication with remote device station
Communication with local station
Communication with intelligent device station
Basic functions
Network parameter
Automatic refresh
GX Developer
parameter
Parameter setting with dedicated instruction
Slave station cut-off function
Automatic return function
Data link status setting when the master
station PLC CPU has an error
Functions for improving
Setting the status of input data from a data link
system reliability
faulty station
Slave station refresh/compulsory clear setting
in case of PLC CPU STOP
Standby master function
Remote device station initialization procedure
registration function
1
Event issuance for the interrupt program
Automatic CC-Link startup
Remote net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Reserved station function
Handy functions
Error invalid station setting function
Scan synchronous Synchronous mode
function Asynchronous mode
Temporary error invalid station setting function
Data link stop/restart
Station number overlap checking function
Multiple PLC system support
Functions for transient
transmission
: Available : Unavailable
*1: Supported by Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU, starting with function Ver. B.
App - 42 App - 42
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 7 Parameter Setting Checklist
This checklist may be used to set the parameters required to configure a CC-Link
system.
Please make a copy of this checklist and use it as needed.
For more details, see Sections 6.3 to 6.6.
Appendix 7.1 Parameter setting checklist
Parameter setting checklist

Hold/clear
Refresh/Clears compulsorily
Operational STOP setting Default: Refresh
settings Number of Occupies 1 to 4 stations
occupied stations Default: Occupies 1 station
Expanded cyclicsingle/double/quadruple/octuple
Master station
Master station
Type Local station
Local station
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
1 to 64
Default: 64
1 to 7
Retry count times
Default: 3
modules
count Default: 1
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
Default: Stop
App - 43 App - 43
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 7.2 Station information setting checklist
Station information setting checklist

Expanded Number of Remote Intelligent buffer select (Word)
Station Reserve/invalid
Station type cyclic occupied station
No. station select Send Receive Automatic
setting stations points
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
App - 44 App - 44
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
Expanded Number of Remote Intelligent buffer select (Word)

Station Reserve/invalid
Station type cyclic occupied station
No. station select Send Receive Automatic
setting stations points
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
App - 45 App - 45
APPENDIX
MELSEC-Q
MEMO
App - 46 App - 46
INDEX
Ind
[A] [D]
Appendix......................................................App-1 Data link processing time ................................5-1
Applicable CPU ............................................... 2-4 Data link restart ..............................................8-26
Applicable system ........................................... 2-4 Data link restart acceptance..........................8-27
Automatic CC-Link startup ..................... 1-9, 4-52 Data link restart complete..............................8-27
Automatic return function ....................... 1-6, 4-26 Data link restart result....................................8-31
Automatic update buffer................................ 8-21 Data link stop .................................................8-26
Data link stop acceptance .............................8-27
[B] Data link stop complete .................................8-27
Buffer memory list ........................................... 8-5 Data link stop result .......................................8-32
Data link stop/restart............................ 1-10, 4-62
[C] Data link status setting when the master
CC-Link dedicated cable................................. 3-3 station PLC CPU has an error............... 1-7, 4-27
CC-Link diagnostics .................................... 13-16 Dedicated instruction .....................................4-75
CC-Link ver. installation/parameter matching Dedicated instruction list............................. App-2
status ............................................................. 8-38 Delay timer information..................................8-33
CC-Link version............................................... 2-9 Detailed LED display status...........................8-32
Communication between the master Details of the I/O signals..................................8-4
station and intelligent device stations ........... 12-1 Differences between the new and
Communication between the master previous models........................................ App-40
station and local stations............................... 11-1
Communication between the master [E]
station and remote device stations ............... 10-1 EMC directive................................................ A-13
Communication between the master Error invalid station setting function .... 1-10, 4-56
station and remote I/O stations....................... 9-1 Error invalid station specified status.... 8-29, 8-34
Communication buffer ................................... 8-20 Event issuance for the interrupt
Communication with the remote I/O stations . 4-3 program .................................................. 1-9, 4-49
Communication with the local stations ......... 4-10 Example of parameter settings with
Communication with the remote GX Developer (Remote I/O net mode) .........6-43
device stations................................................. 4-5 Example of parameter settings with
Compatible CC-Link ver. information ........... 8-38 GX Developer (Remote net additional
Compatibility with CC-Link .............................. 1-2 mode) .............................................................6-29
Completion status of remote device station Example of parameter settings with
initialization procedure .................................. 8-28 GX Developer (Remote net ver.1 mode) ........6-5
Connecting the modules ................................. 7-9 Example of parameter settings with
Connection cable............................................. 3-1 GX Developer (Remote net ver.2 mode) ......6-17
CPU monitoring time setting ......................... 8-31 Example of parameter setting with
Current link scan time ................................... 8-34 dedicated instruction......................................6-48
Cyclic points increase ..........................1-12, 4-67 Execution status of remote device station
Cyclic transmission........................................A-14 initialization procedure ...................................8-28
External dimensions diagram ..................... App-1
Index - 1 Index - 1
[F] Line test complete status...............................8-28
Faulty stations are generated depending Line test request ............................................8-26
on transmission rate...................................... 13-7 Line test result................................................8-32 Ind
Faulty stations cannot be detected............... 13-7 Line test station setting ..................................8-31
Forced master switching ............................... 8-27 Link refresh time ............................................5-40
Forced master switching instruction result ... 8-33 Link scan time ..................................................5-1
Forced master switching request Link special relays (SB) ....................... 8-19, 8-26
acknowledgement ......................................... 8-28 Link special registers (SW).................. 8-20, 8-31
Forced master switching request complete.. 8-28 Local module................................................. A-14
Local station ........................................... A-14, 1-1
[H] Local station automatic refresh
H/M information ........................................... 13-20 parameter settings ......................6-15, 6-27, 6-40
Handling precautions ...................................... 7-3 Local station communication ...........................1-4
Hardware test .................................................. 7-7 Local station network parameter
Host line status .............................................. 8-30 settings ........................................6-12, 6-24, 6-37
Host mater/standby master operation Loading status................................................8-33
status ............................................................. 8-30 Loading/parameter consistency status .........8-37
Host mode ..................................................... 8-28 Loop test.......................................................13-19
Host monitoring ........................................... 13-16
Host station number ...................................... 8-33 [M]
Host parameter status................................... 8-33 Master module .............................................. A-14
Host standby master station setting status .. 8-28 Master station......................................... A-14, 1-1
Host station operation status ........................ 8-29 Master station automatic refresh parameter
Host station switch change detection ........... 8-29 settings ........................................6-10, 6-22, 6-34
Host type........................................................ 8-28 Master station information .............................8-29
How to check the function version.................. 2-8 Master station network parameter
settings ..........................................6-5, 6-17, 6-29
[I] Master station return specification
I/O signal list .................................................... 8-2 information .....................................................8-29
Initial setting of the remote device Master switching request
station ..................................... 10-7, 10-25, 10-45 acknowledgment............................................8-28
Input data status of host data link faulty Master switching request complete...............8-28
station ............................................................ 8-28 Master station transient transmission
Installation........................................................ 7-3 status ..............................................................8-30
Installation environment .................................. 7-4 Master module .............................................. A-14
Intelligent device module ..............................A-14 Max. communication station number ............8-34
Intelligent device station.........................A-14, 1-1 Max. link scan time ........................................8-34
Intelligent device station communication........ 1-5 Maximum number of link points ......................3-1
Intelligent function module ............................A-15 Maximum overall cable distance ...... 3-1, 3-3, 3-5
Internal current consumption .......................... 3-1 Maximum transmission distance .....................3-1
Min. link scan time .........................................8-34
[L] Mode selection method .................................8-40
LED display ..................................................... 7-5 Mode setting status........................................8-33
Line status ..................................................... 8-36 Module operating status ................................8-33
Line test ......................................................... 7-15 Module status....................................... 8-27, 8-31
Line test result ............................................... 8-37 Monitoring time setting ..................................8-31
Line test 1 result ............................................ 8-37 Multiple temporary error invalid station
Line test acceptance status .......................... 8-27 specification ...................................................8-31
Index - 2 Index - 2
[N] [R]
No. of automatic return stations.................... 8-33 Random access buffer...................................8-20
No. of retries information............................... 8-33 Refresh instruction acknowledgment
Notes on the system configuration ................. 2-6 status at standby master switching ...............8-27
Number of host occupied stations ............... 8-29 Refresh instruction at standby master
Number of connected modules..................... 8-34 switching.........................................................8-26
Number of CPUs that can be installed ........... 2-4 Refresh instruction at standby master
Number of I/O occupied points ....................... 3-1 switching result...............................................8-31
Number of link points per station .................... 3-1 Refresh instruction complete status at
Number of occupied station ............................ 3-1 standby master switching ..............................8-27
Refresh instruction when changing parameters
[O] by the dedicated instruction...........................8-26
Offline test status........................................... 8-28 Remote device station ........................... A-14, 1-1
Operation specification when Remote device station communication ...........1-3
CPU is down status....................................... 8-29 Remote device station initialization
Other station data link status ...............8-30, 8-35 procedure registration function.............. 1-9, 4-45
Other station fuse blown status ..........8-30, 8-36 Remote device station initialization
Other station monitoring.............................. 13-17 procedure registration instruction ..................8-27
Other station switch change status......8-30, 8-36 Remote device station initialization
Other station watchdog timer error procedure registration instruction result........8-33
occurrence status .......................................... 8-35 Remote I/O net mode ................................... A-14
Other station watchdog timer error status .... 8-30 Remote I/O station................................. A-14, 1-1
Remote I/O station communication.................1-2
[P] Remote I/O station points setting ........ 1-12, 4-65
Parameter information................................... 8-33 Remote input (RX) .........................................8-10
Parameter information read Remote module............................................. A-14
acknowledgment status ................................ 8-28 Remote net mode ................................A-14, 4-54
Parameter information read completion Remote net additional mode ........A-14, 2-1, 4-69
status ............................................................. 8-28 Remote net ver. 1 mode ........................ A-14, 2-2
Parameter information read request............. 8-26 Remote net ver. 2 mode ...............A-14, 2-2, 4-68
Parameter memory ......................................... 6-1 Remote output (RY).......................................8-10
Parameter receive status .............................. 8-29 Remote register (RWr) ..................................8-14
Parameter setting checklist.......................App-43 Remote register (RWw) .................................8-14
Parameter setting items .................................. 6-3 Remote station.............................................. A-14
Parameter setting status ............................... 8-29 Reserved station function ..............................4-55
Parameter setting test result ......................... 8-32 Reserved station specified status ....... 8-29, 8-34
Parameter setting with dedicated RIRCV ....................................................... App-13
instruction ............................................... 1-6, 4-23 RIRD............................................................ App-3
Parameter settings .......................................... 6-1 RIFR .......................................................... App-23
Part identification nomenclature RISEND..................................................... App-18
and settings ..................................................... 7-4 RITO.......................................................... App-26
Performance specification............................... 3-1 RIWT ........................................................... App-8
Precautions on programming.......................... 8-1 RLPASET.................................................. App-29
Procedure before starting the data link .......... 7-1 RWr ............................................................... A-15
Processing time for dedicated instructions... 5-35 RWw.............................................................. A-15
Programming................................................... 8-1 RX.................................................................. A-15
RY.................................................................. A-15
Index - 3 Index - 3
[S] Temporary error invalid station
SB ..................................................................A-15 specification cancel result..............................8-32
Scan mode setting information ..................... 8-29 Temporary error invalid station
Scan synchronous function..................1-10, 4-57 specification result .........................................8-32
Selecting a mode according to the system .... 1-9 Temporary error invalid status.......................8-35
Setting checklist ........................................App-42 Terminal block..................................................7-6
Setting the status of input data from Terminal resistor ........................................... A-16
a data link faulty station.......................... 1-7, 4-28 The remote device station is not operating
Slave station cut-off function.................. 1-6, 4-25 normally..........................................................13-7
Slave station offset, size information ............ 8-17 The remote station/local station/intelligent
Slave station refresh/compulsory clear device station/standby master station does
setting in case of PLC CPU STOP ......1-12, 4-29 not start up .....................................................13-7
Special function module................................A-15 Tightening torque range ..................................7-3
Standby master function ........................ 1-7, 4-31 Total number of stations ................................8-34
Standby master station .................................A-14 Transient transmission............... A-15, 1-11, 4-75
Standby master station information .............. 8-29 Transient transmission status.............. 8-30, 8-36
Standby master station number.................... 8-34 Transmission delay time..................................5-4
Station information setting checklist .........App-44 Transmission rate ............................................3-1
Station number overlap checking Transmission rate/mode setting switch...........7-6
function ..................................................1-10,4-63 Transmission rate and mode settings ...........7-14
Station number overlap status ...................... 8-37 Transmission rate setting ..............................8-32
Station number setting .................................. 7-13
Station number setting switches ..................... 7-5 [V]
Station status at error occurrence................. 5-44 Ver. 1 compatible slave station .................... A-14
SW .................................................................A-15 Ver. 2 compatible slave station .................... A-14
Switch setting ................................................ 7-13 Ver.2 compatible remote input ......................8-22
Switch setting status ............................8-29, 8-34 Ver.2 compatible remote output ....................8-22
System configuration....................................... 2-1 Ver.2 compatible remote register (RWr) .......8-24
System down prevention................................. 1-6 Ver.2 compatible remote register (RWw)......8-24
[T] [W]
T-Branch connection ..................................... 7-11 Weight ..............................................................3-1
Temporary error invalid acceptance status .. 8-27 When a dedicated instruction is executed,
Temporary error invalid canceling the abnormal completion bit turns on............13-7
acknowledgment status ................................ 8-27 Wiring check...................................................7-10
Temporary error invalid canceling
complete status ............................................. 8-27
Temporary error invalid canceling request... 8-26
Temporary error invalid complete status ...... 8-27
Temporary error invalid request.................... 8-26
Temporary error invalid station setting
function .................................................1-10, 4-61
Temporary error invalid station setting
information..................................................... 8-29
Temporary error invalid station
specification................................................... 8-31
Index - 4 Index - 4
WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range

If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product
within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service
Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at
the customer’s discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-
site that involves replacement of the failed module.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and
the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of repair
parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]
(1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc.,
which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels
on the product.
(2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused
by the user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions
or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary
by industry standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the
instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.
5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force
majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi.
7. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.
2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production

(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.
3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA
Center may differ.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause
found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi
products, special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not , compensation for accidents, and
compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site
equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
5. Changes in product specifications

The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.
6. Product application
(1) In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller, the usage conditions shall be that the application will
not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device, and
that backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general
industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other
power plants operated by respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system
is required, such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic
controller applications.
In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical
applications, incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation, equipment for recreation and amusement, and
safety devices, shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications.
However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi
representative outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties concerned agree to the
special circumstances, solely at the users discretion.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE GEVA AUSTRIA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC IRELAND GTS TURKEY
EUROPE B.V. Wiener Straße 89 EUROPE B.V. – Irish Branch Darülaceze Cad. No. 43 KAT: 2
German Branch A-2500 Baden Westgate Business Park TR-80270 Okmeydani-Istanbul
Gothaer Straße 8 Phone: +43 (0) 2252 / 85 55 20 IRL-Dublin 24 Phone: +90 (0) 212 / 320 1640
D-40880 Ratingen Fax: +43 (0) 2252 / 488 60 Phone: +353 (0) 1 / 419 88 00 Fax: +90 (0) 212 / 320 1649
Phone: +49 (0) 21 02 / 486-0 e mail: office@geva.at Fax: +353 (0) 1 / 419 88 90 e mail: gts@turk.net
Fax: +49 (0) 21 02 / 4 86-11 20 e mail: sales.info@meir.mee.com
e mail: megfamail@meg.mee.com TEHNIKON BELARUS CSC Automation Ltd. UKRAINE
Oktjabrskaya 16/5, Ap 704 SIA POWEL LATVIA 15, M. Raskova St., Fl. 10, Office 1010
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FRANCE BY-220030 Minsk Lienes iela 28 UA-02002 Kiev
EUROPE B.V. Phone: +375 (0) 17 / 22 75 704 LV-1009 Riga Phone: +380 (0) 44 / 238-83-16
French Branch Fax: +375 (0) 17 / 22 76 669 Phone: +371 784 / 22 80 Fax: +380 (0) 44 / 238-83-17
25, Boulevard des Bouvets e mail: tehnikon@belsonet.net Fax: +371 784 / 22 81 e mail: csc-a@csc-a.kiev.ua
F-92741 Nanterre Cedex e mail: utu@utu.lv
Phone: +33 1 55 68 55 68 Getronics b.v. BELGIUM
Fax: +33 1 55 68 56 85 Control Systems UAB UTU POWEL LITHUANIA
e mail: factory.automation@fra.mee.com Pontbeeklaan 43 Savanoriu pr. 187
B-1731 Asse-Zellik LT-2053 Vilnius AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC UK Phone: +32 (0) 2 / 467 17 51 Phone: +370 (0) 52323-101
EUROPE B.V. Fax: +32 (0) 2 / 467 17 45 Fax: +370 (0) 52322-980 CBI Ltd SOUTH AFRICA
UK Branch e mail: infoautomation@getronics.com e mail: powel@utu.lt Private Bag 2016
Travellers Lane ZA-1600 Isando
GB-Hatfield Herts. AL10 8 XB TELECON CO. BULGARIA INTEHSIS SRL MOLDOVA
4, A. Ljapchev Blvd. Cuza-Voda 36/1-81 Phone: +27 (0) 11/ 928 2000
Phone: +44 (0) 1707 / 27 61 00 Fax: +27 (0) 11/ 392 2354
Fax: +44 (0) 1707 / 27 86 95 BG-1756 Sofia MD-2061 Chisinau
Phone: +359 (0) 2 / 97 44 05 8 Phone: +373 (0)2 / 562 263 e mail: cbi@cbi.co.za
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ITALY Fax: +359 (0) 2 / 97 44 06 1 Fax: +373 (0)2 / 562 263
EUROPE B.V. e mail: — e mail: intehsis@mdl.net
Italian Branch
Via Paracelso 12 INEA CR d.o.o. CROATIA Getronics b.v. NETHERLANDS
Drvinje 63 Control Systems MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVE
I-20041 Agrate Brianza (MI)
Phone: +39 039 6053 1 HR-10000 Zagreb Donauweg 2 B
Phone: +385 (0) 1 / 36 67 140 NL-1043 AJ Amsterdam TEXEL Electronics LTD. ISRAEL
Fax: +39 039 6053 312 Box 6272
e mail: factory.automation@it.mee.com Fax: +385 (0) 1 / 36 67 140 Phone: +31 (0) 20 / 587 67 00
e mail: — Fax: +31 (0) 20 / 587 68 39 IL-42160 Netanya
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SPAIN e mail: info.gia@getronics.com Phone: +972 (0) 9 / 863 08 91
EUROPE B.V. AutoCont CZECHIA Fax: +972 (0) 9 / 885 24 30
Spanish Branch Control Systems s.r.o. Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY e mail: texel_me@netvision.net.il
Carretera de Rubí 76-80 Nemocnicni 12 Teglverksveien 1
E-08190 Sant Cugat del Vallés CZ-702 00 Ostrava 2 N-3002 Drammen
Phone: +34 9 3 / 565 3131 Phone: +420 59 / 6152 111 Phone: +47 (0) 32 / 24 30 00
Fax: +34 9 3 / 589 2948 Fax: +420 59 / 6152 562 Fax: +47 (0) 32 / 84 85 77
e mail: consys@autocont.cz e mail: info@beijer.no EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVE
e mail: industrial@sp.mee.com
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC JAPAN louis poulsen DENMARK MPL Technology Sp. z o.o. POLAND
industri & automation ul. Sliczna 36 AVTOMATIKA SEVER RUSSIA
CORPORATION Geminivej 32 PL-31-444 Kraków Krapivnij Per. 5, Of. 402
Office Tower “Z” 14 F DK-2670 Greve Phone: +48 (0) 12 / 632 28 85 RU-194044 St Petersburg
8-12,1 chome, Harumi Chuo-Ku Phone: +45 (0) 43 / 95 95 95 Fax: +48 (0) 12 / 632 47 82 Phone: +7 812 / 1183 238
Tokyo 104-6212 Fax: +45 (0) 43 / 95 95 91 e mail: krakow@mpl.pl Fax: +7 812 / 3039 648
Phone: +81 3 6221 6060 e mail: lpia@lpmail.com e mail: pav@avtsev.spb.ru
Fax: +81 3 6221 6075 Sirius Trading & Services srl ROMANIA
UTU Elektrotehnika AS ESTONIA Bd. Lacul Tei nr. 1 B CONSYS RUSSIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC USA Pärnu mnt.160i RO-72301 Bucuresti 2 Promyshlennaya St. 42
AUTOMATION EE-11317 Tallinn Phone: +40 (0) 21 / 201 7147 RU-198099 St Petersburg
500 Corporate Woods Parkway Phone: +372 (0) 6 / 51 72 80 Fax: +40 (0) 21 / 201 7148 Phone: +7 812 / 325 36 53
Vernon Hills, IL 60061 Fax: +372 (0) 6 / 51 72 88 e mail: sirius_t_s@fx.ro Fax: +7 812 / 325 36 53
Phone: +1 847 / 478 21 00 e mail: utu@utu.ee e mail: consys@consys.spb.ru
Fax: +1 847 / 478 22 83 ACP Autocomp a.s. SLOVAKIA
Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND Chalupkova 7 ELEKTROSTYLE RUSSIA
Ansatie 6a SK-81109 Bratislava Ul Garschina 11
FIN-01740 Vantaa Phone: +421 (02) / 5292-22 54, 55 RU-140070 Moscowskaja Oblast
Phone: +358 (0) 9 / 886 77 500 Fax: +421 (02) / 5292-22 48 Phone: +7 095/ 261 3808
Fax: +358 (0) 9 / 886 77 555 e mail: info@acp-autocomp.sk Fax: +7 095/ 261 3808
e mail: info@beijer.fi e mail: —
INEA d.o.o. SLOVENIA
PROVENDOR OY FINLAND Stegne 11 ICOS RUSSIA
Teljänkatu 8 A 3 SI-1000 Ljubljana Industrial Computer Systems Zao
FIN-28130 Pori Phone: +386 (0) 1-513 8100 Ryazanskij Prospekt 8a, Office 100
Phone: +358 (0) 2 / 522 3300 Fax: +386 (0) 1-513 8170 RU-109428 Moscow
Fax: +358 (0) 2 / 522 3322 e mail: inea@inea.si Phone: +7 095 / 232 - 0207
e mail: — Fax: +7 095 / 232 - 0327
Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN e mail: mail@icos.ru
UTECO A.B.E.E. GREECE Box 426
5, Mavrogenous Str. S-20124 Malmö NPP Uralelektra RUSSIA
GR-18542 Piraeus Phone: +46 (0) 40 / 35 86 00 Sverdlova 11a
Phone: +302 (0) 10 / 42 10 050 Fax: +46 (0) 40 / 35 86 02 RU-620027 Ekaterinburg
Fax: +302 (0) 10 / 42 12 033 e mail: info@beijer.se Phone: +7 34 32 / 53 27 45
e mail: uteco@uteco.gr Fax: +7 34 32 / 53 27 45
ECONOTEC AG SWITZERLAND e mail: elektra@etel.ru
Meltrade Automatika Kft. HUNGARY Postfach 282
55, Harmat St. CH-8309 Nürensdorf STC Drive Technique RUSSIA
HU-1105 Budapest Phone: +41 (0) 1 / 838 48 11 Poslannikov Per. 9, str.1
Phone: +36 (0)1 / 2605 602 Fax: +41 (0) 1 / 838 48 12 RU-107005 Moscow
Fax: +36 (0)1 / 2605 602 e mail: info@econotec.ch Phone: +7 095 / 786 21 00
e mail: office@meltrade.hu Fax: +7 095 / 786 21 01
e mail: info@privod.ru
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

Gothaer Strasse 8 Phone: +49 2102 486-0 Fax: +49 2102 486-7170 www.mitsubishi-automation.de
D-40880 Ratingen Hotline: +49 1805 000-765 megfa-mail@meg.mee.com www.mitsubishi-automation.com

Qj61bt11n Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Qj61bt11n Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Qj61bt11n Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

Programmable Logic Controllers

Art. no.: 158161

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

Japanese Manual Version SH-080395-D

Thank you for purchasing the MELSEC-Q series PLC.

2.1 System Configuration.............................................................................................................................. 2- 1

3.1 Performance Specifications .................................................................................................................... 3- 1

4.1 Function List ............................................................................................................................................ 4- 1

5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME 5- 1 to 5-45

5.1 Link Scan Time ....................................................................................................................................... 5- 1

6 PARAMETER SETTINGS 6- 1 to 6-52

6.1 Procedure from Parameter Settings to Data Link Startup ..................................................................... 6- 1

7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK 7- 1 to 7-18

7.1 Procedure Before Starting the Data Link ............................................................................................... 7- 1

8.1 Precautions on Programming .................................................................................................................. 8- 1

9.1 When Remote I/O Net Mode is Used..................................................................................................... 9- 1

10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND

10.1 When Remote Net Ver. 1 Mode is Used............................................................................................ 10- 1

11.1 Secured 32-bit Data ............................................................................................................................ 11- 1

12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE

13.1 Verification upon Problem Occurrence .............................................................................................. 13- 1

APPENDIX App- 1 to App-46

Appendix 1 External Dimensions Diagram...............................................................................................App- 1

INDEX Index- 1 to Index- 4

Generic Term/Abbreviation Description

The components of the QJ61BT11N are listed below.

Item name Quantity

QJ61BT11N main unit 1

Terminal resistor 110 Ω, 1/2 W (brown-brown-brown)

Terminal resistor 130 Ω, 1/2 W (brown-orange-brown)

(4) By connecting various devices made by Mitsubishi's partner manufacturers, the

Remote I/O station

Device manufactured by one of our Remote device station

Remote I/O station

1.2 Compatibility with CC-Link

1 This product supports following CC-Link functions and performance.

The features of the CC-Link are described below.

(1) Remote I/O station communication

PLC CPU Master station Remote I/O station

Automatic refresh Remote input Link scan

Automatic refresh Remote output Link scan

(2) Remote device station communication

PLC CPU Master station Remote device station

Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote

Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote

Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote

(3) Local station communication

(a) Cyclic transmission

PLC CPU Master station Local station PLC CPU

Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote Automatic refresh

Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote Automatic refresh

Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote Automatic refresh

(b) Transient transmission

PLC CPU Master station Local station PLC CPU

(4) Intelligent device station communication

(a) Cyclic transmission

PLC CPU Master station Intelligent device station Servo amplifier